1 UISC SOLAS Interpretations

INTERNATIONAL ASSOCIATION OF CLASSIFICATION SOCIETIES

Interpretationsof the International Conventionfor the Safety ofLife at Sea, 1974and its Amendments

IACS Int. 2005

Co

ntents, Pag

e 1

CONTENTS AND STATUSInterpretation Reference* Adopted Submitted to IMO Remarks

by IACS IMO Approval

SC1 Main source of electrical power Ch. II-1 Reg. 41.1 1985/Rev.1 June 2002(81)

SC2 Main source of electrical power Ch. II-1 Reg. 41.1.2 Deleted Jul 2003(81)

SC3 Emergency source of electrical power Ch. II-1 Reg. 42.1.4 & 1985/Rev. 1 May 199943.1.4(81)

SC4 Emergency source of electrical power Ch. II-1 Reg. 42.2.3.1 & 198543.2.4.1(81)

SC5 Emergency source of electrical Ch. II-1 Reg. 42.2.3.1 1985power in passenger ships (81)

SC6 Emergency source of electrical Ch. II-1 Reg. 43.6 1985power in cargo ships (81)

SC7 Precautions against shock, fire and Ch. II-1 Reg. 45.2 1985other hazards of electrical origin (81)

SC8 Precautions against shock, fire and Ch. II-1 Reg. 45.3.3 1985other hazards of electrical origin (81)


SC10 Precautions against shock, fire and Ch. II-1 Reg. 45.5.2 1985/Rev 2. May 2001other hazards of electrical origin (81)




*Number in brackets: Year of adoption of the SOLAS Amendment for which the interpretation is valid

IAC

S Int. 1985/R

ev 2003

Co

ntents, Pag

e 2Interpretation Reference* Adopted Submitted to IMO Remarks


SC14 Special requirements for machinery, Ch. II-1 Reg. 53.3 1985boilers and electrical installations (81)

SC15 Definitions Ch. II-2 Reg. 3.19 1985(81)



SC18 Fire pumps, fire mains Ch. II-2 Reg. 4.3.1.3 1985hydrants and hoses (81)

SC19 Fire pumps, fire mains Ch. II-2 Reg. 4.3.3.2 1985/Rev. 1 1996hydrants and hoses (81)

SC20 Fire pumps, fire mains Ch. II-2 Reg. 4.3.3.2.1 1985hydrants and hoses (81)

SC21 Fire pumps, fire mains Ch. II-2 Reg. 4.3.3.2.5 1985/Rev. 1 1996hydrants and hoses (81)

SC22 Fire pumps, fire mains Ch. II-2 Reg. 4.3.3.2.7 1985hydrants and hoses (81)

SC23 Fire pumps, fire mains Ch. II-2 Reg. 4.3.4.1 1985hydrants and hoses (81)

SC24 Fire pumps, fire mains Ch. II-2 Reg. 4.4.2 1985hydrants and hoses (81)

SC25 Fixed gas fire-extinguishing systems Ch. II-2 Reg. 5.1.6 1985, Corr./Rev.1 June 2000(81)

SC26 Deleted 1996

SC27 Deleted 1996

SC28 Deleted 1996

Co

ntents, Pag

e 3Interpretation Reference* Adopted Submitted to IMO Remarks


SC29 Deleted 1996

SC30 Fire-extinguishing arrangements Ch. II-2 Reg. 7.1.2,1985/ Rev. 1 June 2000in machinery spaces 7.1.3, 7.2.2

and 7.2.3(81)

SC31 Fire-extinguishing arrangements Ch. II-2 Reg. 7.5 1985in machinery spaces (81)

SC32 Fixed high expansion foam Ch. II-2 Reg. 9 1985fire-extinguishing system (81)

SC33 Special arrangements in Ch. II-2 Reg. 11.2.2 1985machinery spaces (81)

SC34 Automatic sprinkler, fire detection Ch. II-2 Reg. 12.3 1985and fire alarm system (81)

SC35 Fixed fire detection and Ch. II-2 Reg. 13.1.3 1985fire alarm system (81)

SC36 Arrangements for oil fuel, lubricating Ch. II-2 Reg. 15.2.5 1985oil and other flammable oils (81)

SC37 Arrangements for oil fuel, lubricating Ch. II-2 Reg. 15.2.8 1985oil and other flammable oils (81)

SC38 Arrangements for oil fuel, lubricating Ch. II-2 Reg. 15.3 1985oil and other flammable oils (81)

SC39 Ventilation systems in ships other Ch. II-2 Reg. 16.6 1985than passenger ships carrying (81)more than 36 passengers

SC40 Means of escape Ch. II-2 Reg. 28.3.1.1.1 1985(81)

SC41 Means of escape Ch. II-2 Reg. 28.3.2 1985(81)

SC42 Fire protection arrangements in Ch. II-2 Reg. 37.2.2.1 1985cargo spaces incl. special and 53.2.4.2)category spaces (81)

Co

ntents, Pag

e 4

Interpretation Reference* Adopted Submitted to IMO Remarksby IACS IMO Approval

SC43 Fire protection arrangements in cargo Ch. II-2Reg. 37.2.2.1, 1985spaces incl. special category spaces 2.2.2, (3.2.1),

3.2.2, 38.(4.1),4.2, 53.(2.4.1),

2.4.4(81)

SC44 Bulkheads within accommodation Ch. II-2Reg. 42.4 1974and service spaces (81)

SC45 Fire integrity of bulkheads and Ch. II-2Reg. 44 1985decks (81)

SC46 Protection of stairways and lift Ch. II-2Reg. 46.1 1985trunks in accommodation spaces, (81)service spaces and control stations

SC47 Restricted use of combustible Ch. II-2Reg. 49 1985materials (81)

SC48 Fire protection arrangements in Ch. II-2Reg. 53.1.2 1985cargo spaces (81)

SC49 Fire protection arrangements in Ch. II-2Reg. 53.1.3 1985cargo spaces (81)

SC50 Special requirements for ships Ch. II-2Reg. 54.2.1.3 1985carrying dangerous goods (81)



SC53 Special requirements for ships Ch. II-2Reg. 54.2.51985 cancelled/1993carrying dangerous goods (81)

SC54 Location and separation of spaces Ch. II-2Reg. 56 1985/Rev 1 1997(81)

SC55 Location and separation of spaces Ch. II-2Reg. 56.6.21985(81)

Co

ntents, Pag

e 5


SC56 Venting, purging, gas freeing and Ch. II-2 Reg. 59.1.9.3 & 1985ventilation 59.1.9.4

(81)

SC57 Venting, purging, gas freeing and Ch. II-2 Reg. 59.1.9.3 & 1985ventilation 59.1.9.4

(81)

SC58 Venting, purging, gas freeing and Ch. II-2 Reg. 59.2 1985ventilation (81)

SC59 Cargo tank protection Ch. II-2 Reg. 60.6 1985(81)

SC60 Fixed deck foam systems Ch. II-2 Reg. 61.5 1985(81)

SC61 Fixed deck foam systems Ch. II-2 Reg. 61.10 1985/Rev.1 1994(81)

SC62 Inert gas systems Ch. II-2 Reg. 62.13.4 198518.2(81)

SC63 Pre-discharge alarm of fixed gas fire Ch. II-2 Reg. 51.6 1985extinguishing systems (81)

SC64 Fire dampers in ventilation ducts Ch. II-2 Reg. 16.2 1985(81)

SC65 Ventilation ducts for galley Ch. II-2 Reg. 16.3 1985(81)

SC66 Integrity of emergency generator Ch. II-2 Reg. 44 1985space Table 44.1

(81)

SC67 Doors in fire-resisting corridor Ch. II-2 Reg. 47.3 1985bulkheads of cargo ships (81)

SC68 Cofferdams adjacent to slop tanks of Ch. II-2 Reg. 56.4.1 1985combination carriers (81)

SC69 Arrangement for pumping of slops Ch. II-2 Reg. 56.4.2 1985in combination carriers in dry (81)cargo mode

Co

ntents, Pag

e 6

IAC

S Int. 1993/R

ev. 2004


SC70 Area classification and selection Ch. II-2 Reg. 59.1.7 1985/Rev.1 May 2001of electrical equipment 59.1.9

(1981)IBC Code Para 8.2.2IGC Code Para 8.2.10

SC71 Tank level gauging systems Ch. II-2 Reg. 59.1.6 1985(1981)

BCH CodePara 2.13.1(a)IBC Code Para 8.1.2

SC72 In a ship engaged regularly in Ch. II-2 Reg. 42.2.7 1985voyages of short duration 43.2.6.2

(1981)

SC73 Fire protection arrangements in Ch. II-2 Reg. 37.1.5.3 1985/Rev.1 May 2001cargo spaces including special 53.2.2.3category spaces (1981)

SC74 Fire protection arrangements in Ch. II-2 Reg. 37.2.2, 1985cargo spaces including special 37.3.2,category spaces 38.4.1

53.2.4.3(1981)

SC75 Fire protection arrangements in Ch. II-2 Reg. 53.2.3.3 1985cargo spaces (1981)

SC76 Engine bearing temperature monitors Ch. II-1 Reg. 47.2 1985(1981)

SC77 Cargo tanks overflow control system Ch. II-2 Reg. 59.1.6use of spill valves (1981)

SC78 Fair safety measures for tankers Ch. II-2 Reg. 55 1989(1981)

SC79 Certified safe type of electrical Ch. II-2 Reg. 19.3.2 1993/Rev.1 May 2004equipment for ships carryingdangerous goods

SC80 Fire-extinguishing arrangement Ch. II-2 Reg. 18.7 1992 Corr./1995 for paint lockers


SC81 Drainage of enclosed spaces situated Ch. II-1 Reg. 21.1.6.1 1993on the bulkhead deck (89)

SC82 Protection against noise Ch. II-1 Reg. 36 1993(81)

SC83 Continuity of the supply when Ch. II-1 Reg. 41.1.5 1993transformers constitutes an (81)essential part of the electrical supply system

SC84 Purpose built container space Ch. II-2 Reg. 54.1.2.2 1993(81)

SC85 Ro-ro Cargo Space Ch. II-2 Reg. 54.1.2.3 1993(81)

SC86 Weather Decks Ch. II-2 Reg. 54 Table 54.1 1993(81)

SC87 Certification of carriage Ch. II-2 Reg. 54.3 1993of solid dangerous bulk cargoes (81)

SC88 Fire water supply capacity Ch. II-2 Reg. 54.2.1 1993(81)

SC89 Ventilation of Cargo spaces Ch. II-2 Reg. 54.2.4 1993/Rev. 1 1996(81)

SC90 Bilge Drainage Ch. II-2 Reg. 54.2.5 1993(81)

SC91 Personal Protection - Ch. II-2 Reg. 54.2.6.1 1993Protective Clothing (81)

SC92 Personal Protection - Ch. II-2 Reg. 54 2.6.2 1993Self-contained breathing Apparatus (81) C

ontents, P

age 7

Co

ntents, Pag

e 8


SC93Enclosure of stern tubes on cargo CH. II-1 Reg. 11.9 1994ships

SC94 Mechanical and electricalindependency of electric steering controlsystems for steering gears CH. II-1 Reg. 29 1994

SC95 Communication between navigatingbridge and machinery space CH. II-1 Reg. 37 1994

SC96 Capacity of an emergency fire pump CH. II-2 Reg. 4.3.3.3.1 Rev.1 2001

SC97 Connection of a pump to fire main CH.II-2 Reg. 4.3.3.4 1994/Rev.1 June 2002

SC98 Fire hose nozzles of a plastic type material CH. II-2 Reg. 4.8 1994

SC99 Flexible bellows of combustible materials CH. II-2 Reg. 16.1 1994

SC100 Closing appliances of ventilationinlets and outlets CH. II-2 Reg. 16.9 1994

SC101 Main vertical zones CH. II-2 Reg. 24 1994

SC102 Cold Service CH. II-2 Reg. 34.2 1994

SC103 Insulation of machinery space boundaries CH. II-2 Reg. 54.2.8 1994

SC104 Quick closing valve for emergency generator fuel tank CH. II-2 Reg. 15.2.5 1995 1995 FP40

SC105Relief valve in oil filling lines CH. II-2 Reg. 15.2.7 1995 1995 FP40

SC106Galley exhaust duct CH. II-2 Reg. 16.7 1995 1995 FP40

SC107Continuous ceiling CH. II-2 Reg. 25.3 1995 1995 FP40

SC108Galley exhaust duct CH. II-2 Reg. 32.1.9 1995 1995 FP40

Co

ntents, Pag

e 9

Interpretation Reference* Adopted Submitted to IMO Remarks


SC109 Open Top Container Holds - Water supplies CH. II-2 Reg. 54.2.1 1995 1995 FP40

SC110 Open Top Container Holds -Ventilation CH. II-2 Reg. 54.2.4 1995 1995 FP40

SC111 Open Top Container Holds -Bilge pumping CH. II-2 Reg. 54.2.5 1995 1995 FP40

SC112 Deleted January 2002

SC113 Emergency Towing Arrangements on Tankers Res. MSC 35 (63)2.10) 1996 1996 MSC 66Prototype Test

SC114 Emergency Fire Pump Access Reg. 4.3.3.2.9 1996

SC115 Fire detection system with remotely andindividually identifiable detectors Reg. 13.1.4 1996



SC118 Exhaust duct from galley ranges Reg. 16.7 1996

SC119 Balancing ducts Reg. 31 & 47 1996

SC120 Access to forecastle spaces on tankers Reg. 56 1996

SC121 Fire Pump Isolation Requirements Reg. 4.6.3 1997

SC 122 Corrosion Prevention in Seawater Ballast Tanks CH.II-1 Reg. 3-2 V. 0.1 April, 1988

SC 123 Machinery Installations - Service Tank Arrangements Reg. II-1/26.11 1998/Rev. 2 June 2002

SC124 Emergency Source of Power in Passenger and Cargo Ships Reg. II-1/42.3.4 and II-1/43.3.4 May, 1999/Rev.1 June 2002

Co

ntents, Pag

e 10

IAC

S Int. 1999/R

ev. 2004



SC125 B and C Class Divisions Reg. II-2/3 Rev.1 July 2004

SC126 Firse Protection Materials for Cargo Ships May, 1998/Rev. 1 June 2000

SC 127 Paint Reg. II-2/34.7 and 49.2 Rev.1 July 2004

SC 128 CO2 Discharge Time Reg. II-2/5.2.4, Reg. II-2/38.2.1, Reg. II-2/53.2.2.1 Rev.1 July 2004

SC 129 Fire Detection in Unmanned Machinery Spaces Reg. II-2/14 Rev.1 July 2004

SC 130 Fire Detection and Sprinkler Systems in Refrigerated Chambers and similar spaces Reg. II-2/36.2,

Reg. II-2/41.2.2 and .5 Rev.1 July 2004

SC 131 Liquid Cargoes for which regular foam is not Reg. II-2/55.2 May, 1998, effective for Fire Fighting Rev.1 July 2004

SC 132 Release Operation of the CO2 System Reg. II-2/5.2.5 Rev.1 July 2004

SC 133 Oil Mist Detector on High Speed Engines - Chapter I-1, Reg. 47.2 May, 1998“equivalent device”

SC 134 Essential Services & Arrangements of sources Chapter II-1, Reg.40.1.1, /June 2002of Power, Supply, Control & Monitoring to the 40.1.2, 41.1.2 and 41.1.3different categories of Essential Services (SOLAS Reg. II-1/40 & 41)

SC 135 Escape Route or Low Location Lighting (LLL) Chapter II-2,b DeletedReg. 28.1.10

SC 136 Connecting means by which the main busbars of the main source of 1999/Rev.2 July 2004electrical power are normally connected

SC 137 Definition of High Speed Craft April, 1998

SC 138 Safe Access to Tanker Bows May, 1998

SC 139 Navigation Bridge Visibility Rev. 1 Dec 2003

SC 140 Secondary means of venting cargo tanks (Reg. II-2/59.1.2.3) October, 1998Rev.1 June 1999

Co

ntents, Pag

e 11

Remarks Interpretation Reference* Adopted Submitted to IMO by IACS IMO Approval

SC 141 Information on compliance with requirements Ch.XII, Reg.8.3 Deleted 1999 MSC 71 Res MSC.89(71)for bulk carriers - “triangle” to be marked on a bulk carrier

SC 142 Deleted - January 2000

SC 143 Stowage of Marine Evacuation Systems Ch.III, Reg.15 1999

SC 144 Periodic Servicing of Launching Appliances Ch.III, Reg.20.11 1999/ 2000 DE43and on-load Releasing Gear Rev. 1 Nov 1999

SC 145 Public Address System LSA Code, para. 7.2.2 1998 1999 DE42

SC 146 Fire hose couplings and nozzles May 1999

SC 147 Watertight door closure May 1999

SC 148 Ventilation by fan coil units May 1999

SC 149 Portable instruments for measuring flammablevapours May 1999

SC 150 Location of the foam system equipment May 1999

SC 151 Location of the main generating station with respect to the main switchboard and associatedsection boards May 1999

SC 152 Use of Emergency Generator in Port May 1999

SC 153 Rudder Stock Diameter Ch.II-1,Reg.29.3.3 & 19.14 Feb 2000 2000 DE 43

SC 154 Provision of Detailed Information on SpecificCargo Hold Flooding Scenarios (SOLAS XII/9.3) Mar 2000

SC 155 Lightweight check in lieu of inclining test June 2000

Contents, P

age 12



SC 156 Doors in Watertight bulkheads of cargo ships June 2002and Passenger Ships

SC 157 Main Source of Electrical Power Rev.1 Feb 2005

SC 158 Horizontal Fire Zone Concept June 2000

SC 159 Equivalent Protection /Corr. 1 May 2001

SC 160 Method IIIC Construction June 2000

SC 161 Timber deck cargo in the context of damage stability requirements May 2000

SC 162 Emergency fire pumps for cargo ships - General Feb. 2002

SC 163 Emergency fire pump in cargo ships - sea suction and sea valve Feb. 2002

SC 164 Emergency fire pumps in cargo ships - priming Feb. 2002

SC 165 Electrical cables for the emergency fire pump June 2002/Rev.1 May 2004

SC 166 Waste Receptacles June 2002

SC 167 Electrical distribution boards June 2002

SC 168 Hydrants for dangerous goods June 2002

SC 169 Foam systems positions of aft monitors June 2002/Corr.Feb 2003

SC 170 Low pressure CO2 systems June 2002

SC 171 Interpretation of the term “First Survey” Jul. 2002

SC 172 Monitoring the concentration of hydrocarbon gases in cargo pump Aug 2002rooms on oil tankers

SC 173 Safety Devices in Venting Systems (Reg.II-2/4.5.3.3) July 2003

SC 174 A 60 Front Insulation of Tankers(Reg.II-2/9.2.4.2.5) July 2003

SC175 Combustible Gaskets in Ventilation Duct Connections (Reg.II-2/9.7.1.1 ) July 2003

SC 176 Fixed Local Application Fire Extinguishing System July 2003/Rev.1 May 2004(Reg.II-2/10.5.6)

SC177 Lubricating Oil and other Flammable Oil System Arrangements – Retroactive July 2003Application of Regulations II-2/15.3 and 15.4 of SOLAS (2001 Edition)

SC178 Emergency Fire Pumps in Cargo Ships (FSS Code, Ch. 12, 2.2.1.3) Withdrawn

IAC

S Int. 2005

▼



SC 179 Dewatering of forward spaces of bulk carriers Sept 2003

SC180 Hold ballast and dry space water level detectors (Chapter XII, Rev.1 May 2004Regulation 12 (Resolution MSC.134(76)) and performance standards for water level detectors on bulk carriers(Resolution MSC.145(77))

SC181 Bridge Design, Equipment Arrangement and ProceduresSOLAS Chapter V, Regulation 15

Rev. 0.1 Nov. 2004

SC182 Bulk carriers not complying with SOLAS XII/9 as of 1 January 2004(Chapter XII, Regulation 9) Nov 2003/Corr 1 Dec 2003

SC183 Endorsement of Certificates with the Date of Completion of the Nov 2003Survey on which they are Based

SC 184 Machinery Installations - Deep Ship Condition Dec 2003

SC185 Starting Arrangements for Emergency Generating Sets Dec 2003

SC186 Acceptable voltage variations in voltage when the emergency May 2004loads are supplied from a battery via an electronicconverter/inverter

SC187 Electric steering gear overload alalrm May 2004

SC188 Segregation of Cargo Oil Tanks (Reg.II-2/4.5.1.1) May 2004

SC189 High pressure oil fuel delivery lines on small engines May 2004

SC190 IACS Unified Interpretations (UI) SC 190Application of SOLAS Regulation II-1/3-6 (Res MSC.134(76)) April 2004and Techncial Provisions on Permanent Means of Access(Res MSC.133(76))

SC 191 For the application of amended SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6 Nov 2004(resolution MSC.151(78)) and revised Technical provisionsfor means of access for inspections (resolution MSC.158 (78))

SC 192 Arrangement of galley ducts Dec 2004

IAC

S Int. 2004

Contents, P

age 13

SC1(1974)(Rev.1June 2002)

IACS Int. 1974/Rev.1 2002

SC1

Main source of electrical powerShaft driven generator systems (Regulation II-1/41.1.3)

Generators and generator systems, having the ship’s main propulsion machinery as their prime mover,may be accepted as part of the ship’s main source of electrical power, provided:

1. They are to be capable of operating under all weather conditions during sailing and during manoeuvring, also when the vessel is stopped, within the specified limits for the voltage variation in IEC 60092 - 301 and the frequency variation in UR E5.

2. Their rated capacity is safeguarded during all operations given under 1, and is such that in the event of any other one of the generators failing, the services given under Regulation II-1/41.1.2 can be maintained.

3. The short circuit current of the generator/generator system is sufficient to trip the generator/generator system circuit-breaker taking into account the selectivity of the protective devices for the distribution system.

Protection is to be arranged in order to safeguard the generator/generator system in case of a short circuit in the main bus bar. The generator/generator system is to be suitable for further use after fault clearance.

4. Standby sets are started in compliance with the paragraph 2.2 of SC 157.

Note: 1.Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2003.

▼▼

SC1-1

SC2

Main source of electrical powerDeleted in 2003

SC2(1974)(Rev.1 June 2002)

▼▼

SC3


SC3(1985)(Rev.1May 1999)

Emergency source of electrical power(Chapter II-1, Regulation 42.1.4 & 43.1.4)

SOLAS Regulation II-1/42.1.4 and 43.1.4 read:

Provided that suitable measures are taken for safeguarding independent emergency operation underall circumstances, the emergency generator may be used exceptionally, and for short periods, tosupply non-emergency circuits.

Interpretations

Exceptionally, whilst the vessel is at sea, is understood to mean conditions such as

1. blackout situation 2. dead-ship situation3. routine use for testing4. short-term parallel operation with the main source of electrical power for the purpose of load

transfer

Unless instructed otherwise by the Administration, the emergency generator may be used during laytime in port for the supply of the ship mains, provided the requirements of UI SC 152 are compliedwith.

Note: Rev.1 of UI SC 3 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2000

▼▼

Emergency source of electrical power

(Chapter II-1, Regulation 42.2.3.1 & 43.2.4.1)

Internal communication equipment required in an emergency is generally:1. The means of communication which is provided between the navigating bridge and the steering

gear compartment2. The means of communication which is provided between the navigating bridge and the position in

the machinery space or control room from which the engines are normally controlled3. The means of communication which is provided between the bridge and the radio telegraph or

radio telephone stations.

Emergency source of electrical power inpassenger ships

(Chapter II-1, Regulation 42.2.3.1 only)

1. The means of communication which is provided between the officer of the watch and the person responsible for closing any watertight door which is not capable of being closed from a central control station

2. The public address system or other effective means of communication which is provided throughout the accommodation, public and service spaces

3. The means of communication which is provided between the navigating bridge and the main fire control station.

Emergency source of electrical power incargo ships

(Chapter II-1, Regulation 43.6)

Attention is drawn to the following additional requirements:1. IMO Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Liquefied Gases in Bulk, clause

2.9.2.2.2. IMO Code for the Construction and Equipment of Ships Carrying Dangerous Chemicals in Bulk,

clause 2.9.3.2.

SC4

IACS Int. 1985

SC4–SC6

SC5

SC6

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

SC7

SC7–SC9

Precautions against shock, fire and otherhazards of electrical origin


Text:"Exposed live parts having voltages to earth exceeding a voltage to be specified by the Administration"

Interpretation:Voltage values as stated in Regulation 45.1.1.1.


(Chapter II-1, Regulation 45.3.3)

Text:<<and special precautions shall be taken to the satisfaction of the Administration>>.

Interpretation:1. All final sub-circuits should consist of two insulated wires, the hull return being achieved by

connecting to the hull one of the busbars of the distribution board from which they originate.2. Earth wires should be in accessible locations to permit their ready examination and to enable their

disconnection for testing of insulation.



Text:<<Insulation level monitoring devices>>.

Interpretation:A device or devices to continuously monitor the values of electrical insulation to earth and to give anaudible or visual indication in case of abnormally low insulation values.

SC8

SC9

IACS Int. 1985

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

▼



Text:"shall be at least of a flame-retardant type .

Interpretation:This may be achieved by cables which have been tested in accordance with IECPublication 60332-1 or a test procedure equivalent thereto.

Text:

shall be so installed as not to impair their original flame-retarding properties .

Interpretation:

This may be achieved by:

Method 1Cables which have been tested in accordance with IEC Publication 60332-3 CategoryA/F or a test procedure for cables installed in bunches equivalent thereto.

Method 2 (See Figures 1-4)

2.1 Fire stops having at least B-0 penetrations fitted as follows:1 cable entries at the main and emergency switchboard,2 where cables enter engine control rooms,3 cable entries at centralized control panels for propulsion machinery and essential

auxiliaries,4 at each end of totally enclosed cable trunks; and

2.2 In enclosed and semi-enclosed spaces, cable runs are to comply with thefollowing:

1 to have fire protection coating applied:- to at least 1 metre in every 14 metres - to entire length of vertical runs, or2 fitted with fire stops having at least B-0 penetrations every second deck or

approximately 6 metres for vertical runs and at every 14 metres for horizontal runs.

The cable penetrations are to be installed in steel plates of at least 3 mm thicknessextending all around to twice the largest dimension of the cable run for vertical runsand once for horizontal runs, but need not extend through ceilings, decks, bulkheadsor solid sides of trunk. In cargo area, fire stops need only be fitted at the boundaries ofthe spaces.

SC10(Rev 11997)(Rev.2May 2001)

SC10

IACS Int. 1985/Rev 2 2001

Note: Changes introduced in Rev.2 are to be implemented by IACS Members andAssociates from 1 July 2001.


▼

SC10

SC10

FIRE STOPS (STEEL PLATE AT LEAST 3mmTHICKNESS)

NON TOTALLY ENCLOSED TRUNKS

VERTICAL

6mFIRE STOP WITHSTEEL PLATE ANDB-0 PENETRATION

a A

2a

a B

2a

2a

Fig. 2

Fig. 1

B-0PENETRATION

B-0PENETRATION

FIRE STOPS (STEEL PLATE AT LEAST 3mmTHICKNESS)TOTALLY ENCLOSED TRUNKS

B-0PENETRATION

B-0PENETRATION

STEEL PLATE

FIRE STOPS (STEEL PLATE AT LEAST 3mmTHICKNESS)

NON TOTALLY ENCLOSEDTRUNKS

HORIZONTAL

14m

��a STEEL

PLATEa 1a

REMARK:THE LENGTH (a) OF THE FIRE STOPS FOR HORIZONTALCABLE RUNS SHOULD BE AT LEAST ONCE OF THELARGEST DIMENSION OF THE CABLE BUNCH OR UPTO THE DECK

Fig. 3

▼

FIRE STOPS (STEEL PLATE AT LEAST 3mm THICKNESS)OPEN CABLE RUNS

VERTICAL

Fig. 4

FIRE STOP

FIRE STOP

6m

2a a 2a 2a

B-0PENETRATION

STEELPLATE

OR

CO

ATIN

G E

NTI

RE

LEN

GTH

FIRE STOP

HORIZONTAL14m

1 a

1 a

1 a a

14m1m

COATING COATING

1m1 a

B-0PENETRATION

STEEL PLATE

OR

Precautions against shock, fire and otherhazards of electrical origin(Chapter II-1, Regulation 45.5.3)

High fire risk areas are those considered as such in Chapter II-2 Regulations 26, 27, 44 and 58.



Special precautions should be as follows:1. Cables to be appropriately sheathed according to intended environment.2. Cables to be suitably protected against mechanical damage.3. Electrical and mechanical segregation of intrinsically safe circuits from other circuits.4. Effective earthing of metal coverings of cables.



Text:"overload......or where the Administration may exceptionally otherwise permit".

Interpretation:1. When it is impracticable, for example engine starting battery circuit.2. When by design the circuit is incapable of developing overload, for example control transformers.3. For essential motors which are duplicated and thruster motors, the overload protection may be

replaced by an overload alarm.

Special requirements for machinery, boilersand electrical installations


This regulation is applicable to stand-by machines required by the Rules of the individual Societies for:1. oil engines for propulsion purposes,2. steam turbines for propulsion purposes,3. gas turbines for propulsion purposes,4. controllable pitch propellers.

SC12

IACS Int. 1985

SC11-SC14

SC13

SC14

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

SC11

▼▼

SC15

SC15–SC18

Definitions


Spaces which contain oil fired equipment other than boilers, such as inert gas generators, incinerators,waste disposal units etc. are to be considered as machinery spaces of category <<A>> in accordance withthis regulation.

Definitions


"Oil fuel unit" includes any equipment used for the preparation and delivery of oil fuel, heated or not, toboilers (including inert gas generators) and engines (including gas turbines) at a pressure of more than0.18 N/mm2.

Definitions


Spaces containing, for instance, the following battery sources should be regarded as control stationsregardless of battery capacity:1. emergency batteries in separate battery room for power supply from black-out till start of

emergency generator,2. emergency batteries in separate battery room as reserve source of energy to radiotelegraph

installation,3. batteries for start of emergency generator,4. and, in general, all emergency batteries required in pursuance of Reg. II-1/42 or Reg. II-1/43..

Fire pumps, fire mains, hydrants and hoses

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 4.3.1.3)

Cargo ships of less than 1,000 tons gross tonnage shall be provided with not less than two power firepumps, one of which is to be an independently driven pump.

SC16

SC17

SC18

IACS Int. 1985

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼

Fire pumps, fire mains, hydrants and hoses(Chapter II-1, Regulation 4.3.3.2)

Not only emergency pumps, but also sea water inlet, suction and delivery pipes with valves etc. shall beoutside the compartment containing the other fire pumps. Only short lengths of suction and dischargepiping may, however, under certain circumstances penetrate the machinery spaces if enclosed insubstantial steel casing (Reg. II-2/4.6.3).

The sea-chest with valve and the main part of the suction piping should be, in general, outside themachinery spaces. If this arrangement cannot be made, the sea chest may be fitted in the machineryspaces on the condition that the valve is remotely controlled from a position near the pump, in the samecompartment, and the suction pipe is as short as practicable.

In lieu of the steel casing the pipe may be insulated equivalent to class A-60 standard. The pipe shouldhave substantial wall thickness and in no case less than 11 mm and should be all welded except forflanged connection to the sea inlet valve.


(Chapter II-2, Regulation 4.3.3.2.1)

The capacity of the emergency fire pump shall be not less than 40 per cent of the required total capacityof the fire pumps as per Reg. II-2/4.2.1.

Fire pumps, fire mains, hydrants and hoses(Chapter II-2, Regulation 4.3.3.2.5)

The ballast condition of a vessel on entering or leaving a dry dock need not be considered a servicecondition.



In case of an air-lock the two doors are to be of steel, reasonably gas tight, self closing and without anyhold back arrangement.

SC19(Rev 11996)


SC19–SC22

SC20

SC21(Rev 11996)

SC22

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼

SC19-1



Only one of the required fire pumps needs to be provided with automatic starting.



Text:"..... the following minimum pressure shall be maintained at all hydrants:

Passenger ships:Under 1.000 tons gross tonnage, to the satisfaction of the Administration.

Cargo ships:Under 1.000 tons gross tonnage, to the satisfaction of the Administration.

Interpretation:The minimum pressure is to be sufficient to produce a 12 m jet throw, through any adjacent hydrants, toany part of the ships referred to in Reg. II-2/4.5.1, on passenger and cargo ships under 1.000 tons grosstonnage.

Fixed gas fire-extinguishing systems


Text:"The alarm shall operate for a suitable period before the medium is released".

Interpretation:1) Certain spaces for which the automatic warning of release of the extinguishing medium is

required:Ordinary cargo holds need not comply with Reg. II-2/5.1.6. However, ro/ro cargo spaces, holds incontainer ships equipped for integrated reefer containers and other spaces where personnel can beexpected to enter and where the access is therefore facilitated by doors or manway hatches shall comply with the above regulation.Small spaces, such as small compressor rooms, paint lockers, lamp stores etc. need not complywith Reg. II-2/5.1.6.

2) Advance period of time of alarm sounding:The alarm shall sound for the period of time necessary to evacuate the space but not less than 20 s.

Note: Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2001.

SC23(1985)


SC23–SC25

SC24(1985)

SC25(1985)(Rev.1 June 2000)

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

Deleted

Deleted

Deleted

Deleted

▼

SC26

IACS Int. 1985/Rev 1996

SC26–SC29

SC27

SC28

▼▼▼▼

SC29

▼

SC26-1

▼▼

IACS Int. 1998/Rev. 1 2000

SC30

Fire-extinguishing arrangements in machineryspaces

(Interpretation of Chapter II-2, Regulation 7.1 and 7.2)

Number of systems, appliances and extinguishersrequired by Reg. II-2/7.1 & 7.2

Notes:

*1. May be located at outside of the entrance to the room.*2. May be arranged outside of the space concerned for smaller spaces of cargo ships.*3. The amount of sand is to be at least 0.1 m3. A shovel is to be provided. Sand boxes may

be substituted by approved portable fire extinguishers.*4. Not required for such spaces in cargo ships wherein all boilers contained therein are for

domestic services and are less than 175 kW.*5. In case of machinery spaces containing both boilers and internal combustion engines

(case not explicitly considered in Reg. 7) reg. 7.1 and 7.2 apply, with the exception that one of the foam fire-extinguishers of at least 45 l capacity or equivalent (required by Reg. 7.2.3) may be omitted on the condition that the 135 l extinguisher (required by Reg. 7.1.3)can protect efficiently and readily the area covered by the 45 l extinguisher.

*6. Oil fired machinery other than boilers such as fired inert gas generators, incinerators andwaste disposal units are to be considered the same as boilers insofar as the requirednumber and type of fire fighting appliances are concerned

▼

SC30(May 1998)(Rev. 1June 2000)

▼

Systems,appliances &

extinguishers

Category Amachineryspaces

Fixedfire-

extin-guish-

ingsystem

Portable foamapplica

-tor *1

Portablefoamextin-guish-

ers

Add’lportable foamextin-guish-

ers

135 lfoamextin-

guisher

45 l foamextin-guis-hers *2

Sandboxes *3

SOLASparagraph

7.1.1,7.2.1

7.1.2,7.2.2

7.1.3 7.2.3 7.1.3 7.2.3 7.1.4

Boiler room containing:Oil-fired boilers 1 1 2N NA 1*4 - NOil-fired boilersand oil fuel units

1 1 2N + 2 NA 1*4 - N

Engine room containing:Oil fuel units only 1 - 2 NA - - -Internalcombustionmachinery

1 1 x - y -

Internalcombustionmachinery and oilfuel units

1 1 x - y -

Combined engine/boiler room containing:Internalcombustionmachinery, oilfired boilers andoil fuel units

1 1(2N + 2) or xwhichever is

greater1*4 y*5 N

N = number of firing spaces.“2N” means that two extinguishers are to be located in each firing space.

x = sufficient number, minimum two in each space, so located that there are at least oneportable fire extinguisher within 10 m walking distance from any point.

y = sufficient number to enable foam to be directed onto any part of the fuel and lubricating oilpressure systems, gearing and other fire hazards.

Note: Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be implemented by IACS Members and Associatesfrom 1 January 2001.

Fire-extinguishing arrangements inmachinery spaces


Where a fixed fire-extinguishing system not required by this chapter is installed, it shall meet therequirements of the relevant regulations of this chapter.

Fixed high expansion foam fire-extinguishingsystem

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 9)

When such a system is to be fitted in any other space than a machinery space, this regulation applies.

Special arrangements in machinery spaces


Usual ventilation systems may be acceptable as arrangements for permitting the release of smokerequired by Regs. II-2/11.2.2 and II-2/11.4.2.

SC31—SC33

IACS Int. 1985

SC31

SC32

SC33

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

Automatic sprinkler, fire detection and firealarm system


By nominal area is meant the gross, horizontal projection of the area to be covered.

Fixed fire detection and fire alarm system


The main (respective emergency) feeder shall run from the main (respective emergency) switchboard tothe change-over switch without passing through any other distributing switchboard.

Arrangements for oil fuel, lubricating oil andother flammable oils


The provision of this paragraph applies to fuel oil tanks having capacity of 500 litres and above.



Text:"Oil fuel pipes and their valves and fittings shall be of steel or other approved material,.......".

Interpretation:For valves, fitted to oil fuel tanks and which are under static pressure-head, steel or nodular cast iron maybe accepted. However, ordinary cast iron valves may be used in fuel piping systems where the designpressure is lower than 7 bar and the design temperature is below 6°C (i.e. in Class III piping).

SC34

IACS Int. 1985

SC34–SC37

SC35

SC36

SC37

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼



The provision of Reg. II-2/15.2.5 applies to lubricating oil tanks except those having capacity less than500 litres.

Relaxation from this provision may be given, on a case by case basis, where it is determined that anunintended operation of the quick closing valve, on the oil lubricating tank, would endanger the safeoperation of the main propulsion and essential auxiliary machinery.

Ventilation systems in ships other than passengerships carrying more than 36 passengers


Equally effective local closing arrangements means that in case of ventilators these are to be fitted withfire dampers which shall be easily closed within the control station in order to maintain the absence ofsmoke in the event of fire.

Means of escape


Text:"One of these ladders shall provide continuous fire shelter from the lower part of the space to a safeposition outside the space;"

Interpretation:This shelter is to be of steel, insulated where necessary, and provided with a steel self-closing door at thelower end. If access is provided at other levels within the machinery space each level is to be providedwith a steel self-closing door.

SC38

SC38–SC40

IACS Int. 1985

SC39

SC40

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

Means of escape


Text:Reg. 28.3.2: " ... and in a ship of 1.000 tons gross tonnage and above, the Administration may dispensewith one means of escape from any such space if either a door or a steel ladder provides a safe escaperoute to the embarkation deck, due regard being paid to the nature and location of the space and whetherpersons are normally employed in that space."

Interpretation:The above requirement applies only to certain auxiliary machinery spaces.

Fire protection arrangements in cargo spacesincl. special category spaces

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 37.2.2.1 and 53.2.4.2)

Text:" ....shall be of a type so enclosed and protected as to prevent the escape of sparks ..."

Interpretation:This is realised by an enclosure of at least IP55 or by apparatus suitable for use in Zone 2 areas asdefined in I.E.C. Publication 79.

Fire protection arrangements in cargo spacesincl. special category spaces

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 37.2.2.1, 2.2.2, (3.2.1), 3.2.2, 38.(4.1), 4.2, 53.(2.4.1), 2.4.4)

Text:<< ... shall be of a type approved (suitable) for use in explosive petrol and air mixtures ...>>

Interpretation:In both cased (i.e. "approved" and "suitable") this is interpreted as requiring certified safe equipmentsuitable for use in Zone 1 as defined in I.E.C. 79. (Gas Group IIA, and Temperature Class T3).

SC41

IACS Int. 1985

SC41–SC43

SC42

SC43

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

Bulkheads within accommodation andservice spaces


Crowns and casings of machinery spaces of category A shall be insulated in compliance with the TablesII-2/44.1 and 44.2 in Reg. II-2/44. Accordingly crowns and casings exposed to the open air need not beinsulated.

Fire integrity of bulkheads and decks


The following spaces are considered to belong to the categories of spaces dealt with by Reg, II-2/44, forthe purpose of this regulation, as follows:– Navigation equipment room (radar transmitter) and battery rooms (1) Control stations– Electrical equipment rooms (Auto-teleph. exchange, air conditioning (7) Other machinery

duct spaces) spaces.

Note 1: Provision chambers are to be treated as store rooms.Note 2: Refrigerated provision chambers are to be Category 9 service spaces if thermally insulated with

combustible materials, or Category 5 service spaces if thermally insulated with non-combustible materials.

Protection of stairways and lift trunks inaccommodation spaces, service spacesand control stations


Dumb-waiters are to be regarded as lifts.

SC44(1974)

SC44–SC46

IACS Int. 1985

SC45

SC46

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

Restricted use of combustible materials


Bulkheads, ceilings and linings are to comply with Regs. II-2/49.1 and 49.2 regardless of the type ofmaterials used.

Reg. II-2/49 applies regardless of the type of materials. Other finishes used in exposed interior surfacesother than decking are to comply with Reg. II-2/49.2. Finishes such as plastic tile and latex used asprimary deck covering are to comply with Reg. II-2/49.3 and Resolution A.214 (VII).

Fire protection arrangements in cargo spaces


Ships of less than 2.000 tons gross tonnage carrying petroleum products having a flash point exceeding60°C (c.c. test) are not required to be fitted with a fixed fire extinguishing system.



Reg. II-2/53.1.3 apply to all cargo ships, engaged in the carriage of dangerous goods, of 500 tons grosstonnage and upwards.

Special requirements for ships carryingdangerous goods


The quantity of water referred to in this regulation is to be not less than 5 litres/minute per square metreof the horizontal area of cargo spaces.

SC47

IACS Int. 1985

SC47–SC50

SC48

SC49

SC50

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼



A high expansion foam system complying with Reg. II-2/9 is acceptable except if cargoes dangerouslyreact with water (see the IMDG Code, paragraph 16.2.2 of Section 16, page 0113).



The fans are to be of non-sparking type, as per the UR F29.The purpose of "suitable wire mesh guards" is to prevent foreign objects from entering into the fan casing.



(Cancelled at C27, 1993)

Location and separation of spaces


By the expression “cofferdam” is meant, for the purpose of this regulation, an isolating space betweentwo adjacent steel bulkheads or decks.

The minimum distance between the two bulkheads or decks should be sufficient for safe access andinspection. In order to meet the single failure principle, in the particular case when a corner-to-cornersituation occurs, this principle may be met by welding a diagonal plate across the corner.

SC51

SC51–SC54

IACS Int. 1993/Rev 1997

SC52

SC53

SC54(Rev 11997)

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼

Location and separation of spaces


1. An access to a deck foam system room (including the foam tank and the control station) can be permitted within the limits mentioned in Reg. II-2/56.6.1, provided that the conditions listed in Reg. II-2/56.6.2 are satisfied and that the door is located flush with the bulkhead.

2. The navigating bridge doors and windows are to be tested for gas tightness.If a water hose test is applied the following may be taken as a guide:1.nozzle diameter: minimum 12mm2.water pressure just before the nozzle: not less than 2 bar3.distance between the nozzle and the doors or windows: maximum 1,5 m.

Venting, purging, gas freeing and ventilation


Anchor windlass and chain locker openings constitute ignition hazard.They are to be located at the distances required by Reg. II-2/59.1.7.2, 59.1.9.3 and 59.1.9.4.



Text:<< ... to enclosed spaces containing a source of ignition and from deck machinery and equipment whichmay constitute an ignition hazard>>.

Interpretation:Electrical equipment fitted in compliance with IEC 92-502 is not considered to be a source of ignition orignition hazard.



The outlets mentioned in Reg. II-2/59.2 are to be located in compliance with Reg. II-2/59.1.9.3 as far asthe horizontal distance is concerned.

SC55

IACS Int. 1985

SC55–SC58

SC56

SC57

SC58

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼

Cargo tank protection


All tankers means any tanker, of any deadweight, fitted with crude oil washing system, irrespective of itsage.

Fixed deck foam systems


Reg. II-2/61.8 applies to all tankers regardless of size.

Fixed deck foam systems(Chapter II-2, Regulation 61.10)

A common line for fire main and deck foam line can only be accepted provided it can be demonstratedthat the hose nozzles can be effectively controlled by one person when supplied from the common line ata pressure needed for operation of the monitors. Additional foam concentrate is to be provided foroperation of 2 hose nozzles for the same period of time required for the foam system.

The simultaneous use of the minimum required jets of water should be possible on deck over the fulllength of the ship, in the accommodation, service spaces, control stations and machinery spaces.

Inert gas systems(Chapter II-2, Regulation 63.13.4, 18.2)

As a guide, the effective isolation required by this regulation may be achieved by the two arrangementsshown in the following sketches.

SC59

SC59–SC62

IACS Int. 1985/Rev. 1 1994

SC60

SC61(Rev.1 1994)

SC62

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼

CARGO PIPING

NON RETURNVALVE

VENTINGSPOOL PIECE

INERT GAS MAIN

Pre-discharge alarm of fixed gas fire extinguishing systems

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 5.1.6 [1981])

The pre-discharge alarm shall be automatically activated, e.g. by opening of release cabinet door. Anautomatic time-delay device shall ensure that the alarm operates for at least 20sec. before the medium isreleased.

Fire dampers in ventilation ducts

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 16.2 [1981])

Ducts or pipes with free sectional area of 0,075m2 or less need not be fitted with fire damper at theirpassage through Class "A" divisions provided that the requirements of Reg. 16.2.2, 16.3, 16.4, 16.8,18.11 and 32.1.3 are complied with.

Ventilation ducts for galley


Galley ventilation systems are to be separate from the ventilation systems serving other spaces. Whenpassing through accommodation spaces, service spaces and control stations, galley ventilation ducts areto be constructed of steel having a thickness as per Reg. 16.3.1.1 for the entire length passing throughsuch spaces.

Integrity of emergency generator space

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 44, Table 44.1 [1981])

The required division of steel between control stations and open decks may in the case of an emergencygenerator be provided with openings for intake of combustion air to the diesel engine and for intake ofcooling air in the case of an air cooled diesel engine. These openings need not be fitted with means forclosure for fire integrity purposes, unless a fixed gas fire fighting system for the emergency generatorspace is fitted.

SC63

IACS Int. 1985

SC63–SC66

SC64

SC65

SC66

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼

Doors in fire-resisting corridor bulkheadsof cargo ships


Ventilation openings may also be permitted in "B" class doors leading to lavatories, offices, smallpantries, lockers, store rooms, etc.

Cofferdams adjacent to slop tanks ofcombination carriers


The cofferdams required adjacent to slop tanks are to be spaces not used for cargo or ballast and shall notbe connected to piping systems serving oil cargo or ballast.

Arrangement for pumping of slops incombination carriers in dry cargo mode


The system for transfer of slops to the open deck shall be a permanent installation. When the transfersystem is used for slop transfer in the dry cargo mode, the system shall have no connection to othersystems. Separation from other systems by means of removal of spool pieces may be accepted. The sloptransfer manifold on decks shall be provided with a shut-off valve and a blank flange.

SC67

SC67–SC69

IACS Int. 1985

SC68

SC69

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

Area Classification and selection of electricalequipment


Text:

Be arranged at the furthest distance practicable but not less than 5m from the nearestair intakes and openings to enclosed spaces containing a source of ignition and fromdeck machinery and equipment which may constitute an ignition hazard.

Interpretation:

1. Areas on open deck, or semi-enclosed spaces on open deck, within 3m of cargo tank ventilation outlets which permit the flow of small volumes of vapour, air or inert gas mixtures caused by thermal variation are defined as Zone 1.

Permitted electrical equipment:- Certified safe type equipment for Zone 1.

2. Areas within 2m beyond the zone specified in 1 above are defined as Zone 2.

Permitted electrical equipment:- Certified safe type equipment for Zone 1,- Equipment of a type, which ensures the absence of sparks, arcs and of “hot

spots” during its normal operation,- Equipment having an enclosure filled with a liquid dielectric, when required by

the application, or encapsulated,- Pressurised equipment,- Equipment specifically designed for Zone 2 (for example type “n” protection in

accordance with IEC 60079-15).


Text:Not less than 10m measured horizontally from the nearest air intakes and openings toenclosed spaces containing a source of ignition and from deck machinery andequipment which may constitute an ignition hazard.

SC70(1985)(Rev.1May2001)

IACS Int. 1985/Rev. 1 2001

SC70▼

Note: Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 July 2001.

SC 70

SC 70(Cont d)


▼

(IBC Code, Para. 8.3.3.2)

Text:

The position of vent outlets of a controlled tank venting system should be arranged ata distance of at least 10m measured horizontally from the nearest air intake oropenings to accommodation, service and machinery spaces and ignition sources.

(IGC Code, Para 8.2.10)

Text:

All other vent exits connected to the cargo containment system should be arranged ata distance of at least 10m from the nearest air intake or opening to accommodationspaces, service spaces and control stations, or other gas-safe spaces.

Interpretation:

1. Areas on open deck, or semi-enclosed spaces on open deck, within a vertical cylinder of unlimited height and 6m radius centred upon the center of the outlet, and within a hemisphere of 6m radius below the outlet which permit the flow of large volumes of vapour, air or inert gas mixtures during loading/discharging/ballasting are defined as Zone 1.

Permitted electrical equipment:Certified safe type equipment for Zone 1.

2. Areas within 4m beyond the zone specified in 1 above are defined as Zone 2.

Permitted electrical equipment:- Certified safe type equipment for Zone 1,- Equipment of a type, which ensures the absence of sparks, arcs and of “hot

spots” during its normal operation,- Equipment having an enclosure filled with a liquid dielectric, when required by

the application, or encapsulated,- Pressurised equipment,- Equipment specifically designed for Zone 2 (for example type “n” protection in

accordance with IEC 60079-15).

▼

Tank level gauging systems


Text:Provision shall be made to guard against liquid rising in the venting system to a height which wouldexceed the design head of cargo tanks. This shall be accomplished by high level alarms or overflowcontrol systems or other equivalent means, together with gauging devices and cargo tank fillingprocedures.

(BCH Code, Para 59.1.6)(IBC Code, Para 8.1.2)

Text:Provision should be made to ensure that the liquid head in any tank does not exceed the test head of thattank; suitable high level alarms, overflow control systems or spill valves, together with gauging devicesand tank filling procedures may be accepted for this purpose.

Interpretation:The system for guarding against liquid rising to a height which would exceed the design head of cargotanks is to be independent of the gauging devices.

In a ship engaged regularly in voyages ofshort duration

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 42.2.7, 43.2.6.2 [1981])

Dispensation to the reduced period of availability of the emergency source of power can be given to:1 Vessels with a class notation "Coastal Service"2 Vessels engaged in voyages where the route is no greater than 20 nautical miles offshore.

Fire protection arrangements in cargo spacesincluding special category spaces

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 37.1.5.3, 53.2.2.3 [1981])

Portable extinguishers suitable for fighting oil fires shall be provided at each car decklevel in each hold of compartment where vehicles are carried, spaced not more than20m apart, on both sides of the ship. One of these extinguishers shall be positioned ateach entrance to the car spaces.

Notes: 1. This need not apply to weather decks used as ro-ro cargo spaces.

2. Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be implemented by IACS Members andAssociates from 1 July 2001.

SC71–SC73

IACS Int. 1985/Rev. 1 2001

▼▼▼▼

▼▼

SC71(1985)

SC72(1985)

SC73(Rev.1May, 2001)

Fire protection arrangements in cargo spacesincluding special category spaces

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 37.2.2, 37.3.2, 38.4.1, 53.2.4.3 [1981])

Exhaust fans shall be of non-sparking type in accordance with UR F29.


(Chapter II-2, Regulation 53.2.3.3 [1981])

The requirements to indicate any loss of ventilation capacity is considered complied with by an alarm onthe bridge, initiated by fall-out of starter relay of fan motor.

Engine bearing temperature monitors


The wording "or engine bearing temperature monitors" is understood to include all bearings i.e. journaland connecting rod bearings.

Cargo tanks overflow control system use ofspill valves


Spill valves will normally not be considered equivalent to overflow system.

IACS Int. 1985

SC74–SC77

▼▼▼▼

▼▼▼▼

SC74

SC75

SC76

SC77

▼SC78

SC78–SC79

Fire safety measures for tankers

(Chapter II-2, Regulation 55 [1981])

Vegetable oil, latex and molasses are coming under the type of cargo specified in Reg. II2/53.1.2 ascargo which constitute a low fire risk.

Certified Safe Type Electrical Equipment forShips Carrying Dangerous Goods


Reg.II-2/19.3.2

3.2 Sources of ignition

Electrical equipment and wiring shall not be fitted in enclosed cargo spaces or vehicle spaces unless it isessential for operational purposes in the opinion of the Administration. However, if electrical equipmentis fitted in such spaces, it shall be of a certified safe type** for use in the dangerous environments towhich it may be exposed unless it is possible to completely isolate the electrical system (e.g. by removalof links in the system, other than fuses). Cable penetrations of the decks and bulkheads shall be sealedagainst the passage of gas or vapour. Through runs of cables and cables within the cargo spaces shall beprotected against damage from impact. Any other equipment which may constitute a source of ignitionof flammable vapour shall not be permitted.

** Refer to the recommendations of International Electrotechnical Commission, in particular, publication IEC 92 – “Electrical installations in ships”.

Interpretation:

Reference is to be made to IEC 60092-506 standard, Special features-Ships carrying specific dangerousgoods and materials hazardous only in bulk.

Note: This UI SC 79 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2005.


▼▼

SC79(1993)(Rev.1 May 2004)

▼

Fire-Extinguishing Arrangement for Paint Lockers


1. Paint lockers and flammable liquid lockers of deck area 4 m2 and more shall be provided with afire-extinguishing system enabling the crew to extinguish a fire without entering the space. Fixedarrangements as specified below may be provided.

– CO2 – System, designed for 40% of the gross volume of the space.– Dry-Powder-System, designed for at least 0.5 kg powder/m3

– Water spraying system designed for 5 1/2 , min.

2. Water spraying systems may be connected to the ship's main system.

3. Other systems than those mentioned above may be accepted.

4. For lockers of deck area less than 4 m2 CO2, or dry-powder fire extinguisher(s) may be accepted.

▼

SC80

SC80

IACS Int. 1992

▼▼

Drainage of enclosed spaces situated on the bulkhead deck(Chapter II-1, Regulation 21.1.6.1)

The text of this paragraph precludes drainage of such enclosed spaces to suitable spaces below deck ifthe edge of the bulkhead deck or freeboard deck, as applicable, is immersed when the ship heels morethan 5 degrees.Based on the derivation, this is not considered to have been the intent.

Accordingly, when applying this paragraph, the wording of the revised Regulation 22, ICLL 1966,contained in Annex 2 to MSC 53/12, further revised below for clarity, should be followed, i.e.:

"Scuppers led through the shell from enclosed superstructures used for the carriage of cargo shall bepermitted, providing the spaces drained are located above the waterline resulting from a 5 degree heel toport or starboard at a draught corresponding to the assigned summer freeboard. In other cases, thedrainage shall be led inboard".

Protection against noise(Chapter II-1, Regulation 36)

The Regulation deals with noise levels in machinery spaces and makes reference to the Code on NoiseLevels on Board Ships, adopted by IMO with Res. A.468 (XII), which applies to new ships of 1600 tonsgross tonnage and over and that it is not limited to machinery spaces.

The Regulation can be interpreted as follows:

1. It applies to machinery spaces only;

2. IMO Res. A.468 (XII) is to be taken as a basis for its implementation;

3. with regard to para. 4.1.6 of IMO Resolution, if a sound level of 105 dB (A) is exceeded, also the ISO noise rating (NR) is not be exceed the value of NR 105;

4. with regard to para 2.2.2 of IMO Resolution, "Operating condition at sea", the propulsion machinery shall be run at normal service speed and at not less than 80% of the maximum continuous rating MCR;

5. for existing ships, only the actual noise limits are to be measured and, on the basis of them, the limits of exposure of the seafarers are to be determined according to Chapter 5 of IMO Resolutionand the measures as per Chapter 7 of the Resolution itself are to be implemented;

6. for new ships of less than 1600 tons gross tonnage, the same procedure specified for existing shipsapplies.

SC81-SC82

IACS Int. 1993

▼▼

SC82

▼▼

SC81

Continuity of the Supply when TransformersConstitutes an Essential Part of theElectrical Supply System(Chapter II-1, Regulation 41.1.5)

The number, capacity and arrangement of power transformers supplying auxiliary electrical systems areto be such that with any one transformer not in operation, the remaining transformer(s) is (are) sufficientto ensure the safe operation of those services necessary to provide normal operational conditions ofpropulsion, safety and minimum comfortable conditions of habitability are also to be ensured, whichinclude at least adequate services for cooking, heating domestic refrigeration, mechanical ventilation,sanitary and fresh water.

Each transformer required is to be located as a separate unit with separate enclosure of equivalent, and isto be served by separate circuits on the primary and secondary sides. Each primary circuit is to be beprovided with switch-gear and protection devices in each phase.

Each of the secondary circuits is to be provided with a multipole isolating switch.

Transformers supplying bow thruster are excluded.

▼

IACS Int. 1993

SC83

▼ ▼

SC83

(a) (a) (a) (a) (a)

(b) (b) (b) (b) (b)

"P" "P"RS

T

RS

T

RS

T

RS

T

( a ) s w i t c h g e a r a n d p r o t e c t i o n d e v i c e s( b ) m u l t i p o l e i s o l a t i n g s w i t c h

E X A M P L E S :

T h r e e - p h a s e t r a n s f o r m e r s S i n g l e - p h a s e t r a n s f o r m e r s

enclosure or separation

▼

SC84-SC87

Purpose Built Container Space(Chapter II-2, Regulation 54)

Reg. 54.1.2.2

A purpose built container space is a cargo fitted with cell guides for stowage securing of containers.

Ro-Ro Cargo Space(Chapter II-2, Regulation 54)

Reg. 54.1.2.3

Ro-ro cargo spaces include special category spaces (Reg. 37) and vehicle deck spaces (54.2.2and 54.2.3).

Weather Decks(Chapter II-2 Reg. 54)

Table 54.1

For the purposes of Reg. 54 a ro-ro space fully open above and with full openings in both endsmay be treated as a weather deck.

Certification of Carriage of Solid DangerousBulk Cargoes(Chapter II-2 Reg. 54..2 and Reg. 54.3)

Certification for carriage of solid dangerous bulk cargoes covers only those cargoes listedin Appendix B of the BC-Code except cargoes of MHB.

Other solid dangerous bulk cargoes may be certified subject to acceptance by theAdministrationinvolved.

SC84

IACS Int. 1993

SC85

SC86

SC87

▼ ▼

▼ ▼▼ ▼

▼▼

Fire Water Supply Capacity(Chapter II-2 Reg. 54.2.1)

Total required capacity of fire water supply should satisfy 2.1.2 and 2.1.3 (if applicable) simultaneouslycalculated for the largest designated cargo space.

The capacity requirement should be met by the total capacity of main fire pump(s) not including thecapacity of the emergency fire pump, if fitted.

Ventilation of Cargo Spaces

Chapter II-2 Reg. 54.2.4)

General: If adjacent spaces are not separated from cargo spaces by gastight bulkheads or decks, ventilation requirements shall apply as for the cargo space iteself.

Where 2 fans per hold are required in the BC Code, a common ventilation system with 2 fans connectedis acceptable.

Requirements for Individual Cargoes:

a) Mechanical ventilation arranged for continuous operation, i.e. height of ventilation inlets andoutlets must satisfy the requirements of the Load Line Convention for openings not fitted withmeans of closure. Means of closure for fire protection purposes as required by Reg. II-2/16.9 must be fitted. The fan should be permanently or being of portable type adapted for being permanently fitted prior to loading and during voyage. Cargo holds to be supplied by two fans giving a ventilation rate of min. 6 airchanges per hour based on the empty hold volume. The requirements apply to the following cargoes :

Aluminium FerrosiliconAluminium SiliconFerrosiliconZinc Ashes

b) Mechanical ventilation arranged for continuous operation, i.e height of ventilation inlets andoutlets must satisfy the requirements of the Load Line Convention for openings not fitted with means ofclosure. Means of closure for fire protection purposes as required by Reg. II-2/16.9 must be fitted. Thefan(s) should be permanently fitted or being of portable type adapted for being permanently fittedprior to loading and during voyage. The fan(s) shoud give a ventilation rate of min. 6 airchanges perhour based on the empty hold volume.

The requirements apply to the following cargo:

Seed Cake b and c

SC88-SC89

SC88


SC89(Rev 11996)

▼ ▼▼ ▼

SC89-1

Bilge Drainage

(Chapter II-2 Reg. 54.2.5)

a) Cargo spaces intended for carriage of flammable liquids with flash point less than 23 degrees Cor toxic liquids shall be fitted with a fixed bilge drainage system independent or separated fromthe bilge system in machinery space and located outside of the machinery space.

If a single bilge drainage system completely independent of the machinery space is provided,the system is to comply with the Rule requirement to redundancy and capacity based on thesize of the space or spaces which it services.

b) If the bilge drainage system for cargo spaces is additional to the system served by pumpsin the machinery space, the capacity of the system is to be not less than 10 m3/hr. per cargospace served. If the additional system services more than one cargo space the capacity neednot exceed 25 m3/h. The additional bilge system need not be arranged with redundancy.

Whenever flammable liquids with flash point less than 23 degrees C or toxic liquids are carried,the bilge line into the machinery space shall be separated either by fitting a blank flange or bya closed lockable valve.

c) If bilge drainage of cargo spaces is arramged by gravity drainage, the drainage is to be eitherlead directly overboard or to a closed draintank located outside of machinery spaces. Thetank should be provided with vent pipe to a safe location on the open deck.

d) Encloded spaces outside of machinery spaces containing bilge pumps serving cargo spacesintended for carriage of flammable or toxic liquids shall be fitted with separate mechanicalventilation giving at least 6 airchanges per hour. Electrical equipment in the space is to beaccording to unified interpretation SC79. If the space has access from another enclosed space,the door is to be selfclosing.

e) Drainage from a cargo space into bilge wells in a lower space is only permitted if that spacesatisfies the same requirements as the cargo space above.

Personal Protection - Protective Clothing(Chapter II-2, Regulation 54)

Reg. 54.2.6.1

a) The required protective clothing is for emergency purposes.

b) For solid bulk cargoes the protective clothing is to satisfy the equipment requirementsspecified in Appendix E of the BC Code for the individual substances. For packagedgoods the protective clothing is to satisfy the equipment requirements specified in emergency procedures (EmS) of the Supplement to IMDG Code for the individualsubstances.

SC90-SC91

SC90

IACS Int. 1993

SC91

▼▼▼▼

Personal Protection - Self-Contained Breathing Apparatus(Chapter II-2, Regulation 54)

Reg. 54.2.6.2

For each of the breathing apparatuses, two complete sets of air bottles are required. These sparebottles are to be in addition to the spare bottles required for fireman's outfit.

▼

SC92

SC92

IACS Int. 1993

▼▼▼

▼

SC93

SC93(1994)

IACS Int. 1994

Enclosure of stern tubes on cargo ships(Chapter II-1, Regulation 11.9)

Text:

“Stern tubes shall be enclosed in a watertight space (or spaces) of moderate volume. Other measures tominimise the danger of water penetrating into the ship in case of damage to the stern tube arrangementsmay be taken at the discretion of the Administration”.

Interpretation:

A stern tube enclosed in a watertight space of moderate volume, such as an aft peak tank, where theinboard end of the stern tube extends through the aft peak/engine room watertight bulkhead into theengine room is considered to be an acceptable solution satisfying the requirement of Chapter II-1,Regulation 11.9 of SOLAS 1974, as amended, provided the inboard end of the stern tube is effectivelysealed at the aft peak/engine room bulkhead by means of an approved watertight/oiltight gland system.

▼▼

Mechanical and electrical independency of Electric steering control systems for steering gears(Chapter II-1, Regulation 29)

1. SCOPE

The interpretation applies to electric/electronic steering gear control systems for the main andauxiliary steering gear, operable from the navigation bridge, for which SOLAS stipulates two steeringgear control systems independent of each other.

Following requirements of :

- SOLAS Chapt. II, Reg. 29, steering gear,- IEC Pub. 92 - 204 Electric and elecktro-hydraulic steering gear (1987)

have been considered, as far as containing requirements for the independency of the controlsystems.

2. BASIC REQUIREMENTS

Two independent steering gear control systems shall be provided and shall be so arranged that amechanical or electrical failure in one of them will not render the other one inoperative.

3. SUPPLY

Each electrical steering gear control system shall be served by its own separate circuit suppliedfrom the steering gear power circuit from a point within the steering gear compartment, or directly fromswitchboard busbars (main and emergency switchboard) supplying that steering gear power circuit at apoint on the switchboard adjacent to the supply to the steering gear power circuit. The power supplysystems are to be protected selectively.

4. INSTALLATION

Cables for duplicated steering gear control systems and their associated components shall beseparated as far as practicable. The corresponding cables shall follow different routes which will beseparated both vertically and horizontally, as far as practicable, throughout their entire length.

5. SEPARATION OF CONTROL SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

5.1 GeneralWires, terminals and the components for duplicated steering gear control systems

installed in units, control boxes, switchboards or bridge consoles shall be separated as far as practicable.Where physical separation is not practicable, separation may be achieved by means of a fire retardantplate.

▼

SC94

SC94(1994)

IACS Int. 1994

5.2 Steering wheel or steering lever

All electric components of the steering gear control systems shall be duplicated. This does notrequire duplication of the steering wheel or steering lever.

5.3 Steering mode selector switch

If a joint steering mode selector switch (uniaxial switch) is employed for both steering gear control systems, the connections for the circuits of the control systems are to be divided accordingly andseparated from each other by an isolating plate or by air gap.

5.4 Follow-up amplifier

In the case of double follow-up control (see Annex, example 2), the amplifiers have t be designed and fed so as to be electrically and mechanically separated. In the case of non-follow-up control

and follow-up control, it will have to be ensured that the follow-up amplifier is protected selectively (seeAnnex, example 3).

5.5 Additional control systems

Control circuits for additional control systems, e.g. steering Lever or autopilot have to be designedfor all - pole disconnection (see Annex, examples, 1,2 and 3).

5.6 Feed-back units and limit switches

The feed-back units and limit switches, if any, for the steering gear control systems are to beseparated electrically and mechanically connected to the rudder stock or actuator separately.

5.7 Actuators

Actuators controlling the power systems of the steering gear, e.g. magnetic valves, are to beduplicated and separated.

6. ANNEX

Reference should be made to examples 1,2 and 3, which can be regarded as basic design.

▼

SC94

SC94(Cont’d)

IACS Int. 1994

▼

IACS Int. 1986

▼

SC94

SC94(1994)

IACS Int. 1994

Prin

cipl

e sc

hem

e fo

r do

uble

non

follo

w-u

p co

ntro

lan

d au

topi

lot o

r ot

her

addi

tiona

l con

trol

emer

genc

y sw

itch

boar

dm

ain

switc

h bo

ard

tran

sfer

line

alar

m

star

ter

box

1

star

ter

box

2al

arm

M 2M 1

mot

or fo

rst

eerin

g ge

ar 1

mot

or fo

rst

eerin

g ge

ar 2

mag

netic

val

ves

stee

ring

gear

2ru

dder

mag

netic

val

ves

stee

ring

gear

1

limit

switc

hes

1(f

eed

back

uni

t)lim

it sw

itche

s 2

(fee

d ba

ck u

nit)

NF

UN

FU

hand

whe

el

non follow-upautopilot

stee

ring

mod

e se

lect

or s

witc

h

Exa

mpl

e1

IAC

S

▼

SC94

SC94(1994)

IACS Int. 1994

Prin

cipl

e sc

hem

e fo

r do

uble

non

follo

w-u

p co

ntro

lan

d au

topi

lot o

r ot

her

addi

tiona

l con

trol

emer

genc

y sw

itch

boar

dm

ain

switc

h bo

ard

tran

sfer

line

alar

m

star

ter

box

1

star

ter

box

2

alar

m

M 2M 1

mot

or fo

rst

eerin

g ge

ar 1

mot

or fo

rst

eerin

g ge

ar 2

mag

netic

val

ves

stee

ring

gear

2ru

dder

mag

netic

val

ves

stee

ring

gear

1

FU

FU

hand

whe

el

follow-upautopilot

stee

ring

mod

e se

lect

or s

witc

h

Exa

mpl

e2

IAC

S

feed

bac

kun

it 2

feed

bac

kun

it 1

d2

d1

d2

d1

follo

w-u

pam

plifi

er 1

follo

w-u

pam

plifi

er 2

IACS Int. 1986

SC94

SC94(1994)

IACS Int. 1994

▼▼

Prin

cipl

e sc

hem

e fo

r do

uble

non

follo

w-u

p co

ntro

l,fo

llow

-up

cont

rol a

nd a

utop

ilot o

r ot

her

addi

tiona

l con

trol

emer

genc

y sw

itch

boar

dm

ain

switc

h bo

ard

tran

sfer

line

alar

m

star

ter

box

1

star

ter

box

2

alar

m

M 2M 1

mot

or fo

rst

eerin

g ge

ar 1

mot

or fo

rst

eerin

g ge

ar 2

mag

netic

val

ves

stee

ring

gear

2ru

dder

mag

netic

val

ves

stee

ring

gear

1

NF

U

NF

Uha

ndw

heel

non follow-upst

eerin

g m

ode

sele

ctor

sw

itch

Exa

mpl

e3

IAC

S

feed

bac

kun

it 2

feed

bac

kun

it 1

follo

w-u

pam

plifi

er

d2

d1

alar

mal

arm

FU

FU

follow-upautopilot

SC95-SC98

SC95(1994)


▼ ▼

SC96(1994)(Rev.12001)

▼▼

SC97(1994)(Rev. 1June2002)

▼▼

SC98(1994)

▼▼

Communication between NavigatingBridge and Machinery Space(Chapter II-1, Reg. 37)

SOLAS Reg. II-1/37 requires that at least two independent means be provided for communicating orders from thenavigating bridge to the position in the machinery space or in the control room from which the engines are normallycontrolled: one of these shall be an engine-room telegraph which provides visual indication of the orders andresponses both in the machinery space and on the navigating bridge.

Appropriate means of communication shall be provided to any other positions from which the engines may becontrolled.

The interpretation is that the telegraph is required in any case, even if the remote control of the engine is foreseen,irrespective of the fact that the engine room is attended or not.

Capacity of an emergency fire pump(Chapter II-2, Reg. 4.3.3.3.1 of MSC Res. 27 (61)

For passenger ships of less than 1000 tons gross tonnage and cargo ships of less than 2000 gross tons gross tonnage acapacity of the emergency fire pump of 25m3/h for passenger ships and 15m3/h for cargo ships is acceptable providedit is capable of producing 2 jets of water of 12 m throw length. UI SC19 applies in respect of the sea connection.

Connection of a pump to fire main(Chapter II-2, Reg. 4.3.3.4)

This paragraph does not force designers to choose pumps with capacity and pressure characteristics other than thatbeing optimal for the service intended, just to make their connection to the fire main possible, provided the requirednumber and capacity of fire pumps are already fitted.

Note: 1. Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2003.

Fire hose nozzles of a plastic type material(Chapter II-2, Reg. 4.8)

Fire hose nozzles made of plastic type material, e.g. polycarbonate, are considered acceptable provided capacity andserviceability are documented and the nozzles are found suitable for the marine environment.

Flexible bellows of combustible materials(Chapter II-2, Reg. 16.1)

Flexible bellows of combustible material may be used for connecting fans to the ducting in air conditioning room.

Closing appliances of ventilation inlets and outlets(Chapter II-2, Reg. 16.9)

Ventilation inlets and outlets located at outside boundaries are to be fitted with closing appliances as required byReg. II-2/16.9 and need not comply with Reg. II-2/16.2.

Main vertical zones(Chapter II-2, Reg. 24 of MSC Res. 27 (61)

If a stairway serves two MVZs, the maximum length of any one MVZ need not be measured from the far side of thestairway enclosure. In this case all boundaries of the stairway enclosure are to be insulated as MVZ bulkheads andaccess doors leading into the stairway are to be provided from the two outside zones. The number of MVZ of 48mlength is not limited as long as they comply with all the requirements.

Cold Service(Chapter II-2, Reg. 34.2 and 50.3.1)

Cold service is understood to mean refrigeration systems, i.e systems with temperatures below ambient air and seawater.

Insulation of machinery space boundaries(Chapter II-2, Reg. 54.2.8)

In the case that a closed or semi-closed cargo space is located partly above a machinery space and the deck above themachinery space is not insulated, dangerous goods are prohibited in the whole of that cargo space. If the uninsulateddeck above the machinery space is a weather deck, dangerous goods are prohibited only for the portion of the decklocated above the machinery space.

SC99-SC103

SC99(1994)

IACS Int. 1994

▼▼▼

SC100(1994)

▼▼

SC101(1994)

▼▼

SC102(1994)

▼▼

SC103(1994)

▼

Quick closing valve for emergencygenerator fuel tank(Chapter II-2, Reg. 15.2.5)

The controls for remote operation of the quick closing valve for the emergency generator fuel tank is tobe in a separate location from other quick closing valves for tanks in the engine room.

Relief valve in oil filling lines(Chapter II-2, Reg. 15.2.7)

The requirement to overpressure protection is to apply only to filling lines served by pumps on board.

Galley exhaust duct(Chapter II-2, Reg. 16.7)

Grease trap, fire damper, fan shut-off and fixed fire extinguishing are only required when a galleyexhaust duct passes through accommodation spaces or spaces containing combustible materials. Theterm “spaces containing combustible materials” will normally apply to all spaces inaccommodation.

Continuous ceiling(Chapter II-2, Reg 25.3)

If an air gap between cabins results in an opening in the continuous class B-15 ceiling, the bulkheads onboth sides of the air gap are to be of class B-15.

Galley exhaust duct(Chapter II-2, Reg 32.1.9)

The requirements to exhaust ducts from galley ranges in which grease or fat is likely to accumulate willapply to all exhaust ducts from galley ranges.

Open Top Container Holds - Water Supplies(Chapter II-2, Reg 54.2.1)

The water spray system required by item 9.2, 9.3 and 9.4 of MSC/Circ.608/ Rev.1 “Interim Guidelinesfor Open-Top Container Ships” will also satisfy the requirement for dangerous goods.

The amount of water required for fire fighting purposes in the largest hold is to satisfy simultaneous usefrom the water spray system plus 4 jets of water from hose nozzles.

▼

SC104-SC109

SC104(1995)

IACS Int. 1995

SC105(1995)

SC106(1995)

▼▼

SC107(1995)

▼▼

SC108(1995)

▼▼

SC109(1995)

▼▼

Note: Unified Interpretations SC104 through SC109 are to be applied byIACS Member Societies from1 January 1996.

▼ ▼▼ ▼

Open Top Container Holds - Ventilation(Chapter II-2, Reg. 54.2.4)

(This UI is to be applied by IACS Member Societies from 1 January 1996.)

Power ventilation is interpreted to be required only for the lower part of the cargo hold for which purposeducting is required. The ventilation capacity is to be at least 2 air changes per hour based on the emptyhold volume below weather deck.

Open Top Container Holds - Bilge Pumping(Chapter II-2, Reg. 54.2.5)


Bilge systems for cargo holds should be independent of the machinery space bilge system and be locatedoutside of the machinery space.

Pilot Transfer ArrangementsDeleted in January 2002.

SC110-SC112

SC110(1995)

SC111(1995)

SC112

▼ ▼▼ ▼

▼▼

SC113

Emergency Towing Arrangements on Tankers - Prototype Test(Resolution MSC . 35 (63), 2.10)


Text:

“Designs of emergency towing arrangements in accordance with these Guidelines should be prototypetested to the satisfaction of the Administration.”

Interpretation:

Towing arrangements may be (1) a packaged self contained unit, or (2) a unit comprised of individuallytested components assembled onboard the vessel. Both arrangements should meet the specified strength requirements and undergo a deployment testonboard the vessel as required by MSC.35 (63).Fixed gear such as strong points, fairleads, foundations and associated vessel supporting structure are tobe demonstrated as adequate for the loads imposed by means of a submitted engineering analysis orcalculations. If the structural configuration is of a particularly complex or novel nature, such that its loadbearing adequacy cannot be satisfactorily determined by engineering analysis, suitable proof test will berequired. Articles of loose gear such as chains, towing pennants and associated end fittings, and shackles or otherconnecting links should be tested to the requirements of the Classification Society concerned.Where a manufacturer requests a certificate of type approval for a complete self contained arrangement,one assembled unit is additionally to undergo a test to 2 x SWL.

Note: “Survey Guidelines - Emergency Towing Arrangements” is located in Recommendation No. 40 (1995).

SC113(1996)

IACS Int. 1996

▼ ▼

SC114

Emergency Fire Pump Access

Reg. 4.3.3.2.9

When a single access to the emergency fire pump room is through another space adjoining a machineryspace of category A or the spaces containing the main fire pumps, class A-60 boundary is requiredbetween that other space and the machinery space of category A or the spaces containing the main firepumps.

IACS Int. 1996

SC114(1996)

▼▼

SC114-1

SC115

Fire detection system with remotely and individually identifiable detectors

Reg 13.1.4

Section: Group of fire detectors and manually operated call points as reported in the indicating unit(s).

Loop: Electrical circuit linking detectors of various sections and connected to the control panel.

IACS Int. 1996

▼

SC115(1996)

▼

SC115-1

SC116


Reg 13.1.10

A loop which covers control stations, service spaces and accommodation spaces, shall not includemachinery spaces of category A.

IACS Int. 1996

SC116(1996)

▼▼

SC116-1

SC117


Reg 13.1.15

The requirement that a system be so arranged that a loop cannot be damaged at more than one point by afire, is considered satisfied by arranging the loop such that the data highway will not pass through aspace covered by a detector more than once.

The requirement that a system be so arranged to ensure that any fault occurring in the loop will notrender the whole loop ineffective, is considered satisfied when a fault occurring in the loop only rendersineffective a part of the loop not being larger than a section of a system without means of remotelyidentifying each detector.

IACS Int. 1996

SC117(1996)

▼▼

SC117-1

Exhaust duct from galley ranges

Reg 16.7

Fire dampers required by Reg. 16.7.2, Reg. 32.1.9.2 and Reg. 41-2.4.3.2 do not need to pass the fire testin Res. A 754(18), but should be of steel and capable of stopping the draught. The requirements to “A”class applies only to the part of the duct outside of the galley.

IACS Int. 1996

SC118(1996)

SC118

▼▼

SC118-1

SC119

Balancing ducts

Reg. 31 & 47

Balancing openings or ducts between two enclosed spaces are prohibited except for openings aspermitted by Reg. 31 and 47.

IACS Int. 1996

SC119(1996)

▼▼

SC119-1

Access to forecastle spaces on tankers

Reg. 56

Access to forecastle spaces containing sources of ignition may be permitted through doors facing cargoarea provided the doors are located outside hazardous areas as defined in IEC Publication 92-502.

IACS Int. 1996

▼

SC120(1996)

SC120

▼

SC120-1

SC121

Fire Pump Isolation RequirementsReg. 4.6.3

Any part of the fire main routed through a category A machinery space must be fitted with isolatingvalves outside of the space. The arrangements of the fire mains must allow for fire water from the firepumps or emergency fire pump to reach all hydrants outside of the isolated space. Isolation requirementsof SOLAS Reg. II-2/4.6.3 are not applicable to the piping from fire pumps located in other spaces otherthan category A machinery spaces.

SC121(1997)

IACS Int. 1987

▼▼

SC121

SC122

Corrosion Prevention in Seawater BallastTanks

(Chapter II-1, Regulation 3-2)

The scheme for the selection, application and maintenance of the coating system should follow therequirements of IMO Resolution A.798(19) and contain, as a minimum, the following documentation:

• Owner’s, coating manufacturer’s and shipyard’s explicit agreement to the scheme for coatingselection, application and maintenance.

• List of seawater ballast tanks identifying the coating system for each tank, including coating colorand whether coating system is a hard coating.

• Details of anodes, if used.

• Manufacturer’s technical product data sheet for each product.

• Manufacturer’s evidence of product quality and ability to meet owners requirements.

• Evidence of shipyard’s and/or its subcontractor’s experience in coating application.

• Surface preparation procedures and standards, including inspection points and methods.

• Application procedures and standards, including inspection points and methods.

• Format for inspection reports on surface preparation and coating application.

• Manufacturer’s product safety data sheets for each product and owner’s, coating manufacturer’sand shipyard’s explicit agreement to take all precautions to reduce health and other safety riskswhich are required by the authorities.

• Maintenance requirements for the coating system.

Coating of any color may be accepted, unless otherwise instructed by the Flag Administration. “Lightcolor” coating is preferable, and includes colors which facilitate inspection or are easily distinguishablefrom rust.

________________________________

Note: This UI should be uniformly implemented by all Members and Associates not later than 1 July1998.

IACS Int. 1998, v0.1

▼

SC122(1998)(v0.1, April1998)

▼

122-1

SC123

▼

Machinery Installations - Service TankArrangements

Reg. II-1/26.11

SOLAS Regulation II-1/26.11 states: Two fuel oil service tanks for each type of fuel used on boardnecessary for propulsion and vital systems or equivalent arrangements shall be provided on each newship, with a capacity of at least 8 h at maximum continuous rating of the propulsion plant and normaloperating load at sea of the generator plant.

Arrangements complying wih this regulation and acceptable “equivalent arrangements”, for the mostcommonly utilised fuel systems, are shown below.

A service tank is a fuel oil tank which contains only fuel of a quality ready for use i.e fuel of a gradeand quality that meet the specification required by the equipment manufacturer. A service tank is to bedeclared as such and not to be used for any other purpose.

Use of a setting tank with or without purifiers, or purifiers alone, and one service tank is not acceptableas an “equivalent arrangement” to two service tanks.

Examples of application for the most common systems

1. Main, Auxiliary Engines and Boilers operating with Heavy Fuel Oil (HFO) (one fuel ship)

1.1 Requirement acc. SOLAS

1.2 Equivalent arrangement

For pilot burners of Auxiliary Boilers if provided, an additional MDO tank for 8 hours may benecessary.

Notes: 1. This Unified Interpretation is to be applied by IACS Members and Associates to all ships subject to the relevant SOLAS Regulation.

2. Changes introduced in Rev.2 are to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2003.

SC123(1998)(Rev. 1April 1998)(Rev. 2June2002)

HFO Serv. TKCapacity for at least 8 h

Main Eng. +Aux. Eng. +Aux. Boiler



MDO TKFor initial cold starting or

repair work ofEngines/Boiler



MDO Serv. TKCapacity for at least 8 h



123-1

SC123

2. Main Engine and Auxiliary Boilers operating with HFO Aux. Engine operating with Marine Diesel Oil (MDO)

2.1 Requirement acc. SOLAS

2.2 Equivalent arrangement

SC123cont’d


▼

HFO Serv. TKCapacity for at

least 8 hMain Eng. +Aux. Boiler



MDO Serv. TKCapacity for at

least 8 h Aux. Eng.

MDO Serv. TKCapacity for at

least 8 h Aux. Eng.



MDO Serv. TKCapacity for at least the highest of:• 4 h Main Eng. + Aux Eng

+Aux. Boiler or

• 8 h Aux. Eng. + Aux Boiler

▼

123-2

MDO Serv. TKCapacity for at least the highest of:• 4 h Main Eng. + Aux Eng

+Aux. Boiler or

• 8 h Aux. Eng. + Aux Boiler

SC124

Emergency Source of Power in Passenger and Cargo Ships

Reg. II-1/42.3.4 and II-1/43.3.4

SOLAS Regulations II-1/42 and II-1/43 address emergency source of electrical power in passenger shipsand cargo ships respectively. Regulations II-1/42.3.4 and II-1/43.3.4 read as follows:

For ships constructed on or after 1 July 1998, where electrical power is necessary to restore propulsion,the capacity shall be sufficient to restore propulsion to the ship in conjunction with other machinery, asappropriate, from a dead ship condition within 30 mins after blackout.

Interpretation:

“Blackout” as used in Regulation II-1/42.3.4 and II-1/43.3.4 is to be understood to mean a “deadship”condition”.

“Deadship” condition, for the purpose of Regulation II-1/42.3.4 and II-1/43.3.4, is to be understood tomean a condition under which the main propulsion plant, boilers and auxiliaries are not in operation andin restoring the propulsion, no stored energy for starting the propulsion plant, the main source ofelectrical power and other essential auxilaries is to be assumed available. It is assumed that means areavailable to start the emergency generator at all times.

The emergency generator and other means needed to restore the propulsion are to have a capacity suchthat the necessary propulsion starting energy is available within 30 minutes of blackout/dead shipcondition as defined above. Emergency generator stored starting energy is not to be directly used forstarting the propulsion plant, the main source of electrical power and/or other essential auxiliaries(emergency generator excluded).

For steam ships, the 30 minute time limit given in SOLAS can be interpreted as time from blackout/dead ship condition defined above to light-off of the first boiler.

Note: 1. This UI SC 124 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates for ships contracted for construction on or after 1 September 1999.

2. Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members andAssociates from 1 January 2003.

SC124(May 1999)(Rev.1June 2002)


▼▼

124-1

SC125

B and C Class Divisions(Reg. II-2/3)

A division consisting of a non-combustible core and combustible veneers may be accepted as a B or Cclass division, provided that the non-combustible core is tested in accordance with the FTP Code, part 1,that the B class division is tested in accordance with the FTP Code, part 3, and that the veneers are testedin accordance with the FTP Code part 5 and part 2, if applicable.

Note:

1. This Unified Interpretation is to be applied by all Members and Associates on shipscontracted for construction on or after 1 January, 1999.

2. The “contracted for construction” date means the date on which the contract to build the vessel is signed between the prospective owner and the shipbuilder. For further details regarding the date of “contract for construction”, refer to IACS Procedural Requirement (PR) No. 29.


SC125(May, 1998)(Rev.1July 2004)

125-1

END

▼

SC126

Fire Protection Materials for Cargo Ships

Re

g.I

I-2

/50

.1R

eg

.II-

2/4

9.3

Re

g.I

I-2

/49

.2R

eg.II

-2/5

0.3.

2R

eg.II

-2/5

0.3.

3R

eg

.II-

2/4

9.1

Reg

.II-2

/50.

3.1

14

(3)

(3)

Onl

y in

cor

ridor

s an

d st

airw

ay e

nclo

sure

s

SC126(May, 1998)(Rev.1June 2000)


Note: Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be implemented by IACS Members andAssociates from 1 January 2001.

126-1

(4)

Reg

.II-

Reg.

II-R

eg.II

-Re

g.II-

Reg.

II-Re

g.II-

Reg.

II-

14(6

)

(6) O

nly in

corr

idor

s and

stai

rway

encl

osur

es

SC126

SC126cont’d


▼▼

126-2

SC127

Paint

(Reg. II-2/34.7 and 49.2)

These regulations only apply to accommodation spaces, service spaces and control stations.

____________________________

Note:

1. This Unified Interpretation is to be applied by all Members and Associates on ships contracted for construction on or after 1 January, 1999.


SC127(May, 1998)(Rev.1July 2004)

IACS Int. 1998/Rev.1 2004127-1

END

SC128

CO2 Discharge Time(Reg. II-2/5.2.4, Reg. II-2/38.2.1, Reg. II-2/53.2.2.1)

These requirements may be checked by suitable calculations.

___________

Note:

1. This Unified Interpretation is to be applied by all Members and Associates on ships contractedfor construction on or after 1 January, 1999.


SC128(May, 1998)(Rev.1July 2004)

IACS Int. 1998/Rev.1 2004128-1

END

SC129

Fire Detection in Unmanned MachinerySpaces

(Reg. II-2/14)

This requirement applies to machinery spaces of category A.

Note:




SC129(May, 1998)(Rev.1July 2004)

129-1

END

SC130

Fire Detection and Sprinkler Systems inRefrigerated Chambers and Similar Spaces

(Reg. II-2/36.2, Reg. II-2/41-2.2 and .5)

Heat detectors are acceptable in refrigerated chambers and in other spaces where steam and fumes areproduced such as saunas and laundries. Refrigerated chambers may be fitted with dry pipe sprinklersystems.

Note:




SC130(May, 1998)(Rev.1July 2004)

130-1

END

Liquid Cargoes for which regular foam isnot effective for Fire Fighting(Reg. II-2/55.2)

A liquid cargo with a flashpoint not exceeding 60°C for which a regular foam fire fighting systemcomplying with Regulation II-2 61 is not effective, is considered to be a cargo introducing additional firehazards in the scope of Regulation II-2/55.2. The following additional measures are required:

The foam is to be of an alcohol resistant type.

The capacity and application rates of the foam extinguishing system are to comply with Chapter 11 ofthe IBC Code, except that lower application rates may be accepted based on performance tests. Fortankers fitted with inert gas systems a quantity of foam concentrate sufficient for 20 min. of foamgeneration may be accepted.

For determining which cargoes require the use of an alcohol resistant foam, the MSC/Circ. 553 may beused for guidance.

Liquid cargoes with a flashpoint above 60°C other than oil products or liquid cargoes subject to theChemical Codes' requirements are considered to constitute a low fire risk not requiring the protection ofa foam extinguishing system.

Note:



SC131


SC131(May, 1998)(Corr.1June 1999)

(Rev.1July 2004)

131-1

END

SC132

Release Operation of the CO2 System(Reg. II-2/5.2.5)

These requirements only apply to systems protecting those spaces which are normally manned.

Note:




SC132(May,1998)(Rev.1July 2004)

132-1

END

SC133

Oil Mist Detector on High Speed Engines -“equivalent device”(Chapter II-1, Regulation 47.2)

“An equivalent device could be interpreted as measures applied to high speed engines where specificdesign features to preclude the risk of crankcase explosions are incorporated”.

_______________________

Note: The UI should be uniformly implemented by all Members and Associates not later than 1stJanuary 1999.

SC133(May, 1998)

IACS Int. 1998

▼▼

SC134

Essential Services and Arrangements of Sourcesof Power, Supply, Control and Monitoring to the different Catergories of Essential Services(SOLAS Regulations ll-1/40 & 41)

1. Classification of electrical services

1.1 Essential Services are those services essential for propulsion and steering, and safety of the ship, which are made up of "Primary Essential Services" and "SecondaryEssential Services". Definitions and examples of such services are given in 2 and 3 below.

1.2 Services to ensure minimum comfortable conditions of habitability are those services such as defined in 4 below.

2. Primary Essential ServicesPrimary Essential Services are those services which need to be in continuous operation to maintain propulsion and steering. Examples of equipment for primary essential services are as follows:

- Steering gears- Pumps for controllable pitch propellers- Scavenging air blower, fuel oil supply pumps, fuel valve cooling pumps,

lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps for main and auxiliary engines and turbines necessary for propulsion

- Forced draught fans, feed water pumps, water circulating pumps, vacuum pumps and condensate pumps for steam plants on steam turbine ships, and also for auxiliary boilers on ships where steam is used for equipmentsupplying primary essential services

- Oil burning installations for steam plants on steam turbine ships and for auxiliary boilers where steam is used for equipment supplying primary essential services

- Azimuth thrusters which are the sole means for propulsion/steering with lubricating oil pumps, cooling water pumps

- Electrical equipment for electric propulsion plant with lubricating oil pumps and cooling water pumps

- Electric generators and associated power sources supplying the above equipment

- Hydraulic pumps supplying the above equipment- Viscosity control equipment for heavy fuel oil- Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for equipment to primary

essential services.

3. Secondary Essential ServicesSecondary Essential Services are those services which need not necessarily be in continuous operation to maintain propulsion and steering but which are necessary for maintaining the vessel’s safety. Examples of equipment for secondary essential services are as follows:

- Windlass- Fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment equipment- Lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil treatment equipment- Pre-heaters for heavy fuel oil- Starting air and control air compressors- Bilge, ballast and heeling pumps- Fire pumps and other fire extinguishing medium pumps- Ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms

Note: 1.This UI SC 134 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1January 2003.

IACS Int. 2002

SC134(June 2002)

134-1

▼

SC134

- Services considered necessary to maintain dangerous spaces in a safe condition

- Navigation lights, aids and signals- Internal safety communication equipment- Fire detection and alarm system- Lighting system- Electrical Equipment for watertight closing appliances- Electric generators and associated power sources supplying the above

equipment- Hydraulic pumps supplying the above equipment- Control, monitoring and safety systems for cargo containment systems- Control, monitoring and safety devices/systems for equipment to secondary

essential services.

4. Services for habitabilityServices for habitability are those services which need to be in operation for maintaining the vessel’s minimum comfort conditions for the crew and passengers. Examples of equipment for maintaining conditions of habitability are as follows:

- Cooking- Heating- Domestic refrigeration- Mechanical ventilation- Sanitary and fresh water- Electric generators and associated power sources supplying the above

equipment

5. Regulation II-1/40.1.1 and Regulation II-1/41.1.1 – For the purposes of these regulations, the services as included in paragraphs 2 to 4 are to be considered.

6. Regulation II-1/40.1.2 – For the purposes of this regulation, the services as included in paragraphs2 and 3 and the services in the Regulation II-1/42 or II-1/43, as applicable, are to be considered.

7. Regulation II-1/41.1.2 – For the purposes of this regulation, the services as included in paragraphs2 to 4, except for those also listed in UI SC2, are to be considered.

8. Regulation II-1/41.1.5 – For the purposes of this regulation, the services as included in paragraphs2, 3 and 4 are to be considered. See also UI SC83.

9. (void)

10. Regulation II-1/41.5.1.2 - For the purposes of this regulation, the following interpretations are applicable.

10.1 Services in paragraph 2 are not to be included in any load shedding or other equivalent arrangements.

10.2 Services in paragraph 3 may be included in the automatic load shedding or other equivalent arrangement provided disconnection will not:

(a) cause immediate disruption of systems required for safety, e.g.:- Lighting systems,- Navigation lights, aids and signals,- Internal safety communication equipment.

(b) Prevent services required for safety being immediately available when the power supply is restored to normal operating conditions, e.g.:- Fire pumps, and other extinguishing medium pumps,- Bilge pumps,- Ventilating fans for engine and boiler rooms.

SC134(cont’d)

IACS Int. 2002134-2

▼

Examples of equipment in the paragraph 3, for which the automatic load shedding or other equivalent arrangement is normally allowed, includes:

- Fuel oil transfer pumps and fuel oil treatment equipment- Lubrication oil transfer pumps and lubrication oil treatment equipment- Pre-heaters for heavy fuel oil- Starting air and control air compressors (except for control air compressors for

propulsion control and its safety systems)- Services listed in UI SC2

10.3 Services for habitability in the paragraph 4 may be included in the automatic load shedding or other equivalent arrangement.

IACS Int. 2002

▼

SC134

SC134(cont’d)

134-3

▼

Escape Route or Low Location Lighting (LLL)(Chapter II-2, Regulation 28.1.10)

Deleted in May 2004

▼

SC135

SC135(May, 1998)(Rev.1 June1999)(DelMay 2004)


▼

SC136

Connecting means by which the mainbus bars of the main source of electricalpower are normally connected


Other approved means can be achieved by:

1. Circuit breaker without tripping mechanism2. Disconnecting link or switch by which busbars can be split easily and safely.

Bolted links, for example bolted bus bar sections, are not acceptable.

Note:

1. This UI is to be implemented by all Members and Associates not later than on ships contracted for construction on or after 1 January 1999.

2. Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be uniformly implemented by IACS Membersand Associates from 1 January 2004.


SC136(May, 1998)(Corr.May, 2000)(Rev.1 July 2003)(Corr.1Jan 2004)(Rev.2July 2004)


END

SC137

IACS Int. 1998

▼

Definition of High Speed Craft

(Chapter IX, Reg 1.8)

For the purpose of application of the ISM (International Safety Management) Code not later than 1 July1998, a High-Speed Craft is a craft as defined in SOLAS regulation X/1.2 which complies with therequirements of the High-Speed Craft Code in its entirety and has been surveyed as given in regulationX/3.1.

High speed craft meeting the requirements given in the regulation X/1.2 but complying withrequirements of chapters I to IV and regulation V/12 in lieu of the High-Speed Craft Code are notrequired to comply with the ISM Code by 1 July 1998, but must comply by 1 July 2002.

SC137(April, 1998)

▼

SC138

Safe Access to Tanker Bows

Reg. II-1/3-3.2

Interpretation of SOLAS II-1/3-3.2, Safe Access to Tanker Bows, for all vessels subject to thatregulation, is provided in IACS UI LL50.

____________________

IACS Members and Associates are to apply UI LL50 (Rev. 2 1997), in so far as SOLAS II-1/3-3.2 isconcerned, to all ships subject to that regulation.

SC138(May, 1998)

IACS Int. 1998

▼▼

SC139

Navigation bridge visibility(Chapter V, Regulation 22)

Regulation

SOLAS regulation V/22.1.6 reads:

The ship’s side shall be visible from the bridge wing.

SOLAS regulation V/22.3 reads:

On ships of unconventional design which, in the opinion of the Administration, cannotcomply with this regulation, arrangements shall be provided to achieve a level ofvisibility that is as near as practical to those described in this regulation.

Interpretation

The use of a remote camera system may be accepted for ships of unconventionaldesign as means for achieving the view of the ship’s side from the bridge wing,provided:

- the installed remote camera system is to be redundant from the circuit breaker tothe camera and screen, including communication cables, i.e. the system is to provide on each side of the ship redundancy of:

* the power cables and circuit breakers from the main switchboard to the camera and the screen;

* the camera;* the screen;* the transmission lines from the camera to the display screen; and * the components associated with these lines and cables;

- the remote camera system is powered from the ship’s main source of electrical power and is not required to be powered by the emergency source of electrical power;

- the remote camera system is capable of continuous operation under environmental conditions as per UR E10;

- the view provided by the remote camera system is regarded sufficient for the purpose and is also displayed at locations where the manoeuvring of the ship may take place;

- the upper edge of the ship’s side abeam can be viewed visually from such location;

- the solution is accepted by the flag state (national authority).

SC139(May, 1998)(Rev.1Dec 2003)

IACS Int. 1998/ Rev.1 Dec 2003

▼▼

139-1

SC140

Secondary Means of Venting Cargo Tanks(Reg. II-2/59.1.2.3 & 59.1.3.2)

1. A P/V breaker fitted on the IG main may be utilised as the required secondary means of venting.

2. The height requirements of Reg. II-2/59.1.7 and 59.1.9 and the requirements for devices toprevent the passage of flame of Reg. II-2/59.1.5 are not applicable to the P/V breaker provided thesettings are above those of the venting arrangements required by Reg. II-2/59.1.2.1 and 59.1.2.2.

3. Where the venting arrangements are of the free flow type and the masthead isolation valve isclosed for the unloading condition, the IG systems will serve as the primary underpressureprotection with the P/V breaker serving as the secondary means.

4. Inadvertent closure or mechanical failure of the isolation valves required by SOLAS Reg. II-2/59.1.3.2 and Reg. II-2/62.11.2.1 need not be considered in establishing the secondary meanssince:

a) The valves are operated under the control of the responsible ships officer and a clearvisual indication of the operational status of the valves is required by SOLAS Reg. II-2/59.1.3.2,as amended, and

b) The possibility of mechanical failure of the valves is remote due to their simplicity.

SC140(October1998)(Rev. 1 June1999)


▼▼

SC141

Information on compliance with requirements for bulk carriers - "triangle" to be marked on a bulk carrier

(Chapter XII, Regulation 8.3)

Deleted in July 1999.

UI SC 141 (1999), with some changes, was adopted by IMO/MSC 71 in 1999 as MSC

Res.89(71).

SC141(1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼

SC142

Embarkation Ladders & Survival CraftLaunching Falls(Chapter III, Regulations 11.7 & 16.6)

Deleted in January 2000.

SC142

IACS Int. 1999/Rev. 1 1999

▼▼

SC 143

Stowage of Marine Evacuation Systems

(Chapter III, Regulation 15)

III/15.1 requires that the ship’s side shall not have any openings between the embarkation station of themarine evacuation station and the sea level in the lightest seagoing condition. This means no openings,be they permanent openings, recessed promenades or temporary openings such as shell doors, windowsor ports. No openings are allowed in this particular area. Windows and side scuttles of the non-openingtype are allowed if complying with Reg.II-2/33.3.

Note: This Unified Interpretation is to be uniformly implemented by all Members and Associates from 1July 1999, unless otherwise instructed by a flag state.

SC143(1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼

SC144

Periodic Servicing of Launching Appliancesand on-load Releasing Gear

(Chapter III, Regulation 20.11)

1. The reference to five (5) year intervals in III/20.11.1.2 and III/20.11.2.3 starts as of 1 July 1998.

2. The first service should be as soon as possible after 1 July 1998 and not later than 1 July 2003.

3. The reference to “properly trained personnel” in III/20.11.2.2 means competent persons familiarwith the on-load system and would include, but is not necessarily limited to, manufacturersrepresentatives, or shipyard engineers or a specialist vendor, certified by a manufacturer.

4. The thorough examinations/overhauls and tests in five year intervals shall be done in the presenceof a surveyor.

Notes: 1. This Unified Interpretation is to be uniformly implemented by all Members and Associates from 1 July 1999, unless otherwise instructed by a Flag State.

2. Changes introduced in Rev.1 are to be applied from 1 July 1999.

SC144(1999)(Rev.1 Nov.1999)

IACS Int. 1999/Rev.1

▼▼

SC145

Public Address System

(LSA Code, para. 7.2.2)

1. With respect to spaces where a public address system is/may not be required in 7.2.2.1, these maybe spaces such as under deck passage way, bosun’s locker, hospital, pump room.

2. With respect to cabin/state rooms, the sound pressure levels as stated in 7.2.2.2.1 shall be attainedas required inside the cabin/state room, during sea trials.

3. Where an individual loudspeaker has a device for local silencing, an over-ride arrangement fromthe control station(s), including the navigating bridge, shall be in place.

Note: This Unified Interpretation is to be uniformly implemented by all Members and Associates from 1 April 1999, unless otherwise instructed by a Flag State.

SC145(1998)

IACS Int. 1998

▼▼

SC146

Fire hose couplings and nozzles

(Chapter II-2, Reg.4.7 and Reg. 8)

Interpretation

Aluminium alloys may be used for fire hose couplings and nozzles, except in open deck areas of oiltankers and chemical tankers.

Note: This UI SC 146 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from January 2000.

SC146(May1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼

SOLAS Regulations Chapter II-2/4.7 and 8 address the requirements of fire hoses and of the fixedlow-expansion foam fire-extinguishing systems in machinery spaces respectively.

SC147

Watertight door closure

(Chapter II-2, Reg. 13.1.14)

Interpretations

Watertight doors complying with Reg.II-1/15 which also serve as fire doors are not to be closedautomatically in case of fire detection.


SC147(May1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼

SOLAS Regulation II-2/13.1.14 reads:

The fire detection system shall not be used for any other purpose, except that closing of fire doors andsimilar functions may be permitted at the control panel.

SC148

Ventilation by fan coil units

(Chapter II-2, Reg. 32.1.6 and Reg. 40.7.1)

Interpretations

The fan in a cabin HVAC temperature control unit is not considered to be a ventilation fan as addressedin Reg.II-2/32.1.6 and Reg.II-2/40.7.1, if it is not capable of supplying outside air to the cabin when thepower ventilation is shut down.


SC148(May1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼

SOLAS Regulations Chapter II-2/32.1.6 reads:

All power ventilation, except machinery space and cargo space ventilation and any alternative systemwhich may be required under Regulation 16.6, shall be fitted with controls so grouped that all fans maybe stopped from either of two separate positions which shall be situated as far apart as practicable.Controls provided for the power ventilation serving machinery spaces shall also be grouped so as to beoperable from two positions, one of which shall be outside such spaces. Fans serving powerventilation systems to cargo spaces shall be capable of being stopped from a safe position outside suchspaces.

SC149

Portable instruments for measuring flammable vapours

(Chapter II-2, Reg.59.5)

Interpretation

The requirement for a portable instrument and spares for measuring flammable vapour concentrations ofReg.II-2/59.5 should be considered as being satisfied when a minimum of two such instruments areprovided onboard.


SC149(May1999)

IACS Int. 1986

▼▼

SOLAS Regulation Chapter II-2/59.5 reads:

All tankers shall be equipped with at least one portable instrument for measuring flammable vapourconcentrations, together with a sufficient set of spares. Suitable means shall be provided for thecalibration of such instruments.

SC150

Location of the foam system equipment

(Chapter II-2, Reg.61.2)

Interpretation

The major equipment such as the foam concentrate tank and the pumps may be located in the engineroom. The controls of the system are to be located in accordance with Reg.II-2/61.2.


SC150(May1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼


The deck foam system shall be capable of simple and rapid operation. The main control station forthe system shall be suitably located outside the cargo area, adjacent to the accommodation spaces andreadily accessible and operable in the event of fire in the areas protected.

SC151

Location of the main generating stationwith respect to the main switchboard and associated section boards

(Chapter II-1, Reg. 41.3)

Definitions

Main generating station is the space where the main source of electrical power is situated.

Main source of electrical power is a source intended to supply electrical power to the main switchboardfor distribution to all services necessary for maintaining the ship in normal operational and habitablecondition.

Main switchboard is a switchboard which is directly supplied by the main source of electrical powerand is intended to distribute electrical energy to the ship’s services.

Machinery space, for the purpose of this UI, is to be taken as extending from the moulded base line tothe margin line and between the extreme main transverse watertight bulkheads, bounding the spacescontaining the main and auxiliary propulsion machinery, boilers serving the needs of propulsion, and allpermanent coal bunkers. In the case of unusual arrangements, the Administration may define the limitsof the machinery space.

Interpretations

The main generating station is to be situated within the machinery space, i.e. within the extreme maintransverse watertight bulkheads.

Any bulkhead between the extreme main transverse watertight bulkheads is not regarded as separatingthe equipment in the main generating station provided that there is access between the spaces.

The main switchboard is to be located as close as practicable to the main generating station, within thesame machinery space and the same vertical and horizontal A60 fire boundaries.

Where essential services for steering and propulsion are supplied from section boards these and anytransformers, converters and similar appliances constituting an essential part of electrical supply systemare also to satisfy the foregoing.

Note: This UI SC 151 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1January 2000.

SC151(May1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼


The main switchboard shall be so placed relative to one main generating station that, as far as ispracticable, the integrity of the normal electrical supply may be affected only by a fire or othercasualty in one space. An environmental enclosure for the main switchboard, such as may beprovided by a machinery control room situated within the main boundaries of the space, is not tobe considered as separating the switchboards from the penetrators.

Use of emergency generator in port(Chapter II-1, Regulations 42.1.4 and 43.1.4)

Interpretations

1. General

Unless instructed otherwise by the Administration the emergency generator may be used during lay timein port for the supply of the ship mains, provided the requirements as per items 2 and 3 below arecomplied with.

2. Requirements

2.1 To prevent the generator or its prime mover from becoming overloaded when used in port,arrangements are to be provided to shed sufficient non-emergency loads to ensure its continued safeoperation.

2.2 The prime mover is to be arranged with fuel oil filters and lubrication oil filters, monitoringequipment and protection devices as required for the prime mover for main power generation and forunattended operation.

2.3 The fuel oil supply tank to the prime mover is to be provided with a low level alarm, arranged at alevel ensuring sufficient fuel oil capacity for the emergency services for the period of time as required bySOLAS.

2.4 The prime mover is to be designed and built for continuous operation and should be subjected to aplanned maintenance scheme ensuring that it is always available and capable of fulfilling its role in theevent of an emergency at sea.

2.5 Fire detectors are to be installed in the location where the emergency generator set and emergencyswitchboard are installed.

2.6 Means are to be provided to readily change over to emergency operation.

2.7 Control, monitoring and supply circuits, for the purpose of the use of the emergency generator inport are to be so arranged and protected that any electrical fault will not influence the operation of themain and emergency services.

When necessary for safe operation, the emergency switchboard is to be fitted with switches to isolate thecircuits.

3. Operation

Instructions* are to be provided on board to ensure that when the vessel is under way all control devices(e.g. valves, switches) are in a correct position for the independent emergency operation of theemergency generator set and emergency switchboard.

* These instructions are also to contain information on required fuel oil tank level, position ofharbour/sea mode switch if fitted, ventilation openings etc.


SC152

SC152(May1999)

IACS Int. 1999

▼▼

SOLAS Regulations II-1/42.1.4 and 43.1.4 read:

Provided that suitable measures are taken for safeguarding independent emergency operation under allcircumstances, the emergency generator may be used exceptionally, and for short periods, to supplynon-emergency circuits.

SC 153

Rudder Stock Diameter (Reg.II-1/29.3.3, 29.4.3 and 29.14)

1. When calculating the diameter of the rudder stock, cognizance must be taken of SOLAS II-1/29.3.3 and 29.4.3.

2. In this regard, the diameter mentioned in SOLAS II-1/29.3.3, 29.4.3 and 19.14 should betaken as having been calculated for rudder stock of mild steel with a yield strength of 235 N/mm2.(i.e. with a material factor k=1).


SC153(Feb.2000)

IACS Int. 2000

▼▼

SC154

Provision of Detailed Information on Specific Cargo Hold Flooding Scenarios(SOLAS XII/9.3)

This Unified Interpretation is applicable only to bulk carriers which are constructed before 1 July 1999but not capable of complying with SOLAS XII/4.2.

Where bulk carriers are shown to be not capable of complying with SOLAS XII/4.2 due to the designconfiguration of their cargo holds, SOLAS XII/9 permits relaxation from the application of regulations4.2 and 6 on the basis of compliance with certain other requirements, including provision of detailedinformation on specific cargo hold flooding scenarios.

1. General - The information should comprise at least the following:

1.1 Specific cargo hold flooding scenarios.1.2 Instructions for evacuation preparedness.1.3 Details of the ship’s means for leakage detection

2. Specific cargo hold flooding scenarios

2.1 Flooding assumptions:

2.1.1 The flooding of the foremost cargo hold is to be used as the starting point for any respective flooding scenario. Subsequent flooding of other spaces can only occur due toprogressive flooding.

2.1.2 The permeability of a loaded hold shall be assumed as 0.9 and the permeability of an empty hold shall be assumed as 0.95, unless a permeability relevant to a particular cargo is assumed for the volume of a flooded hold occupied by cargo and a permeability of 0.95 is assumed for the remaining empty volume of the hold. The permeability of a hold loaded with packaged cargo shall be assumed as 0.7.

2.2 Loading conditions to be considered:

2.2.1 Flooding scenarios should be developed for loading conditions loaded down to the summer load line even if not in compliance with the requirements of Regulation 4.2.The scope to be covered should include at least the following:

• A homogenous and, if applicable, an alternate hold loading condition are to beconsidered.

• In case one or more loading conditions meet the requirements of regulation 4.2, this should be noted.

• A packaged cargo condition, if applicable.

2.2.2 In case the vessel is able to withstand flooding of the foremost hold at a lower draught, guidance in the form of limiting KG/GM curves, based on the flooding assumptions in 2.1, should be provided. Curves should indicate the assumed trim and whether the foremost hold is homogeneously loaded, loaded with high density cargo (alternate hold loading), loaded with packaged cargo or empty.

2.3 Presentation of results

SC154(Mar. 2000)

IACS Int. 2000

▼

C1–C2.1

IACS Int. 1986

▼

SC154

The results should clearly indicate the reasons for non-compliance with the survival criteria given in Reg. XII/4.3 and explain the implications regarding the need to abandon ship. e.g. immersion ofa weathertight closing appliance if the stability characteristics are otherwise satisfactory may indicate that there is no immediate danger of foundering, provided the bulkhead strength is adequate, particularly if the weather conditions are favourable and bilge pumping can cope with any progressive flooding.

3. Guidance for evacuation

The following guidance in this IACS Interpretation with regard to preparation for evacuation is in themost general terms. Responsibility for the preparation of detailed information rests with the operator ofthe ship.

3.1 In any case of detection of severe flooding (made in accordance with UR S 24), preparations for abandoning the vessel shall be envisaged in accordance with the applicable rules and procedures, such as SOLAS III, STCW and the ISM Code.

3.2 In the context of severe weather conditions the weather itself may have substantial influence on the development of the flooding and consequently the time remaining to execute the abandoning of the ship could be much shorter than estimated in any pre-assessed flooding scenario.


SC154cont’d

IACS Int. 2000

▼▼

SC 155

Lightweight check in lieu of inclining test(Regulation II-1/22)

SOLAS regulation Il-1/22.1 requires every new passenger ship regardless of size andevery new cargo ship of 24 m or greater in length to be inclined. Regulation 22.4permits an inclining test to be waived for an individual vessel provided basic stabilitydata is available from the inclining test of a sister vessel and that it can be satisfactorilyshown that such data is valid for the exempted vessel.

1. A sister vessel is a vessel built by the same yard from the same plans.

2. A lightweight check is considered the acceptable means of being satisfied that thedata from a lead sister vessel's inclining test can be used for a subsequent vessel.Members may request regular repeats of inclining tests and /or require each individualpassenger ship to be inclined, if deemed necessary.

3. For any new built sister vessel with known differences from the lead sister vessel orfor a vessel in service which undergoes alterations with calculable differences in lightship properties, a detailed weights and centres calculation, to adjust the lead vessellightship properties or original lightship properties, shall be carried out.

The validity of the calculated lightship properties shall be assessed by carrying out alightweight check unless the implications regarding the stability of the vessel indicatethat an inclining test should be performed.

4. For acceptance of the lightweight check results, the deviation of lightshipdisplacement determined by a light weight check is not to exceed 2% of the expectedvalue, if applicable determined by detailed weights and centres calculation as inparagraph 3 above. In addition, the deviation of lightship longitudinal centre of gravityis not to exceed 1% of LBP of the vessel. Where the deviation exceeds either of theselimits, an inclining test should be carried out.

5. This interpretation is applicable to all vessels for which intact stability is a matter ofclass per UR L2.

Note: This UI SC 155 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members andAssociates from 1 January 2001.

SC155(June 2000)

IACS Int. 2000

▼▼

SC 156

Doors in watertight bulkheads of cargo shipsand passenger ships

This unified interpretation pertains to doors1 located in way of the internal watertightsubdivision boundaries and the external watertight boundaries necessary to ensurecompliance with the relevant subdivision and damage stability regulations.

This unified interpretation does not apply to doors located in external boundariesabove equilibrium or intermediate waterplanes.

The design and testing requirements for watertight doors vary according to theirlocation relative to the equilibrium waterplane or intermediate waterplane at any stageof assumed flooding.

Members agreed that the scope of an IACS interpretation in this context shall not belimited to watertight doors covered by SOLAS. Watertight doors required by otherstatutory damage stability requirements, e.g. MARPOL, the IBC and IGC Codes arecovered as well. Small cargo vessels not subject to damage stability requirements arenot required to comply with the full scheme.

1. Definitions

For the purpose of this UI the following definitions apply:

Watertight: Capable of preventing the passage of water in any direction under adesign head. The design head for any part of a structure shall be determined byreference to its location relative to the bulkhead deck or freeboard deck, as applicable,or to the most unfavourable equilibrium/intermediate waterplane, in accordance withthe applicable subdivision and damage stability regulations, whichever is the greater. Awatertight door is thus one that will maintain the watertight integrity of the subdivisionbulkhead in which it is located.

Equilibrium Waterplane: The waterplane in still water when, taking account offlooding due to an assumed damage, the weight and buoyancy forces acting on avessel are in balance. This relates to the final condition when no further flooding takesplace or after cross flooding is completed.

Intermediate Waterplane: The waterplane in still water, which represents theinstantaneous floating position of a vessel at some intermediate stage betweencommencement and completion of flooding when, taking account of the assumedinstantaneous state of flooding, the weight and buoyancy forces acting on a vessel arein balance.

Sliding Door or Rolling Door: A door having a horizontal or vertical motion generallyparallel to the plane of the door.

Hinged Door: A door having a pivoting motion about one vertical or horizontal edge.

Footnote:1 Doors in watertight bulkheads of small cargo ships, not subject to any statutory subdivision anddamage stability requirements, may be hinged quick acting doors arranged to open out of the major spaceprotected. They shall be constructed in accordance with the requirements of the classing society and havenotices affixed to each side stating, "To be kept closed at sea". This UI shall not apply to HSCs pendingcompletion of revision of the HSC Code by IMO and consideration of same by the applicable IACS WPs.

Note: 1. This UI SC 156 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1January 2003.

SC156(June 2002)

IACS Int. 2002

▼

SC 156-1

SC156

2. Structural Design

Doors shall be of approved design and substantial construction in accordance with therequirements of the classing society and shall be of a strength equivalent to that of thesubdivision bulkheads in which they are fitted.

3. Operation Mode, Location and Outfitting

Doors shall be fitted in accordance with all requirements regarding their operationmode, location and outfitting, i.e. provision of controls, means of indication, etc., asshown in Table 1 below. This table is to be read in conjunction with the followinggeneral notes: For passenger ships the watertight doors and their controls are to belocated in compliance with SOLAS II-1/15.6.3 and II-1/15.7.1.2.2.

3.1 Frequency of Use whilst at sea

Normally Closed Kept closed at sea but may be used if authorised. To be closed again after use.

Permanently ClosedThe time of opening such doors in port and of closing them before the ship leaves portshall be entered in the log-book. Should such doors be accessible during the voyage,they shall be fitted with a device to prevent unauthorised opening.

Normally OpenMay be left open provided it is always ready to be immediately closed.

UsedIn regular use, may be left open provided it is ready to be immediately closed.

3.2 Type

Power operated, sliding or rolling2 POSPower operated, hinged POHSliding or Rolling SHinged H

3.3 Control

3.3.1 Local

All doors, except those which are to be permanently closed at sea, are to be capable of being opened and closed by hand, (and by power, where applicable3)locally, from both sides of the doors, with the ship listed to either side.

For passenger ships, the angle of list at which operation by hand is to be possible is 15 degrees or 20 degrees if the ship is allowed to heel up to 20 degrees during intermediate stages of flooding.For cargo ships, the angle of list at which operation by hand is to be possible is 30 degrees.

2 Rolling doors are technically identical to sliding doors.

3 Arrangements for passenger ships shall be in accordance with SOLAS II-I/15.7.1.4

SC156cont d

▼

SC156-2IACS Int. 2002

SC 156

3.3.2 Remote

Where indicated in Table 1, doors are to be capable of being remotely closed by power from the bridge 4. Where it is necessary to start the power unit for operation of the watertight door, means to start the power unit is also to be provided at remote control stations. The operation of such remote control is to bein accordance with SOLAS II-1/15.8.1 to 15.8.3.

3.4 Indication

Where shown in Table 1, position indicators are to be provided at all remote operatingpositions5 as well as locally, on both sides of the doors6, to show whether the doorsare open or closed and, if applicable, with all dogs/cleats fully and properly engaged.

The door position indicating system is to be of self-monitoring type and the means fortesting of the indicating system are to be provided at the position where the indicatorsare fitted.

An indication (i.e. red light) should be placed locally showing that the door is in remotecontrol mode ("doors closed mode"). Ref. also SOLAS Reg. 15-8.1. Special careshould be taken in order to avoid potential danger when passing through the door.Signboard/instructions should be placed in way of the door advising how to act whenthe door is in "doors closed" mode.

3.5 Alarms

Doors which are to be capable of being remotely closed are to be provided with anaudible alarm, distinct from any other alarm in the area, which will sound wheneversuch a door is remotely closed. For passenger ships the alarm shall sound for at least5 s but not more than 10 s before the door begins to move and shall continue soundinguntil the door is completely closed. In the case of remote closure by hand operation, analarm is required to sound only while the door is actually moving.In passenger areas and areas of high ambient noise, the audible alarms are to besupplemented by visual signals at both sides of the doors.

3.6 Notices

As shown in Table 1, doors which are normally closed at sea but not provided withmeans of remote closure, are to have notices fixed to both sides of the doors stating,To be kept closed at sea. Doors which are to be permanently closed at sea are to havenotices fixed to both sides stating, Not to be opened at sea .

.

4 Arrangements for passenger ships shall be in accordance with SOLAS II-1/15.7.1.55 Indication at all remote control positions (SOLAS II-I/15.6.4)6 refer to SOLAS II-1/25-9.3

SC156cont d

▼


SC156

4. Fire Doors

Watertight doors may also serve as fire doors but need not be fire-tested whenintended for use below the bulkhead deck. Where such doors are used at locationsabove the bulkhead deck they shall, in addition to complying with the provisionsapplicable to fire doors at the same locations, also comply with means of escapeprovisions of SOLAS ll-2/13 (2000 Amendments, MSC Res. 99 (73).Where a watertight door is located adjacent to a fire door, both doors shall be capableof independant operation, remotely if required by SOLAS ll-1/15.8.1 to 15.8.3 and fromboth sides of the each door.

5. Testing

5.1 Doors which become immersed by an equilibrium or intermediate waterplane, are to be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure test.

5.1.1 For large doors intended for use in the watertight subdivision boundaries of cargo spaces, structural analysis may be accepted in lieuof pressure testing. Where such doors utilise gasket seals, a prototype pressure test to confirm that the compression of the gasket material is capable of accommodating any deflection, revealed by the structural analysis, is to be carried out.

5.2 Doors which are not immersed by an equilibrium or intermediate waterplane but become intermittently immersed at angles of heel in the required range of positivestability beyond the equilibrium position are to be hose tested.7

For clarification purposes it shall be noted that even though these doors are coveredby the text in this UI, in accordance with the practice of LL, SOLAS and MARPOL Conventions such hose testing usually is related to weathertight doors rather than towatertight doors.

5.3 Pressure Testing

5.3.1 The head of water used for the pressure test shall correspond at least to the head measured from the lower edge of the door opening, at the location in which the door is to be fitted in the vessel, to the bulkhead deck or freeboard deck, as applicable, or to the most unfavourable damage waterplane, if that be greater. Testing may be carried out at thefactory or other shore based testing facility prior to installation in the ship.

5.3.2 Leakage Criteria

5.3.2.1 The following acceptable leakage criteria should apply to Doors with gaskets No leakageDoors with metallic sealing Max leakage 1 liter/min.

7 Additionally, such doors may need to be pressure tested to a head as specified by a National standardor regional agreement

SC156cont d

▼

SC156-4

IACS Int. 2002

SC 156

5.3.2.2 Limited leakage may be accepted for pressure tests on large doors located in cargo spaces employing gasket seals or guillotine doors located in conveyor tunnels, in accordance with the following8:

Leakage rate(liter/min) =

where: P = perimeter of door opening (metres)h = test head of water (metres)

5.3.2.3 However, in the case of doors where the water head taken for the determination of the scantling does not exceed 6.10 m, the leakage ratemay be taken equal to 0.375 liter/min if this value is greater than that calculated by the above-mentioned formula.

5.3.3 For doors on passenger ships which are normally open and used at seaor which become submerged by the equilibrium or intermediate waterplane, a prototype test shall be conducted, on each side of the door, to check the satisfactory closing of the door against a force equivalent to a water height of at least 1m above the sill on the centre line of the door9.

5.4 Hose Testing

5.4.1 All watertight doors shall be subject to a hose test in accordance with UR S 14.2.3 after installation in a ship. Hose testing is to be carried out from each side of a door unless, for a specific application, exposure to floodwater is anticipated only from one side. Where a hose test is not practicable because of possible damage to machinery, electrical equipment insulation or outfitting items, it may be replaced by means such as an ultrasonic leak test or an equivalent test.

8 published in the ATM F 1196, Standard Specification for Sliding Watertight Door Assemblies andreferenced in the Title 46 US Code of Federal Regulations 170.270 Door design, operation installation andtesting

9 Arrangements for passenger ships shall be in accordance with SOLAS Reg. II-1/15.6.2

SC156cont d

▼


( . )P h+ •4 5726568

3

SC 156

SC

156contd

▼▼

Internal Doors in W

atertight Bulkheads in C

argo Ships and Passenger Ships

Position relative to

equilibrium or

intermediate

waterplane

Frequency of U

sew

hilst at seaT

ypeR

emote

Control

6

Indicationlocally andon B

ridge6

Audible

Alarm

6N

oticeC

omm

entsR

egulation

Passenger Ships

Norm

. Closed

POS

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

Certain doors m

ay beleft open, see SO

LA

SII-1/15.9.3

SOL

AS II-1/ 15.9.1,2

& 3

At or below

Perm. C

losedS, H

No

No

No

Yes

see Notes 1 +

4SO

LA

S II-1/ 15.10.1 &2

Norm

. openPO

S,PO

HY

esY

esY

esN

o

S, HN

oY

esN

oY

essee N

ote 2

SOL

AS II-1/ 15.9.3

SOL

AS II-1/20.1

MSC

/Circ.541

Above

Norm

. Closed

S, HN

oY

esN

oY

esD

oors giving access toR

o-Ro D

eckSO

LA

S II-1/20-2

Cargo Ships

Used

POS

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

SOL

AS II-1/ 25-9.2

Norm

. Closed

S, HN

oY

esN

oY

essee N

otes 2 + 3 +

5SO

LA

S II-1/ 25-9.3A

t or belowPerm

. Closed

S, HN

oN

oN

oY

essee N

otes 1 + 4

SOL

AS II-1/ 25-9.4

SOL

AS II-1/ 25-10

Used

POS

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

SOL

AS II-1/ 25-9.2

Above

Norm

. closedS, H

No

Yes

No

Yes

See Notes 2 +

5SO

LA

S II-1/ 25-9.3

Notes:

1. D

oors in watertight bulkheads subdividing cargo spaces.

2. If hinged, this door shall be of quick acting or single action type

3. "IC

LL

66+A

.320" or "1988 Protocol to ICL

L66",

MA

RPO

L, IG

C and IB

C- C

odes require remotely operated w

atertight doors to be sliding doors.4.

The tim

e of opening such doors in port and closing them before the ship leaves port shall be entered in the logbook.

5. T

he use of such doors shall be authorised by the officer of the watch.

6. C

ables for control and power system

s to power operated w

atertight doors and their status indication should comply w

ith the requirements of U

R E

15.

Table 1.

SOL

AS II-1/ 25-10

SOL

AS,

1.2.

3.4.

5.6.

7.8.

I.II.

A.

B.

A.

B.

SC156-6

IACS Int. 2002

SC157

Main Source of Electrical Power(Regulation II-1/41.5)

Interpretation of the clause “...will be maintained or immediately restored” as detailedin Reg. II-1/41.5.1.1 amending SOLAS Reg. II-1/41 - Main Source of electrical powerand lighting systems.

1. Reg. II-1/41.5.1.1 - Where the main source of electrical power is necessary forpropulsion and steering of the ship, the system shall be so arranged that the electricalsupply to equipment necessary for propulsion and steering and to ensure safety of theship will be maintained or immediately restored in case of loss of any one of thegenerators in service.

2. To fulfil the above the following measures are required:

2.1 Where the electrical power is normally supplied by more than one generator setsimultaneously in parallel operation, provision of protection, including automaticdisconnection of sufficient non-essential services and if necessary secondary essentialservices and those provided for habitability, should be made to ensure that, in case ofloss of any of these generating sets, the remaining ones are kept in operation to permitpropulsion and steering and to ensure safety.

2.2 Where the electrical power is normally supplied by one generator provision shallbe made, upon loss of power, for automatic starting and connecting to the mainswitchboard of stand-by generator(s) of sufficient capacity with automatic restarting ofthe essential auxiliaries, in sequential operation if required. Starting and connection tothe main switchboard of the stand-by generator is to be preferably within 30 seconds,but in any case not more than 45 seconds, after loss of power. Where prime movers with longer starting time are used, this starting and connectiontime may be exceeded upon approval from the society.

2.3 Load shedding or other equivalent arrangements should be provided to protectthe generators required by this regulation against sustained overload.

2.3.1 The load shedding should be automatic.

2.3.2 The non-essential services, service for habitable conditions may be shed andwhere necessary, additionally the secondary essential services, sufficient to ensure theconnected generator set(s) is/are not overloaded.

Note: 1. This UI SC 157 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members andAssociates from 1 January 2001.

2. Amendments introduced in Rev.1 are to be uniformly implemented from 1 January 2006.

SC157(June 2000)(Rev.1Feb 2005)


END

SC 158

Horizontal fire zone concept(Reg. II-2/37.1.1.1)

The "Total overall clear height" is the sum of distances between deck and web framesof the decks forming one horizontal zone.


IACS Int. 2000

▼

SC158(June 2000)

▼

SC 159

Equivalent Protection

(Reg. II-2/53.1.2)

Water supplies defined in Reg. II-2/54.2.1.2 are considered as an acceptableprotection for cargoes listed in Table 2 of MSC/Circ. 671.

Note: This UI SC 159 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associatesfrom 1 January 2001.

IACS Int. 2001

▼

SC159(June 2000)(Corr.1May 2001)

▼

SC 160

Method IIIC Construction

(Reg. II-2/52.3)

In the case of ships built in accordance with Method IIIC, the detection system is onlyrelevant to the accommodation block. Service spaces built away from theaccommodation block need not be fitted with a fixed fire detection system.


SC160(June 2000)

IACS Int. 2000

▼▼

SC 161

Timber deck cargo in the context of damage stability requirements

(Chapter II-1, Regulation 25-8.1)

SOLAS Regulation II-1/25-8.1 reads:

Stability information

1 The master of the ship shall be supplied with such reliable information as isnecessary to enable him by rapid and simple means to obtain accurate guidance as tothe stability of the ship under varying conditions of service. The information shallinclude:

.1 a curve of minimum operational metacentric height (GM) versus draught whichassures compliance with the relevant intact stability requirements and therequirements of regulations 25-1 to 25-6, alternatively a corresponding curve of themaximum allowable vertical centre of gravity (KG) versus draught, or with theequivalents of either of these curves;

.2 instructions concerning the operation of cross-flooding arrangements; and

.3 all other data and aids which might be necessary to maintain stability afterdamage.

Scope

The provisions given hereunder apply to ships that are subject to SOLAS, Chapter II-1,Part B-1 subdivision and damage stability calculations and engaged in carrying timberdeck cargoes. The buoyancy of the timber deck cargo can optionally be taken intoaccount in the damage stability calculations, subject to the provisions that have beenset forth in this document.

They shall comply with the requirements of the CODE OF SAFE PRACTICE FORSHIPS CARRYING TIMBER DECK CARGOES, 1991, and Ships that are providedwith and make use of their timber load line shall also comply with the requirements ofregulations 41 to 45 of the LOAD LINE CONVENTION, 1966.

Definitions

The following definitions apply for the purposes of this interpretation:

timber means sawn wood or lumber, cants, logs, poles, pulpwood and all other typesof timber in loose or packaged forms. The term does not include wood pulp or similarcargo;

timber deck cargo means a cargo of timber carried on an uncovered part of afreeboard or superstructure deck. The term does not include wood pulp or similarcargo;

timber load line means a special load line assigned to ships complying with certainconditions related to their construction set out in the LOAD LINE CONVENTION 1966and used when the cargo complies with the stowage and securing conditions of theCODE OF SAFE PRACTICE FOR SHIPS CARRYING TIMBER DECK CARGOES,1991 (Resolution A.715(17));

SC161(May 2000)

IACS Int. 2000

▼

SC 161

deepest timber subdivision load line is the subdivision load line which corresponds tothe timber summer draught to be assigned to the ship;

respective partial load line is the light ship draught plus 60% of the difference betweenthe light ship draught and the deepest timber subdivision load line.

Interpretation

1. The stowage of timber deck cargoes shall comply with the provisions of Chapter 3 ofthe CODE OF SAFE PRACTICE FOR SHIPS CARRYING TIMBER DECK CARGOES,1991 (resolution A.715(17)).

2. The ship shall be supplied with comprehensive stability information which takes intoaccount timber deck cargo. Such information shall enable the master, rapidly andsimply, to obtain accurate guidance as to the stability of the ship under varyingconditions of service, and as required in SOLAS Regulation II-1,25-8 it shall include,among other damage stability related issues, a curve of minimum operatingmetacentric height (GM) versus draught which covers the requirements of SOLASRegulation II-1/25-8.1.1.

3. The height and extent of the timber deck cargo shall be in accordance with Chapter3.2 of the CODE OF SAFE PRACTICE FOR SHIPS CARRYING TIMBER DECKCARGOES, 1991, and shall be at least stowed to the standard height of onesuperstructure, if considered buoyant in the context of the subdivision and damagestability calculations.

4. Account may be taken of the buoyancy of the timber deck cargo, assuming thatsuch cargo has a permeability of 25% of the volume occupied by the cargo, however,the buoyancy of only one standard superstructure height of timber deck cargo may beconsidered.

5. Unless instructed otherwise by the Administration, the stability information for shipswith timber deck cargoes may be supplemented by a second curve of limiting GM (orKG) covering the then permissible draught range as specified below. Thus whenaccepting two stability limiting curves one curve shall be applicable when carryingtimber deck cargo and a second curve for any other loading condition.

6. The above described provision of two curves are to be developed as described inSOLAS Regulation II-1/25-8.3, if they have been determined from considerationsrelated to the subdivision index, based on the following:

6.1. for any loading condition other than timber deck cargo the limiting GM with thedraughts as described in SOLAS Regulation II-1/25-8.3, and

6.2. for timber deck cargo

the limiting GM shall be varied linearly between that the deepest timber subdivisionload line and the respective timber partial load line. Where timber freeboards are notassigned the deepest and partial draughts shall relate to the summer load line.

7. For the purpose of the subdivision and damage stability calculations, thepermeabilities of each space or part of space shall be as described in SOLASRegulation II-1/25-7, however supplemented by the following for the undamagedtimber deck cargo:

Spaces Permeability

Timber cargo on deck 0.25

for both draughts.

SC161cont’d

IACS Int. 2000

▼

SC 161

8. When considering the vertical extent of damage, the upper deck may be regardedas a horizontal subdivision (in accordance with SOLAS Regulation II-1/25-6.3). Thuswhen calculating damage cases limited vertically to the upper deck with thecorresponding v-factor, the timber deck cargo may be considered to remain buoyantwith an assumed permeability of 0.25. For damage extending above the upper deckthe timber deck cargo buoyancy in way of the damage zone is to be ignored.

Footnote: Implementation date 1 January 2001

SC161cont’d

IACS Int. 2000

▼▼

SC 162

Emergency fire pumps in cargo ships- General

Chapter II-2

Regulation 4 - Fire pumps, fire mains, hydrants and hosesII-2/4.3.3.2 and 4.3.3.3

Unless the two main fire pumps, their sea suctions and the fuel supply or source ofpower for each pump are situated within compartments separated at least by A - Odivisions, so that a fire in any one compartment will not render both fire pumpsinoperable, an emergency fire pump should be fitted.

An arrangement in which one main fire pump is located in a compartment havingmore than one bulkhead or deck adjacent to the compartment containing the othermain fire pump should also require an emergency fire pump.

SC 162(Feb. 2002)

▼▼

SC 163

Emergency fire pumps in cargo ships- sea suction and sea valve

Chapter II-2

Regulation 4 - Fire pumps, fire mains, hydrants and hosesII-2/4.3.3.2 and 4.3.3.2.1

If the emergency fire pump is the main supply of water for any fixed fireextinguishing system provided to protect the space where the main fire pumps arelocated, the pump should have the capacity for this system and, in addition, thecapacity required by SOLAS Reg.II-2/4.3.3.2 and II-2/4.3.3.2.1.

SC 163(Feb. 2002)

▼▼

SC 164

Emergency fire pumps in cargo ships- priming

Chapter II-2

Regulation 4 - Fire pumps, fire mains, hydrants and hosesII-2/4.3.3.2.5

Where necessary to ensure priming, the emergency fire pump should be of the self-priming type.

SC 164(Feb. 2002)

▼▼

Electrical cables for the emergency fire pump (Reg.II-2/10.2.2.3.1.2)

Reg.II-2/10.2.2.3.1.2

2.2.3.1 Fire pumps

The arrangement of sea connections, fire pumps and their sources of power shall be as toensure that:

.1 in passenger ships of l,000 gross tonnage and upwards, in the event of a fire in any onecompartment all the fire pumps will not be put out of action; and

.2 in passenger ships of less than 1,000 gross tonnage and in cargo ships, if a fire in any onecompartment could put all the pumps out of action, there shall be an alternative meansconsisting of an emergency fire pump complying with the provisions of the Fire Safety SystemsCode with its source of power and sea connection located outside the space where the mainfire pumps or their sources of power are located.

Interpretation:

So far as is reasonably practicable the electrical cables to the emergency fire pump are not topass through the machinery spaces containing the main fire pumps and their source(s) ofpower and/or prime mover(s). Where the ship arrangements are such that the cables have topass through these spaces the cables are to be of a fire resistant type and specially protectedagainst mechanical damage, e.g. run in heavy gauge pipe.

They are to be of a fire resistant type where they pass through other high fire risk areas.

Note: This UI SC 165 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2005 .

▼

SC165(June 2002)(Rev.1May 2004)

SC 165


165-1

▼

Waste receptacles (SOLAS 2000 Amendments (MSC.99(73)), Reg.ll-2/4.4.2)

This regulation is not intended to preclude the use of containers constructed ofcombustible materials in galleys, pantries, bars, garbage handling or storage spacesand incinerator rooms provided they are intended purely for the carriage of wet waste,glass bottles and metal cans and are suitably marked.

Note: This UI SC 166 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2003. ▼

SC166(June 2002)

SC 166

IACS Int. 2002

166-1

▼

Electrical distribution boards (SOLAS 2000 Amendments (MSC.99(73)), Reg.ll-2/9)

Distribution boards may be located behind panels/linings within accommodation spacesincluding stairway enclosures, without the need to categorize the space, provided no provisionis made for storage.

If distribution boards are located in an identifiable space having a deck area of less than 4m2,this space may be categorised in (7).

Note: This UI SC 167 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from1 January 2003. ▼

SC167(June 2002)

SC 167

IACS Int. 2002

167-1

▼

▼

Hydrants for dangerous goods (SOLAS 2000 Amendments (MSC.99(73)), Reg.ll-2/19.3.1.2)

The number and position of hydrants should be such that at least two of the requiredfour jets of water, when supplied by single lengths of hose, may reach any part of thecargo space when empty; and all four jets of water, each supplied by single lengths ofhose may reach any part of ro-ro cargo spaces.


SC168(June 2002)

SC 168

IACS Int. 2002

168-1

▼

▼

Foam systems positions of aft monitors (SOLAS 2000 Amendments (MSC.99(73)), Reg.ll-2/10.8 and FSS Code Ch.14.2.3.2.3)

Port and starboard monitors required by this regulation may be located in the cargo areaas defined in Reg. II-2/3.6, provided they are aft of cargo tanks and that they protectbelow and aft of each other.


SC169(June 2002)(Corr. Feb2003)

SC 169

IACS Int. 2002/Corr. 2003

169-1

▼

▼

Low pressure CO2 systems (FSS Code Ch.5.2.2)

Where a low pressure CO2 system is fitted to comply with this regulation, the followingapplies:

1. The system control devices and the refrigerating plants should be located withinthe same room where the pressure vessels are stored.

2. The rated amount of liquid carbon dioxide should be stored in vessel(s) underthe working pressure in the range of 1.8 to 2.2 N/mm2. The normal liquid charge in thecontainer should be limited to provide sufficient vapour space to allow for expansion ofthe liquid under the maximum storage temperatures than can be obtainedcorresponding to the setting of the pressure relief valves but should not exceed 95% ofthe volumetric capacity of the container.

3. Provision should be made for:- pressure gauge;- high pressure alarm: not more than setting of the relief valve;- low pressure alarm: not less than 1.8 N/mm2;- branch pipes with stop valves for filling the vessel;- discharge pipes;- liquid CO2 level indicator, fitted on the vessel(s);- two safety valves.

4. The two safety relief valves should be arranged so that either valve can be shutoff while the other is connected to the vessel. The setting of the relief valves should notbe less than 1,1 times working pressure. The capacity of each valve should be suchthat the vapours generated under fire condition can be discharged with a pressure risenot more than 20% above the setting pressure. The discharge from the safety valvesshould be led to the open.

5. The vessel(s) and outgoing pipes permantly filled with carbon dioxide shouldhave thermal insulation preventing the operation of the safety valve in 24 hours afterde-energizing the plant, at ambient temperature of 45oC and an initial pressure equalto the starting pressure of the refrigeration unit.

6. The vessel(s) should be serviced by two automated completely independantrefrigerating units solely intended for this purpose, each comprising a compressor andthe relevant prime mover, evaporator and condenser.

7. The refrigerating capacity and the automatic control of each unit should be so asto maintain the required temperature under conditions of continuous operation during24 hours at sea temperatures up to 32oC and ambient air temperatures up to 45oC.


SC170(June 2002)

SC 170

IACS Int. 2002

170-1

8. Each electric refrigerating unit should be supplied from the main switchboardbusbars by a separate feeder.

9. Cooling water supply to the refrigerating plant (where required) should beprovided from at least two circulating pumps one of which being used as a stand-by.The stand-by pump may be a pump used for other services so long as its use forcooling would not interfere with any other essential service of the ship. Cooling watershould be taken from not less than two sea connections, preferably one port and onestarboard.

10. Safety relief devices should be provided in each section of pipe that may beisolated by block valves and in which there could be a build-up of pressure in excessof the design pressure of any of the components.

11. The piping system should be designed in such a way that the CO2 pressure atthe nozzles should not be less than 1N/mm2.

12. Audible and visual alarms should be given in a central control station when:- the pressure in the vessel(s) reaches the low and high values according to 2;- any one of the refrigerating units fails to operate;- the lowest permissible level of the liquid in the vessels is reached.

13. If the system serves more than one space, means for control of dischargequantities of CO2 should be provided, e.g automatic timer or accurate level indicatorslocated at the control position(s).

14. If a device is provided which automatically regulates the discharge of the ratedquantity of carbon dioxide into the protected spaces, it should be also possible toregulate the discharge manually.

▼

SC170(Cont d)

SC 170

IACS Int. 2002

170-2

▼

SC171

Interpretation of the term "First Survey"- Chapter II-2, Reg 1.2.2.2- Chapter V, Reg.19.1.2.2- Chapter V, Reg.19.2.4.2.2- Chapter V, Reg.20.1.2

Regulations

1. SOLAS Regulation II-2/1.2.2 reads:

Ships constructed before 1 July 2002 shall also comply with:

.1 paragraphs 3, 6.5 and 6.7 as appropriate;

.2 regulations 13.3.4.2 to 13.3.4.5, 13.4.3 and Part E, except regulations 16.3.2.2and 16.3.2.3 thereof, as appropriate, not later than the date of the first survey after 1 July 2002;

2. SOLAS Regulation V/19.1.2.2 reads:

Ships constructed before 1 July 2002 shall be fitted with the equipment or systems required in paragraph 2.1.6 not later than the first survey after 1 July 2002 at which time the radio direction-finding apparatus referred to in V/12(p) of the International Convention for the Safety of Life at Sea, 1974 in force prior to 1 July 2002 shall no longer be required.

3. SOLAS Regulation V/19.2.4 reads:

All ships of 300 gross tonnage and upwards engaged on international voyages and cargo ships of 500 gross tonnage and upwards not engaged on internationalvoyages and passenger ships irrespective of size shall be fitted with an automatic identification system (AIS), as follows:

.1 ships constructed on or after 1 July 2002;

.2 ships engaged on international voyages constructed before 1 July 2002:

.2.1 in the case of passenger ships, not later than 1 July 2003;

.2.2 in the case of tankers, not later than the first survey for safety equipment* onor after 1 July 2003;

4. SOLAS Regulation V/20.1 reads:

To assist in casualty investigations, ships, when engaged on international voyages, subject to the provisions of regulation 1.4, shall be fitted with a voyage data recorder (VDR) as follows:

.1 passenger ships constructed on or after 1 July 2002;

.2 ro-ro passenger ships constructed before 1 July 2002 not later than the first survey on or after 1 July 2002;

▼

SC171(July 2002)

171-1

SC171

Interpretation

For passenger ships, the term "first survey" relates to the first initial[1] orrenewal survey for the issue of the Passenger Ship Safety Certificate. Forships other than passenger ships, the term "first survey" relates to the firstinitial, annual or renewal survey for the issue of the Cargo Ship SafetyEquipment Certificate or any occasional survey which implies the confirmationof validity of the certificate.

[1] SOLAS Regulations I/7 and I/8, and IMO Resolution A.746(18) indicate that anInitial Survey includes all the survey work necessary to issue a certificate before theship is put in service. Therefore, a ship the keel of which is laid before 1 July 2002, butis put in service and issued a valid safety equipment or passenger safety certificateon/after 1 July 2002 (or 2003 for reg V/19.2.4) needs to comply with the regulationsreferenced above when it is put into service. Conversely, a ship which is put in serviceand issued certificates before 1 July 2002 (or 2003 for regulation V/19.2.4) has untilthe date of the first annual or the first renewal survey for safety equipment/passengersafety, whichever occurs first after 1 July 2002, (or 2003 for regulation V/19.2.4) tocomply.

Note: This UI SC 171 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 July 2002.

SC171(Cont d)

▼▼

171-2

Monitoring the concentration of hydrocarbongases in cargo pump rooms on oil tankers (Chapter II-2, Reg 4.5.10.1.3 (Res MSC.99(73))

Regulations

SOLAS Regulation II-2/4.5.10.1.3 reads:

In tankers,

.3 a system for continuous monitoring of the concentration of hydrocarbon gases shall be fitted. Sampling points or detector heads shall be locatedin suitable positions in order that potentially dangerous leakages are readily detected. When the hydrocarbon gas concentration reaches a pre-set level which shall not be higher than 10% of the lower flammable limit, a continuous audible and visual alarm signal shall be automaticallyeffected in the pump-room, engine control room, cargo control room andnavigation bridge to alert personnel to the potential hazard; and

Interpretation

1. Sequential sampling is acceptable as long as it is dedicated for the pump room only, including exhaust ducts, and the sampling time is reasonably short.

2. Suitable positions may be the exhaust ventilation duct and lower parts of the pump room above floor plates.

Note: This UI SC 172 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 July 2002.

SC172

SC172(Aug. 2002)

▼

172-1

▼

SC173

Safety Devices in Venting Systems (Reg.II-2/4.5.3.3)

Ullage openings do not include cargo tank openings that are fitted with standpipearrangements with its own manually operated shutoff valves.

Examples include the common 1" to 2" diameter standpipe arrangements that areused for sampling, monitoring or measuring of ullage/temperature/interface, oxygen,liquid and hand dipping in the cargo tank.

Note:

1. This UI is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2004.

SC173(July 2003)

IACS Int. 2003

▼

173-1

▼

SC174

A 60 Front Insulation of Tankers(Reg.II-2/9.2.4.2.5)

For the portions which face the cargo area, the A 60 standard insulation should beprovided up to the underside of the deck of the navigation bridge.

Note:1. This UI is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1

January 2004.

IACS Int. 2003

▼

174-1

SC174(July 2003)

▼

SC175

Combustible Gaskets in Ventilation DuctConnections ( Reg.II-2/9.7.1.1 )

Combustible gaskets in flanged ventilation duct connections are not permitted within600 mm of an opening in an A class or B class division and in ducts required to be of Aclass construction.

Note:


▼

SC175(July 2003)

IACS Int. 2003175-1

▼

Fixed Local Application Fire ExtinguishingSystem (Reg.II-2/10.5.6)

Any installation of nozzles on board should reflect the arrangement successfully testedin accordance with MSC/Circ.913. If a specific arrangement of the nozzles is foreseenon board, deviating from the one tested as per MSC/circ. 913, it can be acceptedprovided such arrangement additionally passes fire tests based on the scenarios ofthis circular.

The automatic release should be activated by a detection system capable of reliablyidentifying the local zones. Consideration should be given to prevent accidentalrelease.

Oil fired equipment, such as inert gas generators and thermal oil heaters should alsobe protected by this system, if located in machinery spaces above 500m3.

Boiler fronts should be interpreted as the boiler burner location irrespective of theboiler design.

Grouped visual and audible alarms, as well as indication of the activated zone, shouldbe provided in each protected space, in the engine control room and in thewheelhouse. Audible alarms may use a single tone.

Note:


2. Rev.1 is to be uniformly implemented from 1 July 2004.

▼

176-1

SC176(July 2003)(Rev.1May 2004)

SC176


▼

Lubricating Oil and other Flammable Oil System Arrangements —Retroactive Application of Regulations II-2/15.3 and 15.4 of SOLAS (2001 Edition)

SOLAS regulations II-2/15.2.10 and 15.2.11 are not intended to apply to lubricating oiland other flammable oil system arrangements on ships constructed before 1 July1998.

Note:


▼

SC177(July 2003)

SC177

IACS Int. 2003177-1

▼

Emergency Fire Pumps in Cargo Ships(FSS Code, Ch. 12, 2.2.1.3)

Withdrawn 1 April 2005

▼

SC178

SC178(July 2003)

IACS Int. 2003/Rev.1 2005 178-1

▼

SC 179

Dewatering of forward spaces of bulk carriers(Chapter XII, Regulation 13.1 (Resolution MSC 134(76)) and IMO interpretation ofSOLAS Regulation XII/13 (MSC/Circ.1069))

Regulation

SOLAS Regulation XII/13.1 reads:

1. On bulk carriers, the means for draining and pumping ballast tanks forward of thecollision bulkhead, and bilges of dry spaces any part of which extends forward of the foremost cargo hold, shall be capable of being brought into operation from a readily accessible enclosed space, the location of which is accessible from the navigation bridge or propulsion machinery control position without traversing exposed freeboard or superstructure decks. Where pipes serving such tanks or bilges pierce the collision bulkhead, as an alternative to the valve control specified in regulation II-1/11.4, valve operation by means of remotely operated actuators may be accepted, provided that the location of such valve controls complies with this regulation.

MSC/Circ. 1069 reads:

1. The spaces where availability of pumping systems is required in accordance withparagraph 1 of SOLAS regulation XII/13 should be the same watertight spaces where water level detectors are required in accordance with paragraph 1.3 of SOLAS regulation XII/12.

2. This means that paragraph 1 of regulation XII/13 does not apply to the enclosed spaces the volume of which does not exceed 0.1% of the ship’s maximum displacement volume and to the chain locker.

Interpretation

1. Where the piping arrangements for dewatering closed dry spaces are connected to the piping arrangements for the drainage of water ballast tanks, two non-returnvalves are to be provided to prevent the ingress of water into dry spaces from those intended for the carriage of water ballast. One of these non-return valves isto be fitted with shut-off isolation arrangement. The non-return valves are to be located in readily accessible positions. The shut-off isolation arrangement is to be capable of being controlled from the navigation bridge, the propulsion machinery control position or enclosed space which is readily accessible from the navigation bridge or the propulsion machinery control position without travelling exposed freeboard or superstructure decks. In this context, a position which is accessible via an under deck passage, a pipe trunk or other similar means of access is not to taken as being in the "readily accessible enclosed space".

SC179(Sept 2003)

179-1

▼

IACS Int. 2003

Note: IACS Members are to implement this UI for equipment and arrangement approvalrequests received on or after 1 October 2003. Equipment and arrangements which donot fully comply with this UI may be installed until 31 December 2003 for compliancewith SOLAS regulation XII/13.

2. Under this SOLAS regulation XII/13.1:

2.1 the valve specified under SOLAS regulation II-1/11.4 is to be capable of being controlled from the navigation bridge, the propulsion machinery control position or enclosed space which is readily accessible from the navigation bridge or the propulsion machinery control position without travelling exposed freeboard or superstructure decks. In this context, a position which is accessible via an under deck passage, a pipe trunk or other similar means of access is not to taken as being in the "readily accessible enclosed space";

2.2 the valve is not to move from the demanded position in the case of failure of the control system power or actuator power;

2.3 positive indication is to be provided at the remote control station to show that the valve is fully open or closed;

2.4 local hand powered valve operation from above the freeboard deck, as permittedunder SOLAS regulation II-1/11.4, is requested, but is not an acceptable alternative to SOLAS regulation XII/13.1 and this UI, unless all of the provisions SOLAS regulation XII/13.1 and this UI are met.

3. The dewatering arrangements are to be such that any accumulated water can bedrained directly by a pump or eductor.

4. The dewatering arrangements are to be such that when they are in operation, other systems essential for the safety of the ship including fire-fighting and bilge systems remain available and ready for immediate use. The systems for normal operation of electric power supplies, propulsion and steering should not be affected by the operation of the dewatering systems. It must also be possible to immediately start fire pumps and have a ready available supply of fire-fighting water and to be able to configure and use bilge system for any compartment when the dewatering system is in operation.

5. Bilge wells are to be provided with gratings or strainers that will prevent blockageof the dewatering system with debris.

6. The enclosures of electrical equipment for the dewatering system installed in anyof the forward dry spaces are to provide protection to IPX8 standard as defined in IEC Publication 60529 for a water head equal to the height of the space in which the electrical equipment is installed for a time duration of at least 24 hours.

SC179(cont)

SC 179

IACS Int. 2003

▼▼

179-2

Hold, ballast and dry space water level detectors(Chapter XII, Regulation 12 (ResolutionMSC.134(76)) and Performance Standards forWater Level Detectors on Bulk Carriers(Resolution MSC.145(77))

When water level detectors are installed on bulk carriers in compliance with SOLASregulation XII/12, the Performance standards annexed to IMO ResolutionMSC.145(77) adopted on 5 June 2003 are to be applied taking into account thefollowing interpretations to the paragraphs of the Performance standards hereunderreported:

3.2.3 Detection equipment should be suitably corrosion resistant for all intended cargoes.

Interpretation:

Detection equipment includes the sensor and any filter and protection arrangementsfor the detector installed in cargo holds and other spaces as required by SOLASregulation XII/12.1.

3.2.5 The part of the system which has circuitry in the cargo area, should beintrinsically safe.

Interpretation:

• In general, the construction and type testing should be in accordance with IEC Publication 60079: Electrical Equipment for Explosive Gas Atmospheres to a minimum requirement of EX(ia). Where a ship is designed only for the carriage ofcargoes that cannot create an a combustible or explosive atmosphere then the requirement for intrinsically safe circuitry will not be insisted upon provided the operational instructions included in the Manual required by 4.1 of the Appendix tothe Annex specifically exclude the carriage of cargoes that could produce a potential explosive atmosphere. Any exclusion of cargoes identified in the Annexis to be consistent with the ship’s Cargo Book and any Certification relating to the carriage of specifically identified cargoes.

• The maximum surface temperature of equipment installed within cargo spaces isto be appropriate for the combustible dusts and/or explosive gasses likely to be encountered. Where the characteristics of the dust and gases are unknown, the maximum surface temperature of equipment is not to exceed 85 deg. C.

• Where intrinsically safe equipment is installed, it is to be of a certified safe type.

• Where detector systems include intrinsically safe circuits, plans of the arrangements should be appraised/approved by individual classification societies.

SC180(Sept 2003)(Rev.1May 2004)

SC 180

180-1 IACS Int. 2003/Rev.1 2004

▼

▼

Note:IACS Members are to implement this UI and its referenced standards forequipment approval requests received on or after 1 October 2003. Equipment, forwhich equipment approval requests were received before 1 October 2003 andwhich may not fully comply with this UI and its referenced standards, may beinstalled until 31 December 2003 for compliance with SOLAS XII/12.

Rev.1 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members from 1 July 2004.

▼

3.3.2 Visual and audible alarms should conform to the Code on Alarms and Indicators, 1995 as applicable to a primary alarm for the preservation or safety of the ship.

Interpretation:

The pre-alarm, as a primary alarm, is to indicate a condition that requires promptattention to prevent an emergency condition and the main-alarm, as an emergencyalarm, is to indicate that immediate actions must be taken to prevent danger tohuman life or to the ship.

3.3.7 Requirements for malfunctions, alarms and indications should be capable of the following:A facility for continuous monitoring of the system which, on detecting a fault activates a visual and audible alarm. The audible alarm should be capable of being muted but the visual indication should remain active until the malfunction iscleared.

Interpretation:

Fault monitoring is to address all foreseeable faults associated with system thatinclude open circuit, short circuit and earth fault as well as arrangement details thatwould include loss of power supplies, excessive runtime, CPU failure, I/O unit failurefor computer based alarm/monitoring system, etc. .

3.3.8 The water level indicator should be capable of being supplied with electricalpower from two independent electrical supplies. Failure of the primary electrical powersupply should be indicated by an alarm.

Interpretation:

• The electrical power supply is to be from two separate sources, one is to be the main source of electrical power and the other is to be the emergency source, unless a continuously charged dedicated accumulator battery is fitted, having arrangement, location and endurance equivalent to that of the emergency source(18h). The battery supply may be an internal battery in the water level detector system.

• The changeover arrangement of supply from one electrical source to another need not be integrated into the water level detector system.

• Where batteries are used for the secondary power supply, failure alarms for both power supplies are to be provided.

4.1 - Footnote2

With regard to testing, reference is made to IEC 60092-504 and IEC 50529. Electricalcomponents installed in the cargo holds, ballast tanks and dry spaces should satisfythe requirements of IP 68 in accordance with IEC 60529.

▼

SC180(cont)

SC 180

180-2

▼▼

▼


Interpretation:

• IACS UR E10 may be used as an equivalent test standard to IEC 60092-504.

• The range of tests is to include the following:

For alarm/monitoring panel

- Functional tests in accordance with MSC 145(77), Performance Standards for Water Level Detectors on Bulk Carriers.

- Electrical power supply failure test.

- Power supply variation test.

- Dry heat test

- Damp heat test

- Vibration test.

- EMC tests.

- Insulation resistance test.

- High voltage test.

- Static and dynamic inclinations tests, if moving parts are contained.

For IS barrier unit if located in the wheelhouse

- In addition to the certificate issued by a competent independent testing laboratory, EMC tests are also to be carried out.

For water ingress detectors

- Functional tests in accordance with MSC 145(77), Performance Standards for Water Level Detectors on Bulk Carriers.

- Electrical power supply failure test.

- Power supply variation test.

- Dry heat test

- Damp heat test

- Vibration test.

- Enclosure class in accordance with MSC 145(77), Performance Standards for Water Level Detectors on Bulk Carriers.

- Insulation resistance test.

- High voltage test.

- Static and dynamic inclinations tests, (if the detectors contain moving parts).

SC180(cont)

SC 180

180-3

▼


APPENDIX

2.1.1 Detector equipment should provide a reliable indication of water reaching apreset level and should be type tested to demonstrate their robustness and suitabilityunder the appropriate conditions of IEC 60092-504 and the following:

Interpretation:

The test procedure should satisfy the following criteria:

• The type tests are to be witnessed by a classification society surveyor if the testsare not carried out by a competent independent test facility.

• Type tests are to be carried out on a prototype or randomly selected item(s) which are representative of the manufactured item that is being type tested.

• Type tests are to be documented (type test reports) by the manufacture and submitted for review by classification societies.

2.1.1.1 Protection of the enclosures of electrical components installed in the cargo holds, ballast tanks and dry spaces should satisfy the requirements of IP68 in accordance with IEC 60529. The water pressure testing of the enclosure should be based on a pressure head held for a period depending on the application. For detectors to be fitted in holds intended for the carriage of waterballast or ballast tanks the application head should be the hold or tank depth and the hold period should be 20 days. For detectors to be fitted in spaces intended to be dry the application should be the depth of the space and the hold period should be 24 h.

Interpretation:

• The submerged test period for electrical components intended to be installed in ballast tanks and cargo tanks used as ballast tanks is to be not less than 20 days.

• The submerged test period for electrical components intended to installed dry spaces and cargo holds not intended to be used as ballast tanks is to be not lessthan 24 hours.

• Where a detector and/or cable connecting device (e.g. junction box, etc) is installed in a space adjacent to a cargo hold (e.g. lower stool, etc.) and the spaceis considered to be flooded under damage stability calculations, the detectors and equipment are to satisfy the requirements of IP68 for a water head equal to the hold depth for a period of 20 days or 24 hours on the basis of whether or not the cargo hold is intended to be used as a ballast tank as described in the previous bullet points.

2.1.1.2 Operation in cargo/water mixture for the selected range of cargoes such as ironore dust, coal dust, grains and oils using seawater in suspension of representative fine material for each cargo. For type test purposes an agitated suspension of representative fine materials in seawater, with a concentration of50% by weight, should be used with the complete detector assembly including any filtration fitted. The functioning of the detection assembly with any filtration arrangements should be verified in the cargo/water mixture with immersion repeated ten times without cleaning any filtration arrangements.

▼

SC 180

SC180(cont)

180-4

▼▼


Interpretation:

• The type test required for the sensor is to be in accordance with the following:

- The test container for the cargo/water mixture is to be dimensioned so that its height and volume are such that the sensor and any filtration fitted can be totally submerged for the repeated functionality tests required by 2.1.1.2 and the static and dynamic inclination tests identified in the previous interpretation.

- The sensor and any filtration fitted that are to be submerged and are to be arranged in the container as they would be installed in accordance with the installation instructions required by 4.4.

- The pressure in the container for testing the complete detector is to be not more than 0.2 bar at the sensor and any filter arrangement. The pressure may be realised by pressurisation or by using a container of sufficient height.

- The cargo/water mixture is to be pumped into the test container and suitable agitation of the mixture provided to keep the solids in suspension. The effect ofpumping the cargo/water mixture into the container is not to affect the operationof the sensor and filter arrangements.

- The cargo/water mixture is to be pumped into the test container to a predetermined level that submerges the detector and the operation of the alarmobserved.

- The test container is then to be drained and the de-activation of the alarmcondition observed.

- The test container and sensor with any filter arrangement should be allowed to dry without physical intervention.

- The test procedure is to be repeated consecutively ten times without cleaning any filter arrangement that may be fitted in accordance with the manufacturer’sinstallation instructions. See also 2.1.1.2

- Satisfactory alarm activation and de-activation at each of the ten consecutive tests will demonstrate satisfactory type testing.

• The cargo/water mixture used for type testing are to be representative of the range of cargoes within the following groups and is to include the cargo with the smallest particles expected to be found from a typical representative sample.

- Iron ore particles and seawater.

- Coal particles and sea water.

- Grain particles and seawater.

- Aggregate (sand) particles and sea water.

The smallest and largest particle size together with the density of the dry mixture is to be ascertained and recorded. The particles are to be evenly distributed throughout the mixture. Type testing with representative particles will in general qualify all types of cargoes within the four groupings shown above.

The following provides guidance on the selection of particles for testing purposes: ▼

SC180(cont)

SC 180

180-5 IACS Int. 2003/Rev.1 2004

- Iron ore particles should mainly consist of small loose screenings of iron ore - and not lumps of ore (dust with particle size < 0.1 mm).

- Coal particles should mainly consist of small loose screenings of coal and not lumps of coal (dust with particle size < 0.1 mm).

- Grain particles should mainly consist of small loose grains of free flowing grain (grain having a size > 3mm, such as wheat).

- Aggregate particles should mainly consist of small loose grains of free flowing sand and without lumps (dust with particle size < 0.1 mm).

2.2.1 The sensors should be located in a protected position that is in communicationwith the aft part of the cargo hold such that the position of the sensor detects the levelthat is representative of the levels in the actual hold space. These sensors should belocated:

.1 either as close to the centreline as practible, or

.2 at both the port and starboard sides of the cargo hold.

Interpretation:

For ships having keel laid on or after 1 July 2004, if sensors are not placed within adistance less than or equal to 1 corrugation space or 1 bulkhead vertical stiffenerspace from the centreline, sensors are to be located at both the port and starboardsides of the cargo hold.

For ships having keel laid before 1 July 2004, if sensors are not placed within adistance less than or equal to B/6 from the centreline, sensors are to be located atboth the port and starboard sides of the cargo hold.

3.1.1 Alarm systems should be type tested in accordance with IEC 60092-504, asappropriate.

Interpretation:

The test procedure should satisfy the following criteria:

• The type tests are to be witnessed by a classification society surveyor if the testsare not carried out by a competent independent test facility.

• Type tests are to be carried out on a prototype or randomly selected item(s) which are representative of the manufactured item that is being type tested.

• Type tests are to be documented (type test reports) by the manufacture and submitted for review by classification societies.

4 MANUALS

Manuals should be provided on board and should contain the following information andoperational instructions:

Interpretation:

For each ship, a copy of the manual is to be made available to the surveyor at least 24hours prior to survey of the water level detection installation. Each classificationsociety is to ensure that any plans required for classification purposes have beenappraised/approved as appropriate. ▼

▼▼

SC180(cont)

SC 180

▼

180-6

▼


UI SC 181 BRIDGE DESIGN, EQUIPMENT ARRANGEMENT AND PROCEDURES

SOLAS Chapter V, Regulation 15 SOLAS V/15 reads: “Principles relating to bridge design, design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment and bridge procedures” All decisions which are made for the purpose of applying the requirements of regulations 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28 and which affect bridge design, the design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment on the bridge and bridge procedures* shall be taken with the aim of: .1 facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions; .2 promoting effective and safe bridge resource management; .3 enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential information which is presented in a clear and unambiguous manner, using standardized symbols and coding systems for controls and displays; .4 indicating the operational status of automated functions and integrated components, systems and/or sub-systems; .5 allowing for expeditious, continuous and effective information processing and decision-making by the bridge team and the pilot; .6 preventing or minimizing excessive or unnecessary work and any condition or distraction on the bridge which may cause fatigue or interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team and the pilot; .7 minimizing the risk of human error and detecting such error, if it occurs, through monitoring and alarm systems, in time for the bridge team and the pilot to take appropriate action.

* Refer to the Guidelines on ergonomic criteria for bridge equipment and layout (MSC/Circ.982) and the

Performance standards for IBS (resolution MSC.64(67), annex 1) and for INS (resolution MSC.86(70), annex 3). Interpretation The unified interpretation for application of SOLAS V/15 is in the following presented as a complete standard for compliance with the aims of this regulation when applying the applicable requirements of the regulations addressed by regulation 15. Appendix (1), containing 3 annexes, gives clarifications and considerations serving as a platform for the standard.1

Note: 1) This UI is to be uniformly applied by IACS Members and Associates to ships contacted for construction on or after 1 January 2005. However, as UI SC181 was to be reviewed for further clarifications to external comments received, IACS Council decided to postpone the implementation date to 1 January 2006 on 13 November 2004. 2) The “contracted for construction” date means the date on which the contract to build the vessel is signed between the prospective owner and the shipbuilder. For further details regarding the date of “contract for construction”, refer to IACS Procedural Requirement (PR) No.29.

IACS UI of SOLAS V/15 Rule standard for Bridge Design, Equipment Arrangement and Procedures - BDEAP

IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 2

IACS Unified Interpretation (UI)

for

application of SOLAS V/15

Rule standard for

Bridge Design, Equipment Arrangement and Procedures (BDEAP)

.

(Feb 2004) (Corr.1 March 2004) (Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004)



Foreword

This IACS unified interpretation (UI) for Bridge Design, Equipment, Arrangement and Procedures (BDEAP) sets forth a set of requirements for compliance with the principles and aims of SOLAS Regulation V/15 relating to bridge design, design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment and bridge procedures when applying the requirements of Regulations 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28. The text also includes guidance notes that are recommendations on how the requirements may be met by acceptable technical solutions; they are to be considered examples only and do not in any way exclude alternative solutions that may fulfill the purpose of the requirements. To arrive at a set of requirements to be used for approval of “SOLAS V/15 bridges” for flag administrations, the IACS UI has been based on IMO instruments and standards already accepted and referred to by IMO. The platform for the UI is:

• the aims specified in regulation 15 for application of regulations 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28; • the content of regulations19, 22, 24, 25, 27, 28; • applicable parts of MSC/Circ.982, “Guidelines on ergonomic criteria for bridge equipment and

layout”; • applicable parts of IMO resolutions and performance standards referred to in SOLAS; • applicable parts of ISO and IEC standards referred to for information in MSC/Circ.982; • ISM Code; • STCW Code.

The IACS UI is developed to serve as a self-contained document for the understanding and application of the requirements, supported by annexes relevant for this purpose. The diagram following this foreword gives an overview of approach and content.



Primary functions - Tasks - Workplaces

B. Bridge design

Additional functions

A. Scope and structure

C 2 Bridge alarm management

C 1 Design and quality of systems and equipment

C. Design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment

C 3 Equipment arrangement

D. Bridge procedures

D 1 Bridge team management

D 2 Procedures related to Regulations 24, 25, 27, 28

B 4 Bridge passageways

B 2 Range of workstations

B 6 Bridge visibility and window arrangement

B 3 Working environment

Ope ra t iona l cond itions

Safe Navigation Avoiding: - grounding - collision - weather damage Reducing: - failure effects Assisting: - ships in distress

Navigation Traffic surveillance Manoeuvring Communication Manual steering Safety operations Docking

Plan route Follow route - positioning in chart - adjusting course Detect dangers to navigation Deviate to avoid collision Return to route Alter route plan to avoid heavy weather Monitor ship’s safety state Receive/send distress message Organize safety operations Manoeuvre in harbours Berth ship

B 1 Functions, tasks and means

B 5 Workstation arrangement and fields of vision

B 7 Workstation layout, consoles and chair arrangement

SOLAS V Regulation 15

Regulations 19, 22,

24, 25, 27, 28

Additional workstations

IMO Resolutions

and circulars

ISO - IEC Standards

IMO MSC/C/irc.982

Company bridge procedures Ship specific bridge procedures STCW Code



A. General ...................................................................................................................................7

A 1 Scope and approach.............................................................................................................7

A 2 Structure and application.....................................................................................................8

A 3. Normative references ..........................................................................................................8

A 4. Informative references.........................................................................................................9

A 5. Definitions...........................................................................................................................9

A 6. Documentation to be submitted by the ship builder for approval .....................................11

A 7. Documentation to be submitted by the ship builder for information ................................12

A 8 Documentation to be submitted by the ship owners for approval.....................................12

A 9 Documentation to be submitted by the ship owners for information................................12

A 10 On board tests....................................................................................................................13

B. Bridge design .......................................................................................................................13

B 1 Functions, tasks and means ...............................................................................................13

B 2 Type and range of workstations ........................................................................................16

B 3 Working environment .......................................................................................................17

B 4 Bridge passageways ..........................................................................................................19

B 5 Workstation arrangements and required fields of vision ..................................................20

B 6 Fields of vision and bridge window arrangement .............................................................24

B 7 Workstation layout, consoles and chair arrangement........................................................26

C. Design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment .................................29

C 1 Design and quality of navigational systems and equipment .............................................30

C 2 Bridge alarm management ................................................................................................30

C 3 Arrangement of navigational systems and equipment ......................................................33

D. Bridge procedures ..................................................................................................................38

D 1 Bridge team management..................................................................................................38

D 2 Procedures related to regulation 24, 25, 27 and 28 ...........................................................39



Appendix 1 Application of Regulation 15 – Clarifications and considerations ................39

Annex 1 of Appendix 1 The aims of Regulation 15 .................................................................39

Annex 2 of Appendix 1 Documents referred to and regulations addressed by regulation 15...39

Annex 3 of Appendix 1 Regulation 22 – Harmonization with MSC/Circ.982 ..........................39

Appendix 2 Examples of location of main equipment on the bridge .................................39



A. General A 1 Scope and approach This standard for bridge design, equipment arrangement and procedures (BDEAP) is compiled and developed to present a set of requirements covering the principles and aims of SOLAS V Regulation 15, when applying the requirements of regulations:

19 “Carriage requirements for shipborne navigational systems and equipment” 22 “Navigation bridge visibility” 24 “Use of heading and/or track control systems” 25 “Operation of steering gear” 27 “Nautical charts and nautical publications” 28 “Records of navigational activities”

taking regulations 18 and 20 into consideration. The requirements of these regulations affecting bridge design, design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment on the bridge and bridge procedures, are harmonized with related guidelines of MSC/Circ.982 and relevant ISO and IEC standards for application of the regulations in accordance with the aim of:

.1 facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions; .2 promoting effective and safe bridge resource management; .3 enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential information which is presented in a clear and unambiguous manner, using standardized symbols and coding systems for controls and displays; .4 indicating the operational status of automated functions and integrated components, systems and/or sub-systems; .5 allowing for expeditious, continuous and effective information processing and decision-making by the bridge team and the pilot; .6 preventing or minimizing excessive or unnecessary work and any condition or distraction on the bridge which may cause fatigue or interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team and the pilot; .7 minimizing the risk of human error and detecting such error if it occurs through monitoring and alarm systems, in time for the bridge team and the pilot to take appropriate action.

Note: See Appendix 1, Application of Regulation 15 - Clarifications and considerations



A 2 Structure and application A 2.1 UI SC 181 BDEAP is structured to reflect the areas and aims addressed by regulation 15. A 2.1.1 Requirements The requirements cover the original IMO regulations and applicable parts of MSC/Circ.982, enabling the standard to be used as a stand-alone document for the purpose of approval work, and are organized within the areas of:

Bridge design Design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment Bridge procedures

A 2.1.2 Guidance note Guidance notes as to how the requirements may be met by acceptable technical solutions or other remedies are given when applicable. A guidance note given does not in any way exclude alternative solutions that may fulfil the purpose and intention of the requirement providing other requirements and the overall bridge functionality are not adversely affected. A 2.1.3 Annexes There are two appendices attached to the BDEAP standard. Appendix 1 contains three individual annexes for clarification and consideration of:

• the content of regulation 15 • the documents referred to by regulation 15 and the regulations to be applied, cross referencing the

individual aims of regulation 15 and the regulations affected. • the effect of MSC/Circ.982 on the requirements of regulation 22 “Bridge navigation visibility” by

comparison and harmonization of content. Appendix 2 contains examples of location of main equipment on the bridge. A 2.2 The content of the main document is structured with the aim of enabling it to serve as a rational check list through the different levels of the approval process. A 2.4 Approval in accordance with IACS BDEAP proves compliance with SOLAS V Regulation 15 when applying regulations 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28 at the time of delivery of the newbuilding. Verification of compliance with Regulations 19 and 22 addressing technical requirements for equipment and design, includes verification of the ability of the bridge design, layout and equipment arrangement to promote effective and safe bridge resource management. Procedures established for bridge resource management and for purposes specified in regulations 24, 25, 27 and 28 are to be verified in accordance with the ISM Code prior to delivery of the ship and becoming part of the ship’s safety management system and included in the ISM certification. A 3. Normative references - Applicable parts of MSC/Circ.982 - Guidelines on ergonomic criteria for bridge equipment and

layout - MSC/Circ.603 - Guidelines on display sizes and techniques for navigational purposes - IMO A.694(17) - General requirements for shipborne radio equipment forming part of the global

maritime distress and safety system and for electronic navigational aids - IMO A 830(19) - Code on alarms and indicators



A 4. Informative references A. 4.1 ISO and IEC standards referred to in MSC/Circ.982 for relevant additional information:

• ISO 8468, Ship’s bridge layout and associated equipment – Requirements and guidelines

• ISO 14612, Additional requirements and guidelines for centralized and integrated functions

• IEC 60945, Maritime navigation and radio communication equipment and systems - General requirements - Methods of testing and required test results

• IEC 61174, Electronic Chart Display and Information System (ECDIS) - Operational and performance requirements, methods of testing and required test results

A.4.2 ISM Code A.4.3 Company and Ship Specific Bridge Procedures Manual A 4.4 STCW 1978, as amended A 5. Definitions For the purpose of this document: A 5.1 Alarm: An alarm or alarm system which announces by audible and visual means a condition requiring attention.

A 5.1.1 Accept: Manual silencing of an audible alarm.

A 5.1.2 Acknowledge: Action for silencing of audible alarm and bringing visual alarm to steady state

A 5.1.3 Cancel: Manual stopping of a visual alarm after the cause has been eliminated. A 5.2 Bridge: The area from which the navigation and control of the ship is exercised, including the wheelhouse and bridge wings. A 5.2.1 Bridge wings: Those parts of the bridge on both sides of the ship’s wheelhouse which, in general, extend to the ship’s side. A 5.2.2 Navigating bridge: Area of a wheelhouse or enclosed bridge allocated navigating functions and control of the ship, and which includes any additional bridge workstation to be used by the officer of the watch. A 5.2.3 Totally enclosed bridge: A bridge without open bridge wings, meaning that bridge wings form an integral part of an enclosed wheelhouse. A 5.2.4 Wheelhouse: Enclosed area of the bridge. A 5.3 Bridge functions: Functions comprising tasks related to operation of the ship and carried out on the bridge. A 5.3.1 Primary bridge functions: Functions related to determination, execution and maintenance of safe course, speed and position of the ship in relation to the waters, traffic and weather conditions.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 10

Such functions are: - route planning functions - navigation functions - collision avoidance functions - manoeuvring functions - docking functions - monitoring of safety systems - external and internal communication related to safety in bridge operations including distress

situations - pilotage functions A 5.3.2 Additional bridge functions: Functions related to ship operations which are to be carried out on the bridge in addition to primary functions, but not necessarily by the watch officer. Examples of such functions are: − extended communication functions − monitoring and control of ballasting and cargo operations − monitoring and control of machinery − monitoring and control of domestic systems A 5.4 Close to: Within functional reach (inside the wheelhouse). A 5.5 Collision avoidance functions: Detection and plotting of other ships and moving objects; determination and execution of course and speed deviations to avoid collision. A 5.6 Commanding view: View without obstructions which could interfere with the navigator’s ability to perform his main tasks, covering at least the field of vision required for safe performance of collision avoidance functions (225°). A 5.7 Conning station or position: Place in the wheelhouse with a commanding view, providing the necessary information for conning and which is used by navigators, including pilots, when monitoring and directing the ship’s movements. A 5.8 Docking: Manoeuvring the ship alongside a berth while controlling mooring operations. A 5.9 Manoeuvring: Operation of steering systems and propulsion machinery as required to move the ship into predetermined directions, positions or tracks. A 5.10 Monitoring: Act of constantly checking information from instrument displays and environment in order to detect any irregularities. A 5.11 Navigation: Planning of the ship’s route and determination of position and course of the ship, execution of course alterations and speed changes. A 5.12 Operating conditions: A 5.12.1 Normal operating conditions: When all shipboard systems and equipment related to primary bridge functions operate within design limits, and weather conditions or traffic do not cause excessive operator workloads. A 5.12.2 Irregular operating conditions: When external conditions cause excessive operator workloads.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 11

A 5.12.3 Abnormal operating conditions: When malfunction of technical system requires operation of backup systems on the bridge, or when it occurs during an irregular operating condition, or when the officer of the watch becomes unfit to perform his duties and has not yet been replaced by another qualified officer. A 5.12.4 Emergency situations: When incidents seriously affect internal operating conditions of the ship and the ability to maintain safe course and speed (fire, ship system technical failure, structural damage). A 5.12.5 Distress situations: Loss of propulsion and/or steering, or when the ship is not seaworthy due to other reasons (situation prior to abandon ship situation). A 5.13 Waters A 5.13.1 Ocean areas: Waters that encompass navigation beyond the outer limits of coastal waters. Ocean areas do not restrict the freedom of course setting in any direction for a distance equivalent to 30 minutes of sailing with the relevant ship speed. A 5.13.2 Coastal waters: Waters that encompass navigation along a coast at a distance less than the equivalence of 30 minutes of sailing with the relevant ship speed. The other side of the course line allows freedom of course setting in any direction for a distance equivalent to at least 30 minutes of sailing with the relevant speed. A 5.13.3 Narrow waters: Waters that do not allow the freedom of course setting to any side of the course line for a distance equivalent to 30 minutes of sailing with the relevant ship speed. A 5.14 Route planning: Pre-determination of course lines, radius turns and speed in relation to the waters to be navigated. A 5.15 Workstation: A workplace at which one or several tasks constituting a particular activity are carried out, and which provides the information and equipment required for safe performance of the tasks. A 5.16 Workstation for monitoring: A workstation facilitating equipment and a commanding view for observation of the ship’s heading and speed, the waters and traffic, incorporating means as required for positioning of the ship, and if located close to the front windows may serve as conning station for the master and a pilot carrying out control and advisory functions. A 5.17 Workstation for navigating and manoeuvring: A workstation with commanding view used by navigators when carrying out navigation, route monitoring, traffic surveillance and manoeuvring functions, and which enables monitoring of the safety state of the ship. A 5.18 Workstation for radio communication: A workplace for operation and control of equipment for Global Maritime Distress and Safety System (GMDSS), and shipboard communication for ship operations. A 5.19 Workstation for safety operations: A workplace dedicated organisation and control of internal emergency and distress operations, and which provides easy access to information related to the safety state of the ship. A 6. Documentation to be submitted by the ship builder for approval A 6.1 Fields of vision drawings showing:


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 12

a) The horizontal field of vision from the various workstations, including the arc of individual blind sectors and the sum of blind sectors forward of the beam. b) The vertical field of vision over the bow from the conning station and the workstation for navigation and manoeuvring, including the line of sight under the upper edge of the window from standing working position at the workstation. c) Window arrangement, including inclination, dimensions, framing and height of lower and upper edge above bridge deck surface as well as the height of the deckhead.

A 6.2 Bridge layout drawings showing:

a) The bridge layout, including the configuration and location of all bridge workstations, including workstations for additional bridge functions. (See also A 7.1) b) Configuration and dimensions of workstation consoles including console foundations.

A 6.3 Equipment location drawings showing: a) Location of instruments and equipment in all workstation consoles. b) Location of equipment located elsewhere on the bridge. (See also A 7.1)

A 6.4 List of equipment showing:

All relevant bridge equipment with specification of type, model, manufacturer, supplier and type approval reference with extension date or copy of valid certificates, when applicable.

A 7. Documentation to be submitted by the ship builder for information A 7.1 Manuals or instructions for equipment installed for the use of bridge personnel shall be submitted for information upon request. A 8 Documentation to be submitted by the ship owners for approval A 8.1 Ship specific bridge procedures covering:

- the use of the heading and/or track control system, operation of steering gear, updating of nautical charts and recording of navigational activities proving compliance with regulations 24, 25, 27 and 28

A.8.2 Item 8.1 to be included in the ship’s management plan for ISM certification. A 9 Documentation to be submitted by the ship owners for information A 9.1 If navigational functions and bridge team management are to be carried out or organized other than as indicated in this standard (see chapter B1 and D1), documentation describing the differences and operational procedures shall be submitted in conjunction with relevant drawings of bridge layout and equipment location submitted by the ship builder for approval. (See A5.2, A5.3) A 9.2 Description of functions to be performed at workstations which are additional to workstations for primary bridge functions shall be submitted.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 13

A9.3 Ship specific bridge procedures covering:

- distribution of bridge functions and tasks (see B1) - manning and training requirements on the bridge at identified operating conditions taking into account the requirements in B1

Note: Item 9.3 is to be included in the ship’s safety management system (SMS) under the ISM code. A 10 On board tests A 10.1 A program for the on board testing of the bridge equipment and systems required to be carried, as well as additional navigation equipment installed, shall be submitted for approval at the earliest possible stage before sea trials. A 10.2 Equipment and systems shall be subject to the tests required to ascertain that all controls, indicators, displays, etc., operate in accordance with their specifications and meet IMO requirements. A 10.3 Failure conditions shall be simulated on equipment and systems. B. Bridge design

The bridge shall be designed and arranged with the aim of:

- facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of

the situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions - promoting effective and safe bridge resource management - allowing for expeditious, continuous and effective information processing and decision-making

by the bridge team and the pilot - preventing or minimizing excessive or unnecessary work and any condition or distraction on the

bridge which may cause fatigue or interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team and the pilot Ref. SOLAS V/15.1, 15.2, 15.5, 15.6

The design of bridges is governed by:

- the functions and related tasks to be carried out on the bridge, systems used and methods of task performance

- the range, layout and location of workstations required for performance of bridge functions - the fields of vision required for visual observations from each of the workstations - composition of the bridge team and the procedures required for safe operations under all

identified conditions - the type and range of equipment to be provided for performance of the tasks at the individual

workstations and elsewhere on the bridge

Design requirements are related to application of regulations 19 and 22. B 1 Functions, tasks and means The table shows the main bridge functions and tasks to be carried out on the bridge. The types of approved equipment that are related to the performance of different tasks are indicated. The list may serve as basis for outfitting of workstations. The type of equipment installed on the individual bridge, the


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 14

system configurations and automation level may affect the method of navigation, operational procedures and qualification levels. It is regarded as the responsibility of the owners and users that procedures, knowledge and training of the bridge personnel are related to the individual ship’s bridge system, including the task and means defined below, for safe and efficient task performance. Such issues shall be documented in the Company and Ship specific bridge procedures manual and documented in the ISM Code procedures manual for the vessel. (See A 8.1, A 8.2)

Tasks and means Tasks

to be performed Equipment

to be operated Information to be viewed

Remarks

Navigation – Grounding avoidance

Planning Paper chart/table Nautical publications GNSS

Plan route prior to departure Alter route while under way

ECDIS* ECDIS backup**

*Optional installation **If replacing paper

In Transit Monitor route-keeping: - Determine position by bearings - Read position on display - Plot position

Pelorus/gyro repeater* Radar GNSS Paper chart/table

*Analogue Bearings 360˚ around the horizon, (one on each bridge wing)

- Determine and plot position automatic

ECDIS

Optional installation

Maintain route/alter course by - manual steering - using autopilot - automatic route-keeping

Manual steering control Heading control system Track control system* (ECDIS)

*Alternative to heading control Interfaced to ECDIS, gyro, speed, radar when part of INS

Give sound signals Whistle control Fog – traffic Receive sound signals Sound reception system Loudspeakers Totally enclosed bridge Monitor/Take action: - operational warnings - system failure alarms

Alarm panel

- ship’s safety state Alarm systems Monitor heading, turn, rudder angle, speed, propulsion

Gyro repeater Indicators: - rudder angle - rate-of-turn - RPM, Pitch - speed log

Adjust lighting Dimmer buttons Monitor shallow water areas Echo Sounder system Water depth (Anchoring) Monitor performance automatic route-keeping system

Conning info display

Organizing indicator info providing situation awareness when in automatic route-keeping mode

Effect internal communication Intercom (auto telephone) Effect external communication VHF Related to navigation Receive/send distress message GMDSS equipment or remote

control


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 15




Remarks

Traffic surveillance - Collision avoidance

Detect floating targets Analyse traffic situations Observe visually Decide on collision avoidance measures

Radar with ETP* (may incl. AIS) Binoculars Window wiper -cleaning - heating control AIS (automatic identification system)

Targets’ relative position, course, speed. Expected passing distance Time Target true position, course, speed

*Electronic target plotting (“historical” data) Regarded additional info (means)

Manoeuvring (For route-keeping) Change steering mode Steering mode switch Alter heading Heading control Heading (Gyro) Observe rudder angle Rudder angle Override steering Override control Manual steering control Change speed Propulsion control RPM/Pitch Give sound signals Whistle control Receive sound signals Sound reception system Loudspeaker Totally enclosed bridges

Paper chart/table GNSS

Radar with route and navigable waters

Navigate back to route Maintain track of traffic

ECDIS* *May replace paper Harbour manoeuvring Thruster Optional Anchoring Manoeuvre Positioning (Identify anchor position)

Manual steering control Propulsion control (Thruster control.) Radar Chart GNSS

Heading Rudder angle RPM/Pitch Water depth

Performed at front workstations or in combination with docking station Information to be provided for pilots

Observe ship’s safety state Monitor alarm conditions: - Navigation alarms Equip. & system failures Operational warnings

Main alarm panel W/indicators and acceptance button

Alarm list

See chapter C 2

- Machinery alarms Alarm panel - Cargo alarms Alarm panel - Fire alarm Fire alarm panel Manual steering (Rating) Maintain, adjust, alter heading according to order

Steering control Intercom (Command)

Gyro repeater Magnetic comp. Rudder angle Rate-of-turn

Tasks and means

Tasks to be performed

Equipment to be operated

Information to be viewed

Remarks

Conning functions Determine & direct course and speed in relation to waters and traffic

Monitor: - heading Gyro repeater May be digital - rudder angle Rudder angle - rate-of-turn RoT indicator - propulsion RPM/Pitch


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 16




Remarks

- speed Speed log - water depth Echo sounder

display Anchoring

Give sound signals Whistle control button Effect communication VHF Available




Remarks

Safety operations Take action on alarm condition: - analyse situation - consult plans and drawings

Manuals – Drawings – (PC)

May be computer based info

- observe ship’s external operational situation

Cooperation with navigating officer

- organize and execute measures by communication - check status of ventilation system

Intercom (UHF) Emergency stop

Monitor development of alarm conditions

Alarm panel/screen

- Cargo alarms Alarm panel - Fire detection & alarms Fire detection and alarm

panel

- Gas & smoke detection External communication Distress - weather - safety GMDSS equipment As required (Area) Determine weather conditions Consider navigation warnings

Navtex receiver

Public correspondence Additional equipment Specified by owners Docking operations (bridge wings)

Directing steering Intercom (command) Heading Rudder angle

Directing speed Intercom (command) RPM/Pitch Giving sound signals Whistle control button Receiving sound signals Sound reception system Loudspeaker Totally enclosed bridge Perform manoeuvring Steering

Propulsion control Thruster control

Additional installation by owners

Additional functions See Chapter B 2

B 2 Type and range of workstations The ship’s navigation bridge shall not be used for purposes other than navigation, communications and other functions essential to the safe operation of the ship, its engines and cargo, and workplaces shall be arranged with the aim of: - facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the

situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions - promoting effective and safe bridge resource management Ref. SOLAS V/15.1, 15.2


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 17

B 2.1 Individual workstations for performance of primary bridge functions including conning position for pilotage shall be provided for:

- navigating and manoeuvring (and traffic surveillance) - monitoring - manual steering - docking on bridge wings - planning (of voyage, routes, ship operations) - safety (monitoring and emergency operations) - communication (GMDSS) - conning (pilot)*

*See also Guidance note of B 5.11 Guidance note: The workstation for monitoring may be combined with: − a workplace for navigation (route monitoring /position-fixing) when the workstation for navigation and

manoeuvring provides individual workplaces for traffic surveillance and navigation (chart work); − a backup workstation for navigation and a conning position when electronic chart display and information

system (ECDIS) is installed, enabling navigation, traffic surveillance and manoeuvring at one workplace. B 2.2 Additional workstations may be arranged for performance of other functions than those related to primary bridge functions when relevant. Guidance note: The main types of additional bridge workstations may be divided into three distinct categories based on purpose and functions and whether they are to be operated by the watch officer or not: A and B.

A. Workstations for functions regarded related to operation of the ship, its engines and cargo:

a) to be monitored and controlled by the watch officer b) to be used by other personnel than the watch officer

B. Workstations for functions not regarded essential to safe operation of the ship and to be used by other

personnel than the watch officer, but located on the bridge for practical reasons. The type of tasks to be performed at the individual workstation and the operating procedures employed may conclude whether a workstation of category A should be of type a) or b). Workstations of category A, type a) should not include tasks that may prevent the officer in charge of primary bridge functions to leave a workstation for additional functions instantly at any time during operations. See clauses B 5.13 – 5.15 B 3 Working environment The bridge shall be designed and arranged with the aim of:

- preventing or minimizing excessive or unnecessary work and any condition or distraction on the

bridge which may cause fatigue or interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team and the pilot Ref. SOLAS V/15.6


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 18

Internal environmental conditions on the bridge that may affect human performance are:

- temperature - humidity - ventilation - noise - vibration - illumination and type of lighting - glare and reflection - interior colours - occupational safety

B 3.1 The enclosed bridge or wheelhouse shall be equipped with an air conditioning or ventilation system for regulation of temperature and humidity. Guidance note: It should be possible to maintain a temperature which is not less than 18˚ C in cold climates and does not exceed 27˚C in tropical climates, and to maintain the relative air humidity in the range of 20% – 60%, preferably maintaining 45% humidity at 21˚C and not less than 20% at any temperature. B 3.2 Ventilation system with suitable air flow velocity and rate of air circulation shall be provided. Direction of air flow from air conditioning and heating systems towards workplaces shall be avoided. Guidance note: The preferred air velocity is 0,3 m/s and should not exceed 0,5 m/s. The recommended rate of air circulation for enclosed spaces is 6 complete changes per hour. B 3.3 Excessive levels of noise interfering with voice communication, causing fatigue and degrading overall system reliability, shall be avoided. Guidance note: The sound level measured 1 m from the outlets of air distribution systems should not exceed 55 dB(A). Noise levels produced by individual bridge equipment should not exceed 60 dB(A) at 1 m. B 3.4 Vibrations when the ship is at normal transit speeds shall not affect the reading of indicators or the comfort of personnel. B 3.5 Lighting arranged for adjustment of illumination and direction of light shall be provided at all workplaces. The illumination brightness shall be sufficient for safe performance of the tasks and possible to dim down to zero. B 3.6 Lighting that may be required for continuous operations during darkness and in entrances to the bridge shall be red with adjustable brightness to suit the operations and ease visual adaptation to darkness. B 3.7 It shall be possible to dim equipment displays and indicators providing information to individual workstations and red lighting covering the workstation area, at the workstation in use. B 3.8 Light sources shall be arranged and located in a way that prevents glare, stray image and mirror effects in bridge windows and deckhead areas above workstations. Guidance note: Deckhead areas above workstations should have a dark colour of matt, anti-gloss type minimizing light reflection. The colour of bridge bulkheads should have a calm and matt appearance.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 19

B 3.9 To reduce the risk of personnel injury during bridge operations,

- the wheelhouse floor, bridge wings and upper bridge decks shall have non-slip surfaces - hand- or grab-rails shall be installed as required at workstations, passageways and entrances, enabling

personnel to move and stand safely when the ship is rolling and pitching in heavy weather - chair deck rails installed at workstations shall be provided with anti-trip skirting board or be flush

mounted - stairway openings shall be protected if not sufficiently lit or otherwise indicated during darkness B 3.10 Personnel safety equipment to be stored on the bridge shall be clearly marked and easily accessible. B 4 Bridge passageways Bridge passageways shall facilitate the expected movement of the bridge team between individual workstations, bridge entrances, exits and windows in carrying out the bridge tasks safely and effectively including the maintenance of equipment. B 4.1 A clear route across the wheelhouse, from bridge wing to bridge wing for two persons to pass each other, shall be provided. Guidance note: The width of the passageway should be 1200 mm and not less than 700 mm at any single point of obstruction. B 4.2 The distance between separate workstation areas shall be sufficient to allow unobstructed passage for persons not working at the stations. Guidance note: The width of such passageways should not be less than 700 mm, including persons sitting or standing at their workstations. B 4.3 The distance from the bridge front bulkhead, or from any console and installation placed against the front bulkhead to any console or installation placed away from the bridge front, shall be sufficient for one person to pass a stationary person. Guidance note: Where there is a passageway between the front bulkhead and front workstation consoles, its width should preferably be 1000 mm and not be less than 800 mm. When the front workstation is placed against the front bulkhead, the guidelines of B 4.2 may be applicable, or B 4.1 if there is a passageway providing a clear route from bridge wing to bridge wing aft of the workstation. B 4.4 The distance between bridge wing consoles and bulkheads shall be as little as possible for easy operation of controls from both a position behind and beside the console giving optimum view of the ship’s side and the mooring operations, but wide enough for one person to pass the console. Guidance note: The width of the passageway should be 600 mm. Note: The Panama Canal Commission (PCC) requires that a minimum of 1 metre clearance from consoles or obstructions shall be provided from the forward to aft portions of the bridge wing ends. Special requests for relaxation of this requirement may be considered on a case-by-case basis.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 20

B 4.5 The clear deckhead height in the wheelhouse shall take into account the installation of deckhead panels and instruments as well as the height of door openings required for easy entrance to the wheelhouse. The following clear heights for unobstructed passage shall be provided:

a) The clear height between the bridge deck surface covering and the underside of the deck head covering shall be at least 2250 mm. b) The lower edge of deck head-mounted equipment in open areas and passageways, as well as the upper edge of door openings to bridge wings and other open deck areas shall be at least 2100 mm above the deck. c) The height of entrances and doors to the wheelhouse from adjacent passageways shall not be less than 2000 mm.

B 5 Workstation arrangements and required fields of vision The workstations for primary bridge functions shall be arranged to serve their functions under all operating conditions and different manning of the bridge and provide the fields of vision required for visual observations and easy cooperation between bridge personnel, promoting effective and safe bridge resource management. B 5.1 Workstations for navigating and manoeuvring, including traffic surveillance and monitoring shall be arranged within an area spacious enough for two persons to carry out the tasks in close cooperation, but sufficiently close together to enable the watch officer to control and safely carry out all the tasks from one working area under normal operating conditions. Guidance note: The workstation for navigating and manoeuvring should be arranged to allow an assisting officer to carry out route monitoring, which may include position-fixing and chart work, and course adjustments when ordered, while the officer in charge concentrates on traffic situations and adjustment of course and speed as required to follow the route and avoid danger of collision. The workplaces should be adjacent to enable easy communication and cooperation when two navigators operate the workstation, and to provide the watch officer with a workstation for safe and efficient performance of all the tasks when he is the only navigator on the bridge and is to use both the workplace for route monitoring/position-fixing and the workplace for traffic surveillance/manoeuvring. Note. The workplace for position-fixing and chart work is regarded a workstation for monitoring also when in use by an assisting officer and may serve as a workplace for the use of backup chart systems and for conning when ECDIS is installed at the workplace for traffic surveillance. The sketch below shows the relative location of workplaces based on manual position-fixing in paper charts allowing efficient performance by the single watch officer under normal operating conditions and two persons in close cooperation when the workload exceeds the capacity of the watch officer:

Workstation arrangement with work places for Navigation and manoeuvring – Monitoring When an electronic chart system is installed, enabling route monitoring, traffic surveillance and manoeuvring from one working position, the workplace for monitoring may be used by pilots for conning if located close to centre windows.

Alarms Commun. Manoeuvr.

Position-fixing Chart work Monitoring

Traffic surveillance


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 21

Work places when arranged for the use of electronic chart system incorporating automatic position-fixing (ECDIS with backup):

Workstation arrangement for Navigation and manoeuvring – Monitoring - Conning B 5.2 Workplaces for performance of navigation, traffic surveillance and monitoring shall be arranged for working in standing as well as seated position with optimum field of vision. B 5.3 The field of vision from the bridge shall be provided, facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operating conditions as specified in regulation 15.1 by enabling visual observations for performance of bridge functions at the workstations specified in chapter B 2. B 5.4 It shall be possible to observe all objects of interest for the navigation such as ships and lighthouses, in any direction from inside the wheelhouse by providing a horizontal field of vision to the horizon of 360° within the confines of the wheelhouse. Guidance note: On a bridge with enclosed bridge wings it should be possible to obtain the view of 360˚ from inside the bridge area by using two positions, one on each side of the workstation for navigation and manoeuvring, not being more than 15 m apart. This guideline may also be applicable for providing the required field of vision within the confines of wheelhouses with a total breath of more than 18 meters. B5.5 From the conning position and the workstation for navigating and manoeuvring, the view of the sea surface forward of the bow to 10° on either side under any ballast or cargo condition shall not be obscured by more than 2 ship’s lengths (2 x LOA) or 500 metres, whichever is the less.. B5.6 The workstation for navigating and manoeuvring and the conning position shall provide a field of vision enabling maintenance of visual traffic surveillance, extending over a forward arc of not less than 225˚. From a workstation for monitoring, a blind sector covering the view abaft the beam on port side is accepted. Guidance note: All workstations to be used by the officer of the watch should provide a forward field of vision of 225°. A blind sector covering the view abaft the beam on port side may be accepted for workstations to be used infrequently by the watch officer for short periods at a time and for workstations to be used by assisting officers. B 5.7 Workstations for monitoring, navigating and manoeuvring shall provide the required fields of vision from a seated working position and shall not be located directly behind large masts, cranes etc. which obstruct the view right ahead from the workstation. B 5.8 No blind sector caused by obstructions outside of the wheelhouse forward of the beam which obstructs the view of the sea surface as seen from the navigating and manoeuvring workstation, shall exceed 10˚, and the clear sectors between blind sectors shall be at least 5˚. Within a sector from right ahead to at least 10˚ on either side, each individual blind sector shall not exceed 5˚. The total arc of blind sectors forward of the beam shall not exceed 20˚. Guidance note: To help reducing the size of internal blind sector caused by bridge wing bulwarks and divisions between windows in bridge wing bulkheads, such bulwarks and bulkheads should be located in a line of sight seen from the working position at the front workstations.

Alarms Comm. Manoeuvr.

Backup nav. system Monitoring Conning

Traffic surveillance Automatic pos.-fix.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 22

B 5.9 The workstation for manual steering shall preferably be located on the ship’s centre line and shall not interfere with the functions to be performed by the officer of the watch. The steering position shall provide a forward field of vision not less than 60˚ to each side. If large masts, cranes, etc., obstruct the view in front of the workstation, it shall be located some distance to starboard of the centre line, sufficiently to obtain a clear view ahead. B 5.10 When the workstation for manual steering is located off centre, or the bow of the ship cannot be seen from the steering position, special steering references (sighting marks) shall be installed forward of the steering position. The steering references shall be installed in line parallel to the ship’s centre line for use by day and by night. B 5.11 The ship’s side shall be visible from the bridge wing. Equipment for docking operations from the bridge wings, or a workstation console if installed, shall be located to enable visual observations required for safe manoeuvring of the ship, monitoring of tug and mooring operations and shall provide a field of vision from not less than 45˚ on opposite bow to right astern from the working position as shown in Figure A. Note: The Panama Canal Commission (PCC) requires that the conning position located at the extreme end of the bridge wings provides a clear and unobstructed view fore and aft of the vessel’s side. The side hull plating at the vessel’s waterline, fore and aft, shall be visible from bridge wing conning positions. B 5.12 The conning position shall be located close to the front centre window to provide the pilot with a commanding external view, including a view of the sea surface sufficiently close to both sides of the ship’s bow for safe directing of the steering in narrow canals and buoy lanes. Guidance note: The position for the conning station may be met by the workstation for monitoring/backup navigation when located sufficiently close to the forward centre window provided the workstation is installed in addition to a complete workstation for navigation, traffic surveillance and manoeuvring and therefore not required by the ship’s personnel during pilotage. (See Guidelines of B 2.1) Note.

a) The Panama Canal Commission (PCC) requires that the conning position be located “directly behind and next to” the centre front window and the nearest window thereto on each side that provides a clear and unobstructed view ahead for conning during canal transit. A minimum of 1 metre clearance from consoles or obstructions shall be provided. Special requests for relaxation of this requirement may be considered on a case-by-case basis.

b) PCC requires that the conning position shall provide a view of the sea surface forward of the bow from

1.5 ship’s length when at ballast load line and 1 ship’s length at full load line. B 5.13 There shall be a close approach access to at least one front window providing the view of the area in front of the bridge superstructure. B 5.14 Workstations for additional functions which are to be used by the watch officer (see B 2.1), shall provide the field of vision required to maintain efficient look-out in accordance with B 5.5 and enable monitoring of the ship’s heading and rudder angle. B 5.15 The location of a workstation for additional functions regarded essential for safe operation of the ship and to be used by other personnel than the watch officer shall not in any way influence the performance of primary bridge functions. B 5.16 Workstations for additional functions not essential to the safe operation of the ship, its engines and cargo, or furniture arranged for meetings or relaxation inside the wheelhouse shall not be installed within


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 23

the area of the navigating bridge or within fields of vision outside this area, which are required for traffic surveillance from workstations. If such workstation or furniture arrangement is installed close to these areas, the use of it shall in no way influence the performance of primary bridge functions, either by use of light, noise disturbance or visual distraction. Ref. IMO Res. A 708 (17) Guidance note: The figure below shows the principles for bridge layout with front workstations arranged for operations in seated and standing position and with bridge wing bulkheads in line of sight from the working positions. A bridge area which may be regarded outside the navigating bridge and the sectors of required field of vision from workstations are indicated.

Note to figure B (also valid for figure C) Location of ECDIS at the workstation for navigating and manoeuvring (incl. traffic surveillance) enables position-fixing at this position and makes the area a complete workstation (WS) for the navigation function and manoeuvring. This leaves the workstation for navigation backup/monitoring available for conning when installed at the front bulkhead. Close approach access to front windows is maintained.

Figure B. Required field of vision from the radio station when to be controlled and infrequently used for short periods of time by the watch officer.

(Navigation based on electronic chart system (ECDIS) – Conning position at console.)

Navigating & Man.

Steering Route planning Safety - GMDSS

Docking Docking

Conning Monitoring NAV Backup

Radar ECDIS Bulkhead windows in line of sight from chair to reduce blind sector

Figure A. Location of workstations and required fields of vision Position-fixing in paper charts - Passageway and conning position in front.

Area regarded outside the navigating bridge See clause B5.15

Man

Standing when working in paper charts

Navigating & Man. Navigation/Monitoring

Steering Route planning Safety - GMDSS Docking Docking

Conning


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 24

B 6 Fields of vision and bridge window arrangement B 6.1 The bridge front windows shall be inclined from the vertical plane, top out, at an angle not less than 10˚ and not more than 25° to help avoid reflections . Polarized and tinted windows shall not be fitted. Guidance note: The rear and side windows should be inclined from the vertical plane top out, at an angle of 4°~5° to help avoid reflections. If the arrangement of light sources meet the requirement of paragraph B3.8 without inclination of the side and rear windows, inclination may not be necessary. Note. Bridges designed with enclosed bridge wings: Inclined side windows which extend the maximum breadth of the ship may not be in accordance with requirements of the Panama Canal Commission for some ship sizes. B 6.2 The lower and upper edge of windows shall not present an obstruction to the view forward of the bow seen from a seated as well as a standing position at the workstations for monitoring, navigating and manoeuvring. Guidance note: The height of the lower edge of windows above the floor surface should not exceed 1000 mm within the required field of vision and the height of the upper edge should be at least 2000 mm. B 6.3 The upper edge of the front windows shall allow a forward view of the horizon for a person with a height of eye of 1800 mm at the navigating and manoeuvring workstation when the ship is pitching in heavy seas. If 1800 mm height of eye is considered unreasonable and impractical, a reduction of the height may be accepted, but not to less than 1600 mm. Guidance note: A vertical angle of view of not less than 5˚ above a horizontal line from a standing eye height of 1750 mm should be provided. See figure B 6.3.

Figure C. Design principles – Flat front - Open bridge wings with passageway from door to door. Consoles up front - Access to front window -


Docking Docking

Navigating & Man., incl. Traff. Surveil.

Conn. Man.

Mon. – Conn. Backup Nav.

Alarms


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 25

Figure B 6.3 With front windows at an angle of 15˚, a vertical angle of view of 5˚ from an eye height

of 1750 mm may be provided at a distance of 2600 mm from the front bulkhead, allowing for a passageway of 1000 mm in front of workstation consoles

B 6.4 Framing between windows shall be kept to a minimum and not be installed immediately forward of any workstation. If stiffeners between windows are to be covered, this shall not cause further obstruction of the view. Guidance note: The division between windowpanes within the required field of vision should not exceed 150mm. If stiffeners are used, divisions should not exceed 100 mm in width and 120 mm in depth. The width of windowpanes within the field of vision required for traffic surveillance should not be less than 1200 mm in order to limit the number of stiffeners. B 6.5 To enable visual observations through windows to be maintained under all weather conditions, all windows within the required fields of vision from the working position at workstations to be used by bridge personnel, including pilots, shall provide a clear view regardless of weather conditions. Guidance note: The following means should be installed to provide a clear view through windows:

- sunscreens of roller blind type - heavy duty blade type wipers and fresh water window washing - efficient de-icing and de-misting systems

Technical systems installed should comply with appropriate ISO standards* A catwalk or other means to help maintenance of window wipers and manual cleaning of bridge front windows should be provided. * ISO 17899 Marine electric window wipers.

1000 100 mm for chair adjustment

1000

Standing eye height

1500 2500

2000

1750


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 26

B 7 Workstation layout, consoles and chair arrangement The configuration of workstations and consoles shall provide a workplace for rational and user-friendly placing of equipment, with the aim of: - facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the

situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions - promoting effective and safe bridge resource management - enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential

information …… - allowing for expeditious, continuous and effective information processing and decision-making by the

bridge team and the pilot - preventing, or minimizing, excessive or unnecessary work and any condition or distractions on the

bridge which may cause fatigue or interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team and the pilot Ref. SOLAS V/15.1, 15.2, 15.3, 15.5, 15.6 A functional workstation designed in accordance with the established overall operational and ergonomic requirements must provide: - a sufficient area for performance of the tasks to be carried out by the number of people that may be

required to attend - consoles designed for operations at specific workplaces in standing and seated position,

o enabling installation of equipment to be within reach from the working position o avoiding obstruction of the view through bridge windows from seated position

- chairs suiting ergonomic requirements for efficient use of installed equipment and maintenance of

fields of vision, if chairs are to be installed B 7.2 The workstation for navigation and manoeuvring shall have working positions for position-fixing, manoeuvring and traffic surveillance as close as possible for efficient use by the officer of the watch, but also enabling the tasks to be performed by two navigators in close cooperation. Guidance note: The working position for operating the radar with collision avoidance functions should be regarded the main working position at this workstation. Controls for course and speed adjustments should be located within reach from this position to enable collision avoidance manoeuvres without losing view of the traffic, and means for position-monitoring/-fixing should be readily available. Figures A and B show examples of workstation layouts designed in compliance with B 5.1. If ECDIS with backup (which is optional) is not to be installed, the chart table should preferably be installed closer to the radar. See figure C. Alternatively, spaces may be allocated for future ECDIS installation.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 27

ould

Figure B 7.2 A Workstation layout which may include ECDIS with combined electronic and paper chart

backup arrangement as well as conning information display for visual monitoring of INS functions

Figure B 7.2 B A modified workstation configuration, based on same principles as shown in Figure A

May suit wheelhouses with limited depth (longitudinal distance between front and rear bulkheads)

Figure B 7.2 C A modified version of figure B

Alarms

ECDIS Machinery ARPA Radar Chart

ECDIS Backup

Conning


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 28

Figure B 7.2 D Design principles similar to figure C, but without electronic chart installations. Includes space for conning information display and machinery monitoring system

B 7.3 Consoles shall principally be divided into two areas:

- a vertical (slanting) part for location of information displays to be easily readable - a horizontal part (desktop) for controls, switches and buttons to be within easy reach from the

working position B 7.4 The height of console desktops at the workplaces for navigation, manoeuvring, traffic surveillance and monitoring shall enable easy use of equipment required for safe performance of the tasks to be performed from both standing and sitting position. Guidance note: To provide a functional reach from standing position, the height of console desktops above bridge deck surface should be 800 mm and not less than 750 mm. The sitting height is governed by the elbow height in relation to console desktop.

To provide a functional reach of equipment and easy operation of controls from sitting position, the elbow height of the operator should preferably be 50 mm higher than the console desktop and not less than the height of the desktop.

To provide the elbow height required for persons of different size and build in relation to the console desktop, it should be possible to adjust the height of the seat to allow an elbow height of 240 mm +/- 55 mm above the seat. It should be possible to adjust chair armrests accordingly, if installed, and to fold the armrests away.

B 7.5 The console in front of a seated working position shall provide sufficient leg room. Guidance note: The leg room should have a depth of 450 mm and not less than required for a person sitting at a working position 350 mm from the console (chair backrest 440 mm from the edge of the console, requiring a leg room depth of at least 230 mm.) B 7.6 The consoles forming the front workstations shall not be higher than required for efficient use in standing position and shall not obstruct the fields of vision over the lower edge windows in front of the workstation from sitting position. Guidance note: The console height should not exceed 1200 mm. This console height may be accepted for installation at a distance of 350 mm or more from the window, also if it interferes with the line of sight from an eye height of 1400 mm, providing the height of the chair can be adjusted to compensate for the interference.

Desktop + 50 mm

240 +/- 55

800 Adjustable

Fold-away arm rest


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 29

Note: See B6.3 for eye heights at standing position B 7.7 Consoles within the required fields of vision aft of the front workstation consoles shall not obstruct the horizontal line of sight from the sitting eye height. Guidance note: The height of the consoles should be 100 mm lower than the horizontal line of sight and should not exceed 1300 mm. B 7.8 When a chair is installed at a workplace for operations in both standing and seated position, it shall be fastened to rails allowing fore and aft movement of the seat to enable easy reach of equipment when seated and sufficient room to stand in front of the console when the chair is pushed back. It shall be possible to adjust the height of the seat to suit users of different heights for optimum view and reaching distance and armrests, if provided, shall be of fold away type and preferably adjustable in height. Guidance note: The seat height of the chair should be adjustable from 550 to 670 mm above the deck surface. The movement in fore-aft direction should allow the front edge of the seat to be positioned at the edge of the front console and to allow a free space of at least 700 mm between the chair and console when moved in aft direction. Armrests should preferably be adjustable from 185 and 295 mm above the seat if installed. C. Design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment Navigational systems and equipment shall be designed with the aim of: - ……..presenting the information in a clear and unambiguous manner, using standardized symbols

and coding systems for controls and displays - indicating the operational status of automated functions and integrated components, systems

and/or sub-systems - minimizing the risk of human error and detecting such error if it occurs, through monitoring

and alarm systems, in time for the bridge team and the pilot to take appropriate action Ref. SOLAS V/15.3, 15.4, 15.7

790 +/- 60

1000 100 mm chair adjustment

1000

Sitting

Standing

1500 2500

2000

1400 1750

800 610 +/-60


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 30

and be arranged with the aim of: - facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the

situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions - enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential

information - allowing for expeditious, continuous and effective information processing and decision-making by the

bridge team and the pilot Ref. SOLAS V/15.1, 15.3, 15.5 C 1 Design and quality of navigational systems and equipment C 1.1 Navigational systems and equipment type approved in accordance with relevant IMO performance standards meet design requirements established by IMO. Note. The basic design of navigation systems and equipment required to be carried is governed by functional and technical requirements as well as ergonomic and human-machine interface criteria expressed in individual IMO performance standards. The quality of the human engineering part of the design of equipment and alarm functions is to be determined in performance tests and trials carried out during the approval process. Alteration of hardware and software of type approved equipment requires review of the documentation by the type approving authority and may include re-testing to a certain extent, depending on the type of changes. C 1.2 Navigational equipment and systems offering alternative modes of operation shall indicate the actual mode in use. C 1.3 The system architecture of an integrated system shall include means providing situation awareness by indication of operational status of automated functions and the individual equipment. C 1.4 In case of failure in one part of an integrated navigational system, it shall be possible to operate every other individual item of equipment or part of the system separately. C 2 Bridge alarm management An alarm system shall be provided, indicating any fault requiring attention and shall: - activate an audible and visual alarm on the navigating bridge for any situation which requires action

by or attention of the officer of the watch - as far as practicable be designed on the self-monitoring principle The bridge alarm system shall be designed with the overall aim of: - minimizing the risk of human error and detecting such error, if it occurs, through monitoring and

alarm systems, in time for the bridge team and the pilot to take appropriate action Ref. SOLAS V/15.7


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 31

The overall aim includes the aim of: - enabling the officer on watch to devote full attention to the safe navigation of the ship - enabling immediate identification of any abnormal situation requiring action to maintain safe

navigation of the ship - avoiding distraction by alarms which require attention but have no direct influence on the safe

navigation of the ship and which do not require immediate action to restore or maintain the safe navigation of the ship

Alarms and indicators on the navigating bridge shall be minimized and only alarms and indicators required by appropriate IMO Resolutions shall be placed on the navigating bridge, unless permitted by the flag administration. Ref. IMO Resolution A830/3.16 C 2.1 A method of accepting all alarms on the bridge (both the source of alarm and alarms of other equipment caused by the loss of sensor input) shall be provided at the navigating and manoeuvring workstation to avoid distraction. The system shall enable immediate identification of the alarm sources without requiring any operator action and enable immediate silencing of the alarms by single operator action. Guidance note: A bridge management system should include grouping of alarms and indicators, separating alarms that affect safety of navigation and alarms that do not influence safety of navigation. The group of alarms related to safety of navigation should incorporate all system alarms, equipment alarms and operational warnings that are critical to safety of navigation, including the detection of: - operator disability - danger of collision - heading deviations - deviations from the route - danger of grounding - propulsion failure - steering gear failure Essential equipment and systems to be incorporated in such an alarm system should include: - bridge watch monitoring system - heading information system - heading / track control system - position-fixing systems - electronic chart system, if installed - radar with electronic target plotting functions - relevant machinery alarms for early warning All groups of bridge alarms and warnings should be centralised in a common panel or screen at the workstation for navigation and manoeuvring. C 2.2 Acknowledgement of an alarm at either the instrument or an alarm panel shall cancel the audible warning at both sources and change the visual alarm from flashing to constant light. C 2.3 Permanently inhibiting individual alarms shall not be possible, but manual suppression of local audible alarms may be accepted when this is clearly and constantly indicated at the equipment and the unit is part of the alarm management system.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 32

Guidance note: Local audible alarms may be manually suppressed by means of an on/off switch located on or close to the equipment or by other means, e.g. electronically. The off-position should enable suppression of the audible alarm when the equipment is part of a central alarm system and the on-position should engage the local alarm when the equipment serves as a stand-alone unit. C 2.4 If an alarm channel in a computer-based system is inhibited manually, then this shall be clearly indicated by a visual signal. C 2.5 Audible alarms shall be maintained until they are accepted and the visual identification of individual alarms shall remain until the fault has been corrected. C 2.6 Alarm indications shall be red, or if on displays, red or otherwise highlighted. If alarm messages are displayed on colour VDUs, the alarm status shall remain visible in the event of the failure of one colour of the display system. Guidance note: The following method of indication should be applied:

1) Active alarm status: Red, blinking and audible 2) Active alarm status acknowledged: Red, static (canceling the audible alarm) 3) Active warning message - not critical: Yellow, static (may be accompanied by a short audible attention signal) 4) Normal condition: No light (indication of a safe situation)

C 2.7 The alarm system shall be able to indicate more than one fault at the same time, and the acknowledgement of any alarm shall not inhibit another alarm, meaning that if an alarm has been acknowledged and a second fault occurs before the first is rectified, the audible and visual alarms are to operate again. C 2.8 A new alarm condition shall be clearly distinguishable from those existing and already acknowledged by indicating new alarms by a flashing light, and existing and accepted alarms by a constant light. Guidance note: In colour graphic systems, it should not be possible to distinguish between the status of alarms and warnings by means of colour only. C 2.9 Provisions shall be made for functional testing of required alarms and indicators. C 2.10 The alarm system shall be continuously powered and shall have an automatic change-over to stand-by power supply in case of loss of normal power supply. C 2.11 Failure of the normal or backup power supply of the alarm system shall be indicated by an alarm. C 2.12 Loss of system communication shall be indicated by an alarm


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 33

C 3 Arrangement of navigational systems and equipment The type and number of navigational systems and equipment to be carried shall at least incorporate the items specified in regulation 19, and shall be installed at the various workstations with the aim of: - facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the

situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions - enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential

information that is presented in a clear and unambiguous manner, using standardized symbols and coding systems for controls and displays

- indicating the operational status of automated functions and integrated components, systems and/or sub-systems

- minimizing the risk of human error and detecting such error if it occurs through monitoring and alarm systems, in time for the bridge team and the pilot to take appropriate action

Ref. SOLAS V/15.1, 15.3, 15.4, 15.7 The relative location of individual equipment and their placement in relation to the distance from the working position of the user are governed by:

- Type and range of equipment to be installed See Guidance note of C 3.1 - Equipment relationship with tasks to be performed at the various workstations See Guidance note of B1 and C 3.1 - Importance of equipment functions and frequency of use See B 1 - Workstation and console configurations See B 7 - Size of equipment and space available for installation Case by case

C 3.1 All information, controls, facilities and fields of vision required to carry out each of the tasks safely and efficiently shall be provided at the corresponding workstations. Guidance note: The table below specifies minimum carriage requirements for ships of different tonnage, the tasks or the purpose the equipment should serve and the type of workstation (WS) at which the equipment is to be used and should be installed. See also table in guidance note to B 1 specifying equipment in relation to functions and tasks.

Workstation for navigating and manoeuvring Main functions: Position surveillance, traffic surveillance, course alterations and speed changes

Equipment and means Task/Purpose Equipment Indicators Related equipm. Remarks

Other means Mandatory Applicable for all ships Check heading Magnetic compass1 1 Readable from WS

for manual steering Take optical bearings Pelorus

Means of correcting heading and bearing to true

Magnetic compass Arc of 360˚

Positioning - manual - electronic1

GNSS Paper charts Chart table ECDIS w/backup arr.1

1Optional chart system

Surveillance by hearing Sound reception system Sound direction All ships w/ totally enclosed bridge


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 34

Workstation for navigating and manoeuvring Communicate heading 1

- manual - automatic2

Telephone

2Main gyro (optional)

1 To emergency steering position 2Optional Gyro repeater (located in steering gear comp.)

Applicable for ships ≥ 150gr.t Spare compass Interchangeable

magnetic compass (or other means)

Stored in bridge area Gyro compass also connected to emergency source of electrical power may be accepted.

Communicate ship/shore Signalling lamp Readily available Applicable for ships ≥ 300gr.t. Traffic surveillance Navigation

Radar with electronic plotting aid (EPA)

9 GHz

Check keel clearance Echo sounding device Check speed & distance Speed & distance

measuring device Speed through the

water Transmitting heading 1 Transmitting heading

device 2 1 Trans. to Radar/EPA

and AIS 2 Gyro required for ships >500 gr.t.

Ship identification, tracking

AIS Ref. Reg.19.2.4

External communication VHF telephone Compulsory (SOLAS Ch IV/4-1 + 17(f)

Applicable for ships ≥ 500gr.t. Determine heading Transmitting heading 2

Gyro compass

Gyro heading repeater

1 Also available to WS for monitoring 2 Trans. to Radar/ATA and AIS

Take bearings – arc 360˚

2 gyro bearing repeaters 1

Main gyro 1 Location bridge wings

Supply heading info to emergency steering pos.

Gyro heading repeater 1

Main gyro 1 Located at emerg. steering position

Rudder angle

Readable also from WSs for monitoring + manual steering

RPM/(Pitch) Readable also from WS for monitoring

Thruster settings

Manoeuvring - rudder angle - RPM - thruster force + direction - operational mode Actual mode of use When equipment

offers diff. modes Traffic surveillance ATA1 Radar 1 Replaces EPA

Applicable for ships ≥ 3000gr.t Traffic surveillance Navigation

Radar with ATA 3GHz or 9GHz (Add a second radar with ATA)

Applicable for ships >10000gr.t. Traffic surveillance Automatic radar plotting

aid (ARPA) 1 Radar 1 Replaces one ATA

Automatic steering Heading or track control

system

Applicable for ships ≥ 50000gr.t. Monitor ship’s turn Rate-of-turn To be read from WS

for monitoring + manual steering

Measure speed & dist. forward + athwartship

2-axis speed log Over ground


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 35

Workstation for navigating and manoeuvring Internal com. Auto telephone. External com. VHF telephone Monitor alarms and warnings

Alarm panel Enabling accept of alarms and warnings

Accept watch alarms Alarm accept button Watch monitoring

Workstation for monitoring Main functions: Observation of bridge operations and surrounding environment – Assisting OOW

Equipment and means Task/Purpose Equipment Indicators Related equip. Remarks

Monitor Steering Gyro repeater

Rudder angle Rate-of-turn

Main gyro See WS for navigation and manoeuvring

Monitor Speed Speed RPM main engine

Speed log See WS for nav./man. Pitch if relevant

Monitor time Clock Give sound signals Whistle control Accept watch alarms Alarm accept button Watch monitoring Internal com. Telephone External com. VHF telephone Monitoring environment

Ctrls. for window wipers, washing & heating Binoculars

Workstation for Manual steering

Main functions: Steering in accordance with compass heading and visual marks Equipment and means

Task/Purpose Equipment Indicators Related equip. Remarks Operating steering device

Wheel - tiller

Monitoring compass heading

Compass heading Gyro repeater

Magnetic compass Main gyro

Communicate bridge wings

Hands free talk-back telephone

Workstation for Docking Main functions: Conning, course alterations, speed changes, mooring operations


Determine manoeuvring - Heading - Speed - Steering - Propulsion

Gyro repeater Speed Rudder angle RPM Pitch if relevant

Main gyro Speed log

Main engine control1 Steering control1

Manoeuvring operations

Thruster control1

1If installed

Monitor external conditions

Wind speed & direction *

* Optional installation

Communicate wheelhouse

Handsfree talk-back telephone

Communicate tugs/pilot VHF (point) Ref. SOLAS Ch.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 36

Workstation for Docking Main functions: Conning, course alterations, speed changes, mooring operations


boats IV/17(f)

Workstation for planning and documentation Main functions: Route planning – documenting ship operations


GNSS Paper chart Chart table

Route planning

Electronic chart Optional

Workstation for Safety operations Main functions: Monitor safety state - Execute relevant measures - Organise operations Equipment and means

Task/Purpose Equipment Indicators Related equip. Remarks Display alarm conditions

Remaining alarm indicators not available at WS for navigation/man.

Include acknowledgement of fire and emergency alarms (MSC/Circ ??)

Provide information + other means for safety management

Remaining safety controls not available at WS for nav./man. Internal telephone

Info about ship’s safety systems and contingency plan to be available at the WS

Workstation for Radio communication

Main functions: GMDSS – Public correspondence Equipment and means

Task/Purpose Equipment Indicators Related equip. Remarks GMDSS To be specified in relation

to trading area

Public correspondence

Conning station (pilot) Main functions: External and internal observations for determination of safe course and speed


Observe waters, navigational aids and traffic

Binoculars

Access to radar

Observe own ship’s heading and steering, speed and propulsion

Gyro repeater Rudder angle Speed RPM/Pitch if relevant

Effect sound signals Whistle button Communicate other ships

VHF telephone Easy access from working position


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 37

C 3.1.1 Installation of voyage data recorder (VDR) To assist in casualty investigations, ships, when engaged on international voyages, subject to the provisions of regulation 20.1.4, shall be fitted with a voyage data recorder (VDR). C 3.2 Other means than those specified in C 3.1 may be permitted, provided they serve the same functions and are approved in accordance with regulation 18. C 3.3 The location of equipment at the workplaces for navigation, manoeuvvring, traffic surveillance and monitoring shall enable easy use of all controls, switches and buttons from standing position and easy use of primary means for route monitoring, traffic surveillance, heading and speed adjustments, internal and external communication, including ship’s whistle and change of steering mode, from seated position. Work in paper charts and manoeuvring requiring the use of lateral thrusters may be performed in standing position only, but controls for thruster systems shall be grouped with controls for propulsion and manual steering. Guidance note: The position for operation of radars and the position at the centre console for harbour manoeuvres are regarded the main working positions at the workstation for navigation and manoeuvring. Figure C 3.3 indicates location of main categories of equipment that should be within reach from the front workstation comprising three workplaces. Examples of location of primary equipment are shown in Annex 4.

Figure C 3.3 Example of principle location of main equipment in a centre console which includes manoeuvring functions.

Communication

Win

dow

s

Dim

mer

s

Propulsion Thru

st Steer

Stee

r

Steer

Alarms

Position-fix receivers

Paper charts

Conning information


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 38

D. Bridge procedures D 1 Bridge team management Navigating bridges complying with this standard have been designed and arranged with the aim of:

- facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot in making full appraisal of the situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions

- promoting effective and safe bridge resource management Ref. SOLAS V/15.1 and 15.2 D 1.1 Procedures shall be established enabling safe operations under all operational conditions by the manning required to master situations that may appear. Such procedures shall be defined in the Company and ship specific bridge procedures manual and shall take account of the requirements of the ISM and STCW Codes and include manning requirements, responsibilities and training requirements for all normal and abnormal modes of operation. Guidance note: The bridge workstations meeting the aims of regulation 15 are arranged to suit the distribution of functions and tasks at different operating conditions by manning the relevant workstations when required, as indicated in the table below:

Examples of workstations in use during different operational conditions Waters

Pilot waters Operational conditions

Ocean areas Coastal water

Narrow waters General Confined

Harbours

Normal W1 W1 + W2 W1+W2* W1+(W3)+W8 W1+W3+W4 Irregular W1+W2 W1+W2+W3 W1+W2*+W3 W1+W2+W3+W8 W1+W3+W4 Abnormal W1+W2+W3 W1+W2+W3+W8 W1+W2+W3+W8 W1+W2+W3+W8 W1+W2+W3+W4 Emergency W1+(W3)+W6

+W7 W1+(W3)+W6 +W7

W1+(W3)+W8 +W6+W7

W1+(W3)+W8 +W6+W7

W1+(W3)+W4 +W6+W7

*When used by the pilot WS = Workstation W1 : WS for navigating, manoeuvring (+ traffic surveillance) W2 : WS for monitoring/conning (if ECDIS installed at workplace for traffic surveillance– See ?? ) W3 : WS for manual steering W4 : WS for docking W5 : WS for planning W6 : WS for safety operations W7 : WS for communication W8 : Conning station


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 39

The workplace for traffic surveillance and manoeuvring together with the workstation for safety operations and communication form an operational and emergency control centre wherefrom two persons can control the ship and handle emergency events in close cooperation. D 2 Procedures related to regulation 24, 25, 27 and 28 D 2.1 The following routines shall be included and emphasized in the regular bridge procedures:

- Use of heading and/or track control systems - Testing of manual steering system after prolonged use of automatic steering system - Operation of steering gear - Updating of nautical charts and nautical publications - Recording of navigational activities

Appendix 1 Application of Regulation 15 – Clarifications and considerations Annex 1 of Appendix 1 The aims of Regulation 15 Annex 2 of Appendix 1 Documents referred to and regulations addressed

by regulation 15 Annex 3 of Appendix 1 Regulation 22 – Harmonization with MSC/Circ.982 Appendix 2 Examples of location of main equipment on the bridge

Traffic surveillance Navigation


Docking Docking

Man

Design principles - Location of workstations Enabling efficient bridge team management during different operating conditions

W 1

W 3 W 4 W 4

W 5 W 6 - W 7

(W 2) Conning W 8

Co-operation - Ship control - Safety operations

APPENDIX 1

Application of regulation 15

Clarifications and considerations

Appendix 1 to the IACS UI 181 BDEAP


Introduction This Appendix contains three annexes forming the platform for the development of the IACS standard for Bridge Design, Equipment Arrangement and Procedures (BDEAP) for application of regulation 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28 in accordance with the aims of regulation 15.

The annexes deal with the aims specified in Regulation 15 and the relationship between these aims and applicable parts of MSC Circ 982 and other IMO instruments which Regulation 15 refers to in footnotes for application of regulation 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28.



List of content

APPENDIX 1 .......................................................................................................... 1

APPLICATION OF REGULATION 15 ................................................................... 1

Clarifications and considerations................................................................................................................... 1

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 2

ANNEX 1 OF APPENDIX 1.................................................................................... 6

THE AIMS OF REGULATION 15........................................................................... 6

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... 7

AIM 15.1........................................................................................................................................................... 7 .1 Overall tasks to be performed ............................................................................................................. 7 .2 Basic tasks performed by the bridge team........................................................................................... 7 .3 Operational conditions and situations ................................................................................................. 8 .3.1 Example of bridge team composition under different operational conditions................................ 8

AIM 15 .2.......................................................................................................................................................... 9 .1 Factors promoting safe resource management: ................................................................................... 9

AIM 15.3........................................................................................................................................................... 9 .1 Essential information (and controls) required by the bridge team ...................................................... 9 .2 Presentation of information and standardization................................................................................. 9

AIM 15 .4.......................................................................................................................................................... 9 .1 Relevant automated functions ............................................................................................................. 9 .4 Indicating the operational status (of automated functions and integrated components, systems and/or sub-systems) ............................................................................................................................................... 10

AIM 15 .5........................................................................................................................................................ 11 .1 Conditions allowing effective information processing and decision-making: .................................. 11 .2 See Clause 1, item .2 ......................................................................................................................... 11

AIM 15.6......................................................................................................................................................... 11 .1 Conditions that may interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team ................................................ 11

AIM 15.7......................................................................................................................................................... 11 .1 Factors imperative for minimizing human error ............................................................................... 11 .2 Monitoring and alarm systems .......................................................................................................... 12 .3 In time for appropriate action............................................................................................................ 12

ANNEX 2 OF APPENDIX 1.................................................................................. 13

DOCUMENTS REFERRED TO............................................................................ 13

AND REGULATIONS ADDRESSED BY REGULATION 15................................ 13

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 14



1. GUIDELINES AND STANDARDS REFERRED TO BY REGULATION 15 .. 14

1.1 Guidelines on ergonomic criteria for bridge equipment and layout........................................... 14 1.1.1 Definition ..................................................................................................................................... 14 1.1.2 Scope ............................................................................................................................................ 14 1.1.3 Purpose......................................................................................................................................... 14

1.2 Performance standards for integrated bridge systems - IBS ...................................................... 14 1.2.1 Definition ..................................................................................................................................... 14 1.2.2 System requirement...................................................................................................................... 14

1.3 Performance standards for an integrated navigation system - INS............................................ 15 1.3.1 Definition ..................................................................................................................................... 15 1.3.2 Scope ............................................................................................................................................ 15 1.3.3 Categories of INS ......................................................................................................................... 15

2. REGULATIONS ADDRESSED BY REGULATION 15 ................................. 16

Regulation 19 - ............................................................................................................................................... 16

Carriage requirements for shipborne navigational systems and equipment ........................................... 16 2.1.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................... 16 2.1.2 Main requirements........................................................................................................................ 16 2.1.3 Areas affected by the regulation................................................................................................... 16 2.1.4 Relevant IMO references.............................................................................................................. 16

2.2 Regulation 22 -................................................................................................................................. 16

Navigation bridge visibility........................................................................................................................... 16 2.2.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................... 16 2.2.2 Main requirements........................................................................................................................ 17 2.2.3 Areas affected by the regulation................................................................................................... 17 2.2.4 Relevant IMO references.............................................................................................................. 18

2.3 Regulation 24 ................................................................................................................................... 18

Use of heading and/or track control systems .............................................................................................. 18 2.3.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................... 18 2.3.2 Main requirements........................................................................................................................ 18 2.3.3 Areas affected by the regulation................................................................................................... 19 2.3.4 Relevant IMO references.............................................................................................................. 19

2.4 Regulation 25 ................................................................................................................................... 19

Operation of steering gear ............................................................................................................................ 19 2.4.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................... 19 2.4.2 Main requirements........................................................................................................................ 19 2.4.3 Areas affected by the regulation................................................................................................... 20 2.4.4 Relevant IMO references.............................................................................................................. 20

2.5 Regulation 27 ................................................................................................................................... 20

Nautical charts and nautical publications ................................................................................................... 20 2.5.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................... 20 2.5.2 Main requirement ......................................................................................................................... 20 2.5.3 Area affected by the regulation .................................................................................................... 20 2.5.4 Relevant IMO references.............................................................................................................. 20

2.6 Regulation 28 ................................................................................................................................... 20



Records of navigational activities................................................................................................................. 20 2.6.1 Purpose......................................................................................................................................... 20 2.6.2 Main requirement ......................................................................................................................... 21 2.6.3 Area affected by the regulation .................................................................................................... 21 2.6.4 Relevant IMO references.............................................................................................................. 21

3. SUMMARIZING TABLE................................................................................ 22

ANNEX 3 OF APPENDIX 1.................................................................................. 25

Regulation 22 and harmonization with MSC Circ. 982 ............................................................................. 25

Introduction ................................................................................................................................................... 25

......................................................................................................................................................................... 25

Navigation bridge visibility........................................................................................................................... 26

CLARIFICATION ................................................................................................. 29

The extent of horizontal field of vision and the arc of blind sectors abaft the beam. .............................. 29 Clarification and considerations.............................................................................................................. 29



ANNEX 1 of Appendix 1

The aims of Regulation 15



Introduction In this annex, the aims of regulation 15 are defined and clarified to establish a common understanding of the content of the individual aims, enabling a common approach in meeting the aims as specified in the regulation.

A view of the full extent of the aims is regarded essential for safeguarding that the aims are correctly employed within the areas of bridge design, the design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment on the bridge and bridge procedures when applying the regulations addressed in regulation 15.

AIM 15.1 Facilitating the tasks1 to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot2 in making full appraisal of the situation and in navigating the ship safely under all operational conditions3 .1 Overall tasks to be performed

− Route planning − Navigation − Traffic surveillance − Manoeuvring − Docking − Manual steering − Conning − Safety operations − Internal and external communication related to the tasks to be performed − Pilotage

.2 Basic tasks performed by the bridge team (based on minimum equipment carriage requirements and regular manning)

Watch officer: − Navigation - Position-fixing by

− optical system − radar system − reading from display − plotting ship’s position

− Visual observations − Adjust ship’s heading to follow route − Traffic surveillance − Visual look-out − Monitor radar/ARPA − Manoeuvring − Adjust ship’s heading and speed in relation to traffic − External and internal communication related to safety in bridge operation



Rating, assisting the watch officer:

− Visual look-out Navigator, assisting the watch officer (or watch officer assisting the captain):

− Navigation - Route monitoring − Position-fixing − Plotting ship’s position − Adjust course − Monitor the waters

Rating, relieving the automatic heading control:

− Manual steering Pilot assisting in safe navigation:

− Conning and determination of heading and speed

.3 Operational conditions and situations

Normal condition: When all shipboard systems and equipment related to primary bridge functions operate within design limits, and weather conditions or traffic do not cause excessive operator workloads.

Irregular condition:

When external conditions cause excessive operator workloads requiring professional assistance on the bridge.

Abnormal condition:

When internal technical system failures require operation of basic back-up systems or when they occur during an irregular operating condition, or when the officer of the watch becomes unfit to perform his duties and has not yet been replaced by another qualified officer.

Emergency situation:

When failure of internal ship systems not affecting the ability of navigation or manoeuvring, or fire incidents occur which need to be controlled and managed from the bridge.

Distress situations:

When the ship has lost its navigating or manoeuvring capability.

.3.1 Example of bridge team composition under different operational conditions Reference which may be used for design purposes:

Normal: Watch officer - Night: + Rating Irregular: Watch officer + assisting navigator (+ Rating) Abnormal: Captain + Watch officer + look-out (+ helmsman) Emergency: Captain + Watch officer + assisting navigator + look-out (+ helmsman) (+ Chief engineer/Chief officer) A pilot may be included in any of the above manning examples.



AIM 15 .2 Promoting effective and safe bridge resource management1

.1 Factors promoting safe resource management:

- Organized distribution of tasks and responsibilities - Functional workplace arrangement suiting different operating conditions, task

distribution and task performance - Procedures for safe operations

AIM 15.3

Enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential information1 which is presented in a clear and unambiguous manner, using standardized symbols and coding systems for controls and displays2

.1 Essential information (and controls) required by the bridge team

The information and controls required as well as what is to be regarded essential are linked to the type and importance of tasks to be carried out by the individual members of the bridge team and the pilot. The table showing Task and Means which is included in chapter B1 of the BDEAP Standard identifies the essential information required. Easy access to information may be provided by outfitting and placing the workstations for efficient task performance by members of the bridge team, in accordance with the content of chapter C 3.

.2 Presentation of information and standardization

Requirements addressing presentation of information and coding of systems for controls and displays for equipment required to be carried are regulated by IMO performance standards and IEC test standards.

AIM 15 .4 Indicating the operational status4 of automated functions1 and integrated components2, systems and/or sub-systems3

.1 Relevant automated functions

- Steering a set course - Plotting ship’s position in an electronic chart system - Steering along a planned route governed by ship’s position - Adjusting the speed according to ship’s position and preset values - Manoeuvring operations (Semi automatic/Joystick)

.2 Relevant integrated components

- Heading control unit - Satellite positioning-fixing unit (GNSS and GPS ) - Electronic chart display unit (ECDIS)


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 10

- Radar display unit - Track control unit - Speed control unit

.3 Relevant systems:

- Track control system - Integrated navigation systems (INS), including - Grounding avoidance system for automatic route-keeping

.4 Indicating the operational status (of automated functions and integrated components, systems and/or sub-systems)

Indication of operational status is provided by: • supplying continuous information of relevant system activities related to the ship’s

course, speed, propulsion, steering and operating mode on one individual display • enabling continuous visual observation of key values • enabling the checking of the functioning of system elements and operational

performance • enabling early detection of deviations from planned operations and system

specifications. Categories of indications that may be included: Normal operations:

Available components in the total system configuration Configuration in use Activity status of individual components in use Second mode of operation at system failure, preferably based on system failure mode, effect and criticality analysis (FMEAC)

Early warning:

Reduced accuracy Reduced reliability of integrated system performance Reduced reliability of propulsion and steering system

Alarm conditions: Equipment malfunction

System failure Display freeze

Operational warnings: Danger of collision Danger of grounding Weather conditions


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 11

AIM 15 .5

Allowing for expeditious, continuous and effective information processing and decision-making1 by the bridge team and the pilot2 .1 Conditions allowing effective information processing and decision-making:

- When all information required for evaluation and decision-making is clearly presented and available at the location where action is to be taken on the decision made, including appropriate feedback on actions and updated information for continuous consideration.

- When information and equipment for performance of functions to be carried out by

different members of the bridge team are arranged at specific workstations located for close co-operation.

.2 See Clause 1, item .2 AIM 15.6 Preventing or minimizing excessive or unnecessary work and any conditions or distractions on the bridge which may cause fatigue or interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team and the pilot1

.1 Conditions that may interfere with the vigilance of the bridge team

Such conditions include:

- poor working environment - location of workstations for additional functions too close to navigation area - location of information needed for decision-making which is wide spread - lack of harmonization of workplace functionality - unauthorized persons on the navigation bridge - high workloads

AIM 15.7 Minimizing the risk of human error and detecting such error if it occurs1, through monitoring and alarm systems2, in time for the bridge team and the pilot to take appropriate action3

.1 Factors imperative for minimizing human error

Workplace related: - Workplace functionality - Information availability - System reliability - Human-machine interface - System architecture of automation systems based on fail-to-safe philosophy

with simple and reliable second mode of operations


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 12

Human related: - Competence - Attitude - Complacency

Operational:

- Manning - Working routines - Bridge team management

Detectable during operations: - Inappropriate performance

.2 Monitoring and alarm systems

Systems and methods enabling detection of human error and timely warning for appropriate action include:

- Monitoring and alarm transfer systems, monitoring personal activity and lack of

response on operational warnings and alarm conditions related to safety of navigation and the ship’s safety systems, and transferring unacknowledged warnings and alarms to qualified person.

.3 In time for appropriate action

Conditions affecting the time for appropriate action: Operational warnings - time to danger of collision and grounding (distance/speed) - time to be allowed for required action Equipment and system failure alarms - failure mode and effect - size of navigating area


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 13

ANNEX 2 of APPENDIX 1

Documents referred to and regulations addressed by regulation 15


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 14

Introduction This annex identifies the scope of the guidelines and standards referred to by regulation 15 for application of regulations 19, 22, 24, 25, 27 and 28. The annex also intends to identify the purpose and main requirements of the various regulations to be applied, as well as the relevant areas and aims of regulation 15 that affect the application of the individual regulations.

1. Guidelines and standards referred to by regulation 15 1.1 Guidelines on ergonomic criteria for bridge equipment and layout - MSC C 982 1.1.1 Definition “Ergonomics” is defined in the guidelines as: “The study and design of working environments (e.g. workstation, cockpit, ship bridges) and their components, work practices, and work procedures for the benefit of the worker’s productivity, health, comfort, and safety. Application of the human factor in the analysis and design of equipment, work and working environment.” 1.1.2 Scope The guidelines are developed to realize a successful ergonomic design of the bridge and the equipment on the bridge, which will improve the reliability and efficiency of navigation. These Guidelines therefore contain ergonomic requirements as well as a functional oriented bridge layout to support watch-keeping personnel in their tasks by user-centered design of the equipment and layout. 1.1.3 Purpose The Guidelines have been prepared to support provisions of the revised regulation V/15 of the SOLAS Convention – Principles relating to bridge design, design and arrangement of navigational systems and equipment and bridge procedures, in force from 1 July 2002. 1.2 Performance standards for integrated bridge systems - IBS 1.2.1 Definition An integrated bridge system (IBS) is defined as combinations of systems which are interconnected in order to allow centralized access to sensor information or command/control from workstations, with the aim of increasing safe and efficient ship’s management by suitably qualified personnel. 1.2.2 System requirement The IBS shall support systems performing two or more of the following operations:


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 15

− passage execution* − communications − machinery control − loading, discharging and cargo control − safety and security

* The function of passage execution in an Integrated Bridge system (IBS) may be performed by an INS which should at least be an INS(B), covered by the relevant IMO performance standards. Note. a) This means that if the ship is fitted with an Integrated Navigation System (INS) without further integration, the IBS standard is not applicable. b) With regards to automatic propulsion control regulating the propulsion in accordance with pre-set speed for different course-legs along the planned route or in relation to a desired time of arrival, this functionality is identified and regulated in the track-control standard. 1.3 Performance standards for an integrated navigation system - INS 1.3.1 Definition “An INS is a combination of systems that are interconnected to increase safe and efficient navigation when used by suitably qualified personnel.” 1.3.2 Scope The purpose of an integrated navigation system (INS) is to provide “added value” to the function and information needed by the officer in charge of the navigational watch (OOW) to plan, monitor or control the progress of the ship. Note. INS is applicable if Track control system is installed, demanding electronic chart for visual monitoring of automated functions. 1.3.3 Categories of INS The performance standards define three categories of INS:

− INS(A) for systems that provide the minimum functional requirements of the INS, including a consistent common reference system.

− INS (B) for systems that, in addition to the functional requirements of INS(A), provide the information needed for decision support in avoiding hazards.

− INS (C) for systems that, in addition to the functional requirements of INS(B), provide the automatic control functions of heading, track or speed


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 16

2. Regulations addressed by regulation 15 Regulation 19 - Carriage requirements for shipborne navigational systems and equipment 2.1.1 Purpose The regulation aims at ensuring that: − the individual ship is equipped with navigational systems and instruments providing the bridge

personnel with the minimum of information and controls required for safe navigation − the individual navigational systems and equipment to be installed have a minimum level of

functionality and reliability for safe navigation of the ship. (by referring to regulation 18*)

*Regulation 18 aims at ensuring the functionality and quality of navigational equipment by requiring conformance with appropriate performance standards, which is to be verified by tests and documented by type approval certificates. 2.1.2 Main requirements The regulation lists equipment and systems to be installed on the bridge for ships of various tonnages to facilitate the operational need of information and controls for safe navigation. 2.1.3 Areas affected by the regulation The regulation affects: − range of equipment to be installed, and implicitly: − the arrangement of navigational equipment on the bridge, with the aim of:

.1 facilitating the tasks to be performed…. .2 promoting effective and safe bridge resource management…. .3 enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential information…. .3.1 presenting information in a clear and unambiguous manner .4 indicating the operational status of automated functions and integrated components…. .5 allowing for expeditious, continuous and effective information processing and decision making…. .6 preventing or minimizing excessive or unnecessary work and any conditions of distractions…. .7 minimizing the risk of human error and detecting such error….

2.1.4 Relevant IMO references

.1 MSC Circ 982, (4.0, 5.2, 5.3, 5,4)

2.2 Regulation 22 - Navigation bridge visibility 2.2.1 Purpose


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 17

The regulation aims at ensuring that: − the bridge provides appropriate fields of vision enabling detection of danger of collision,

manual steering of the ship and navigation by visual observations from inside the wheelhouse and the view required from the bridge the wings for safe docking of the ship

2.2.2 Main requirements The regulation addresses the vertical and horizontal fields of vision required from the conning position for traffic surveillance, and the horizontal field of vision required for manual steering and manoeuvring from the bridge wings.

The requirements address: − View of the sea surface from conning position − Blind sectors − Horizontal field of vision from:

o the conning position o each bridge wing o the main steering position

− View of the ship’s side − Height of lower edge and upper edge of front windows − Avoidance of reflections in windows − Framing between windows − Avoidance of polarized and tinted windows − Clear view through windows

2.2.3 Areas affected by the regulation The regulation affects: − bridge design with the aim of:

.1 facilitating the tasks to be performed .3 enabling convenient and continuous access to essential information

− by providing:

appropriate field of vision from inside the wheelhouse and bridge wings for:

- traffic surveillance - visual route monitoring, including position-fixing - safe harbour manoeuvring and docking of the ship from the bridge wings - safe steering of the ship from the workstation for manual steering

− avoiding:

unacceptable obstruction of the view caused by:

- blind sectors - reflection in windows from internal lights or bright sunshine - size of windows - framing between windows - polarized or tinted windows


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 18


.1 MSC Circ 982, (5.1.1.1, 5.1.2, 5.1.3) The main difference between Regulation 22 and the IMO Guidelines is that the field of vision for collision avoidance is related to the conning position in Regulation 22, but from the navigating and manoeuvring workstation in the Guidelines. See Annex 3 More specifically, in addition to the requirements of regulation 22, regulation 15 through the IMO Guidelines (MSC Circ. 982) aims at ensuring that: − bridge configuration, location of workstations and window arrangement enable:

- the watch officer to monitor the traffic visually at the same time as monitoring

instruments and operating controls when seated at the navigating and manoeuvring workstation

- an assisting navigator to monitor the traffic from a sitting position at a separate

workstation

- manual steering from a separate workstation

The guidelines affect bridge design with the aim of: further facilitating the tasks to be performed by the bridge team and the pilot.… and to have continuous access to essential information, promoting effective and safe bridge resource management by:

− incorporating visual information as an integral part of the total information required for traffic

surveillance and navigation at a workstation facilitating equipment for manoeuvring

− enabling continuous look-out and the ability to take appropriate actions to avoid collision and carry out navigation functions from one working position

2.3 Regulation 24 Use of heading and/or track control systems 2.3.1 Purpose The regulation aims at ensuring that: − the steering mode can be safely changed from automatic to manual steering without delay at all

times under irregular operational conditions in order to reduce the risk of unintentional course alteration should a failure to the heading control or gyro compass system occur

− the manual steering system is functioning after long time use of automatic steering

2.3.2 Main requirements The regulation requires:

− instant availability of a qualified helmsman (rating or assisting officer)


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 19

− change-over operation to be performed by or under supervision* of a responsible officer (see comment under 2.3.3)

− function test of steering system

2.3.3 Areas affected by the regulation The regulation affects:

− arrangement of navigational equipment and − bridge procedures

with the aim of:

.1 facilitating the tasks to be performed…. .2 promoting effective and safe bridge resource management

by preventing loss of operational control of the steering

Note. *Ref. 2.3.2 The aims of .1 and .2 may be in conflict with the aims of .6, minimizing distractions and interfering with the vigilance of the bridge team and .7, minimizing the risk of human error.

− It may improve safety of operations if the change-over task always is carried out by the

officer in charge at his workplace. This avoids having several persons occupied with the same task, thereby, the risk of misunderstanding (human error) when more than one officer attend the bridge operations, and the helmsman need not be involved in the change-over. (Ref. the Torrey Canyon casualty)

− The technical means (normally a steering mode switch) for the change-over function

should be located for efficient use and to help avoid human error:

- within reach at the workstation for navigation and traffic surveillance - not accessible at the workstation for manual steering


.1 MSC Circ 982, (5.3) 2.4 Regulation 25 Operation of steering gear 2.4.1 Purpose The regulation aims at: − ensuring redundant power supply to the steering gear system in critical situations in order to

reduce the risk of the ship losing steering function, causing distress situations

2.4.2 Main requirements The regulation requires: − more than one steering power unit in operation


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 20

2.4.3 Areas affected by the regulation The regulation affects:

− arrangement of bridge equipment and − bridge procedures with the aim of:

.1 facilitating the task to be performed….


.1 MSC Circ. 982 (5.3.2.1) 2.5 Regulation 27 Nautical charts and nautical publications 2.5.1 Purpose The regulation aims at ensuring that: − the ship and the bridge personnel are provided with up-to-date nautical charts and publications

relevant for the waters to be navigated in order to reduce the risk of grounding 2.5.2 Main requirement The regulation requires that: − nautical charts and nautical publications, such as sailing directions, lists of lights, notices to

mariners, tide tables and all other nautical publications necessary for the intended voyage, shall be adequate and up to date

2.5.3 Area affected by the regulation The regulation affects:

− bridge procedures with the aim of:

.1 facilitating the task to be performed…. .3 enabling the bridge team and the pilot to have convenient and continuous access to essential information….

2.5.4 Relevant IMO references 2.6 Regulation 28 Records of navigational activities 2.6.1 Purpose The regulation aims at ensuring that:


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 21

− navigational activities leading to an incident, occurrence of system failures and information available to the bridge personnel during the voyage are recorded sufficiently detailed to enable restoring of data for the purpose of investigation, learning and avoidance of similar incidents

2.6.2 Main requirement The regulation requires: − that ships keep on board a record of navigational activities and incidents for the complete

voyage in accordance with “Guidelines for recording events related to navigation”, maintained in a log-book or in another form approved by the administration. (Ref. IMO Guidelines for recording events… + See also report from NAV 47)

2.6.3 Area affected by the regulation The regulation affects:

− arrangement of bridge equipment and − bridge procedures, aiming at:

.1 facilitating the task to be performed….


.1 MSC Circ 982 (5.3.2.1)


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 22

3. Summarizing table

Summarizing table for harmonization of regulations, aims and guidelines SOLAS Affecting Aims of regulation 15 References in Regulation Bridge

design Equip. design and arrang

Bridge proce dures

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 MSC 982

ISO IEC Main requirements

address: Purpose

Minimum equipment

installations Provide info + ctrls

safe operations X √ √ √ √ 4 Workstations (WS) Bridge functionality X √ 5.3 WS layout WS functionality X

√ 5.3 Equipment location Info needs

Effective operations X √ √ Indicate operation mode Situation awareness X √ 5.3 WS arrangement

availability of information Bridge functionality Situation awareness

X √ 5.1 5.2

Bridge layout Work environment

Reduce fatigue, distraction

19 Range of Equip-ment

X √ 5.4 Alarms Detect human error Situation awareness

Field of vision from positions in wheelhouse

Safe conning, steering, docking

X

√

√

5.1.1.1

Field of vision from workstations

Harmonising regulation req.’s and functions

X √ √ 5.1.2 Location of workstations

Harmonising functions and team operations

√ √ 5.1.3 Passageways Accessibility

22 Bridge

visibility

Redundancy-Testing Function reliability X √ 5.3.3 Availability of unit Safe operations X √ Availability of operator Manual operations X √ Testing System reliability

24 Heading/ Track ctrl.

systems


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 23

Summarizing table for harmonization of regulations, aims and guidelines

SOLAS Affecting Aims of regulation 15 References in Regulation Bridge

design Equip. design and arrang

Bridge proce dures

.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 MSC 982

ISO IEC Main requirements

address: Purpose

Redundancy (power supply)

System reliability

X √ 5.3.2.1 Logical location Availability X Engage additional power

line Safeguarding function

25 Steering

gear

Up-to-date info Avoid grounding 27

Charts X √ √ Access to essential info Safe operations

Recording of activities Restore voyage X √ √ 5.3.2.1 Logical location Availability X Safeguard performance Investigate

Learn

28

Recording


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 24

ANNEX 3

Regulation 22

HARMONIZATION WITH MSC/CIRC. 982


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 25

ANNEX 3 of APPENDIX 1

Regulation 22 and harmonization with MSC Circ. 982

Introduction The main difference between Regulation 22 “Navigation bridge visibility” and MSC /Circ. 982 “Guidelines on ergonomic criteria for bridge equipment and layout” is that the field of vision required from the conning position in Regulation 22 is required from the navigating and manoeuvring workstation in the Circular. The guidelines of MSC Circ.982 use the term “should” also for requirements where requirements of Regulation 22 use the term “shall”. For the reason of consistency, the term “shall”, is used also for guidelines which are harmonized with regulation 22. In the following, regulation 22 written in Italics with the alterations indicated by strikethrough and the additional text written in upright, represents the full wording of regulation 22 harmonized with chapter 5.1.1.1 “Field of vision” in MSC/Circ.982. Providing the required fields of vision from the relevant workstations in accordance with MSC Circ. 982, affecting bridge design, the arrangement of navigational systems and bridge procedures, has been regarded essential in meeting the aims of regulation 15 when applying the requirements of regulation 22. In accordance with the aims of regulation 15 pointing to MSC Circ 982 for the application of regulation 22, the harmonized version of this annex has been applied in the development of the IACS BDEAP standard. Note. The upgrading of the original requirements of SOLAS V/22 when regulation 22 is applied in accordance with the aims of SOLAS V/15 may call for a revision of regulation 22 .


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 26

Navigation bridge visibility 1 Ships of not less than 45 m in length as defined in regulation 2.4 of this chapter (SOLAS V) constructed on/or after 1 July 1998, shall meet the following requirements:

.1 The view of the sea surface from the conning position and the navigating

and manoeuvring workstation shall not be obscured by more than two ship lengths, or 500 m, whichever is the less, forward of the bow to 10° on either side under all conditions of draught, trim and deck cargo. (5.1.1.1.1)

There shall be a field of vision around the vessel of 360° obtained by an observer moving within the confines of the wheelhouse. (5.1.1.1.2)

.2 The safe look-out from the navigating and manoeuvring workstation shall not be influenced by blind sectors.

No blind sector caused by cargo, cargo gear or other obstructions outside

of the wheelhouse forward of the beam which obstructs the view of the sea surface as seen from the conning position and the navigating and manoeuvring workstation, shall exceed 10°. The total arc of blind sectors shall not exceed 20°. The clear sectors between blind sectors shall be at least 5°. Over an arc from right ahead to at least 10° on each side, each individual blind sector shall not exceed 5°. (5.1.1.1.7)

.3 The horizontal field of vision from the conning position and the navigating

and manoeuvring workstation shall extend over an arc of not less than 225°, that is from right ahead to not less than 22.5°, abaft the beam on either side of the ship. (5.1.1.1.3)

From the monitoring workstation, the field of vision shall extend at least over an arc from 90° on the port bow, through forward, to 22.5° abaft the beam on starboard. (5.1.1.1.4)

.4 From each bridge wing the horizontal field of vision shall extend over an arc of at least 225°, that is from at least 45° on the opposite bow through right ahead and then from right ahead to right astern through 180° on the same side of the ship. (5.1.1.1.5)

.5 From the main steering position (workstation for manual steering), the

horizontal field of vision shall extend over an arc from right ahead to at least 60° on each side of the ship. (5.1.1.1.6)


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 27

.6 The ship’s side shall be visible from the bridge wing. Bridge wings shall be provided out to the maximum beam of the ship. The view over the ship’s side shall not be obstructed. (5.1.1.1.8)

.7 The height of the lower edge of the navigation bridge front windows above

the bridge deck shall be kept as low as possible and allow a forward view over the bow for a person in a sitting position at the workstation for navigating and manoeuvring and the workstation for monitoring. In no case shall the lower edge present an obstruction to the forward view as described in this regulation. (5.1.1.2.1)

.8 The upper edge of the navigation bridge front windows shall allow a

forward view of the horizon, for a person in standing position with a height of eye of 1800 mm above the bridge deck at the conning position and at the navigating and manoeuvring workstation, when the ship is pitching in heavy seas. The Administration, if satisfied that a 1800 mm height of eye is unreasonable and impractical, may allow reduction of the height of eye, but not less than 1600 mm. (5.1.1.2.2)

.9 Windows shall meet the following requirements:

.9.1 To help avoid reflections, the bridge front windows shall be inclined from

the vertical plane top out, at an angle of not less than 10° and not more than 25°. (5.1.1.2.4) To help avoid reflections, rear and side windows shall be inclined from vertical plane top out, at an angle not less than 10° and not more than 25°. Exceptions can be made for windows in bridge wing doors. (5.1.1.2.5)

.9.2 Framing between navigation bridge windows shall be kept to a minimum

and not be installed immediately forward of any workstation, or the center-line. If stiffeners between windows are to be covered, this shall not cause further obstructions of the field of view from any position inside the wheelhouse. (5.1.1.2.3)

.9.3 Polarized and tinted windows shall not be fitted. (5.1.1.2.7) .9.4 At all times, regardless of weather conditions, at least two of the

navigation bridge front windows shall provide a clear view, and in addition, depending on the bridge configuration, an additional number of windows shall provide a clear view.

A clear view through at least two of the navigation bridge front windows

and, depending on the bridge configuration, an additional number of


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 28

clear-view windows shall be provided at all times, regardless of weather conditions. (5.1.1.2.8)

To ensure a clear view and to avoid reflections in bright sunshine, sunscreens with minimum colour distortion shall be provided at all windows. Such screens shall be readily removable and not permanently installed. (5.1.1.2.6)

2 Ships constructed before 1 July 1998 shall, where practicable, meet the requirements of paragraphs 1.1 and 1.2. However, structural alterations or additional equipment need not be required. 3 On ships of unconventional design which, in the opinion of the Administration, cannot comply with this regulation, arrangements shall be provided to achieve a level of visibility that is as near as practical to that prescribed in this regulation.


IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004 29

Clarification The extent of horizontal field of vision and the arc of blind sectors abaft the beam. The safe look-out from the navigating and manoeuvring workstation should not be influenced by blind sectors. Regulation 22 1.2 No blind sector caused by cargo, cargo gear or other obstructions outside of the

wheelhouse forward of the beam which obstructs the view of the sea surface as seen from the conning position and the navigating and manoeuvring workstation, shall exceed 10°. The total arc of blind sectors shall not exceed 20°. The clear sectors between blind sectors shall be at least 5°. Over an arc from right ahead to at least 10° on each side, each individual blind sector shall not exceed 5°. (5.1.1.1.7)

1.3 The horizontal field of vision from the conning position and the navigating and

manoeuvring workstation shall extend over an arc of not less than 225°, that is from right ahead to not less than 22.5°, abaft the beam on either side of the ship. (5.1.1.1.3)

Clarification and considerations In order to achieve the required field of vision of 225°, a clear sector of at least 5° must appear at the end of the sector on each side, meaning that:

at least two clear sectors of 5° are required within the sector of 22.5° abaft the beam, whereof one shall appear at the end on each side of the sector of 225°

Considerations The maximum blind sector of 10° accepted forward of the beam and the minimum acceptable clear sector of 5° between blind sectors are also considered applicable for the area abaft the beam. Blind sectors in this area are mostly caused by bulkheads, ventilator arrangements, bridge wing doors or unreasonable framing between windows. Regardless of what causes the blind sectors, the required clear sectors should be provided within the limits given seen from the working position at the workstation and from the conning position.

Appendix 2 to the IACS BDEAP standard

IACS Rev.0.1, Nov. 2004

TASKS AND RELATED MEANS

EXAMPLES OF LOCATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT



2

List of content

1 Table of tasks and related means for safe operations..............................................................3 2 Individual workplaces arranged for internal access ................................................................6 3 Redundant workstations ..........................................................................................................6



3

1 Table of tasks and related means for safe operations

Tasks and Means - Location Function/Tasks to be performed

Equipment to be operated

L Information to be viewed

L Remarks

Navigation – Grounding avoidance

L = Reference for location in console

Planning Paper chart/table Nautical publications DGPS

N1 N2

GPS Position

Plan route prior to departure Alter route while under way

ECDIS* ECDIS backup**

N3 N4

*Optional install. **If replacing paper

In Transit Monitor route-keeping: - Determine position by bearings - Read position on display - Plot position

Pelorus/gyro repeater* Radar DGPS Paper chart/table

N5 N6 N2 N1

*Analog. Bearings 360˚ around the horizon, (one on each bridge wing)

- Determine and plot position automatic

ECDIS

N3

Optional installation

Maintain route/alter course by - manual steering - using autopilot - automatic route-keeping

Manual steering ctrl Heading ctrl. system Track ctrl. system* (ECDIS)

M1 M2 M2A* NA2

*Alternative to head ctrl. Interfaced to ECDIS, gyro, speed, radar when part of INS

Give sound signals Whistle ctrl. C1 Fog - traffic Receive sound signals Sound reception syst. C2 Loudspeakers Enclosed bridge Monitor/Take action: - operational warnings - system failure alarms

Alarm panel

S1

- ship’s safety state Alarm systems S2 Monitor heading, turn, rudder angle, speed, propulsion

Gyro repeater Indicators: - rudder angle - rate-of-turn - RPM, Pitch - speed log

IM1 IM2 IM3 IM4M5

Adjust lighting Dimmer buttons L1 Monitor shallow water areas Echo Sounder system N10 Water depth IN1 (Anchoring) Monitor performance automatic route-keeping system

Conning info display

IA3 Organizing indicator info providing situation awareness when in automatic route-keeping mode

Effect internal communication Intercom (auto tlph.) C3 Effect external comm. VHF C4 Related to nav. Receive/send distress message GMDSS remote ctrl. C5 Traffic surveillance - Collision avoidance

T

Detect floating targets Analyse traffic situations Observe visually

Radar with ETP* (may incl. AIS) Binoculars Window wiper -cleaning - heating ctrl.

T1 Targets relative position, course, speed Expected passing distance Time

*Electronic target plotting (“historical” data)

Decide on collision avoidance measures

AIS (automatic identification system)

T2 Target true position, course, speed

Regarded additional info (means)

Manouevring M (For route-keeping)



4

Change steering mode Steering mode switch M0 Alter heading Heading ctrl. M2 Heading (Gyro) IM1 Observe rudder angle Rudder angle IM2 Override steering Override ctrl. M4 Manual steering ctrl. M1 Change speed Propulsion ctrl. M3 RPM/Pitch IM4 Give sound signals Whistle ctrl. C1 Receive sound signals Sound reception syst. C5 Loudspeaker IC5 Enclosed bridges

Paper chart/table DGPS

N1 N2

Radar with route and navigable waters

T1

Navigate back to route Maintain track of traffic

ECDIS* N3 *May replace paper Harbour manoeuvring Thruster M5 Owners specification Anchoring Manoeuvre Positioning (Identify anchor position)

Manual steering ctr. Propulsion ctr. (Thruster ctrl.) Radar Chart DGPS

M1 M3 M5 T1 N1 N2

Heading Rudder angle RPM/Pitch Water depth

IM1 IM2 IM4 IM6

Performed at front workstations or in combination with docking station. Information to be provided for Pilots.

Observe ship’s safety state Monitor alarm conditions: - Navigation alarms Equip. & system failures Operational warnings

Main alarm panel W/indicators and acceptance button

Alarm list

- Machinery alarms Alarm panel - Cargo alarms Alarm panel - Fire alarm Fire alarm panel Conning station Determine & direct course and speed in relation to waters and traffic

Monitor: - heading Gyro repeater IM1 Digital, readable 2 m - rudder angle Rudder angle IM2 - rate-of-turn RoT indicator IM3 - propulsion RPM/Pitch IM4 - speed Speed log IM5 - water depth Echo sounder

display IM6 Anchoring

Give sound signals Whistle ctrl. button Effect communication VHF Available Manual steering (Rating) Maintain, adjust, alter heading according to order

Steering ctrl. Intercom (Command)

M6 C6

Gyro repeater Magn. comp. Rudder angle Rate-of-turn

Safety operations Take action on alarm condition: - analyse situation - consult plans and drawings

Manuals - Drawings

Computer based info

- observe ship’s external operational situation

Cooperation with navigating officer

- organize and execute measures by communication - check status of ventilation

Intercom (UHF) Emergency stop



5

system Monitor development of alarm conditions

- Cargo alarms Alarm panel - Fire detection & alarms Fire detection and alarm

panel

- Gas & smoke detection External communication Distress - weather - safety GMDSS station C7 As required (Area) Determine weather conditions Consider nav. warnings

Navtex reciever

C8

Public correspondence Additional equipment Specified by owners Docking operations (bridge wings)

Directing steering Intercom (command) C6 Heading Rudder angle

IM1 IM3

Directing speed Intercom (command) C6 RPM/Pitch IM5 Giving sound signals Whistle control button C1 Receiving sound signals Sound reception syst, C2 Loudspeaker IC2 Enclosed bridge Perform manoeuvring Steering

Prop. ctrls Thruster ctrl.

M1 M3 M4

Additional install. by owners

Additional functions See B 2

N = Equipment for Navigation A = Indicating extended automation of function I = Information - indicators/displays for navigation T = Equipment for Traffic surveillance C = Communication means M = Means required for Manoeuvring functions



6

2 Individual workplaces arranged for internal access Example of location of main equipment in a centre console. Easy access to manoeuvring functions in standing position. Ref. clause C 3.3

3 Redundant workstations When all the means required for performance of navigation, traffic surveillance and manoeuvring are available at each of the two workplaces, a long centre console dividing the workstation may used.

IM1 IM2 IM3 IN1 IM4 IM5

Alarms

M5

IM1

M4

M5 M0

C3

T3 IA3 C5 IC2

C4 C3 C4

C2

M2/A1

M1

N8 T1

T4

N9

N7

N6

NA2

N8

S1

M3

IM1 IM2 IM3 IN1 IM4 IM5

S1

T3

C2

Alarms

IA3

M2/A1 M0 M1 M3 M4

IM1

M5

T1

T4

C5 IC2 N8 N9

NA2

S1

N6 N8 N9

NA2

SC 182

Bulk carriers not complying with SOLAS XII/9 as of 1 January 2004 (Chapter XII, Regulation 9)

Regulation (SOLAS XII/Reg. 9):

For bulk carriers being within the application limits of regulation 4.2, which have beenconstructed with an insufficient number of transverse watertight bulkheads to satisfythat regulation, the Administration may allow relaxation from the application ofregulations 4.2 and 6 and condition that they shall comply with the followingrequirements:

.1 for the foremost cargo hold, the inspections prescribed for the annual survey in the enhanced programme of inspections required by regulation XI/2 shall be replaced by the inspections prescribed therein for the intermediate survey of cargo holds;

.2 are provided with bilge well high water level alarms in all cargo holds, or in cargo conveyor tunnels, as appropriate, giving an audible and visual alarm on the navigation bridge, as approved by the Administration or an organization recognized by it in accordance with the provisions of regulation XI/1;and

.3 are provided with detailed information on specific cargo hold flooding scenarios. This information shall be accompanied by detailed instructions on evacuation preparedness under the provisions of Section 8 of the International Safety Management (ISM) Code and be used as the basis for crew training and drills.

Interpretation:

Bulk carriers subject to SOLAS XII/9 but which have not been brought into compliancewith XII/9 as of 1 January 2004 are to comply with XII/12 in accordance with thecompliance schedule of XII/12 (i.e not later than the date of the annual, intermediate orrenewal survey of the ship to be carried out after 1 July 2004, whichever comes first)as well as UI SC 180.

Note:

1. This UI SC 182 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January 2004.

SC182(Nov. 2003)(Corr 1,Dec 2003)

IACS Int. 2003/ Corr 1 2003

▼

182-1

▼

Endorsement of Certificates with the Date of Completion of the Survey on which theyare Based

The MSC/Circ. 1012 and MEPC/Circ. 384 read as follows:

1. The Maritime Safety Committee, at its seventy-fourth session (30 May to 8 June2001) and the Marine Environment Protection Committee, at its forty-sixth session (23to 27 April 2001), acknowledging that, in the process of transition to the HarmonizedSystem of Survey and Certification (HSSC) under the SOLAS, MARPOL and LoadLine Conventions, it has become evident that it is sometimes difficult on the pre-HSSCcertificates, and in certain cases not possible on certificates issued under the HSSC, tofind information on the date of completion of the survey on which the certificate inquestion and its validity is based, agreed that when the date of issue of a certificatedoes not correspond with the associated survey, all certificates should clearly indicatewhen the associated survey was completed. The primary purpose of this indication isto provide port State control officers and other parties with clear and unambiguous,information.

2. Conscious of the time needed to effect the appropriate amendments to the form ofthe certificates issued under the HSSC; realizing that any amendments to the form ofpre-HSSC certificates are no longer possible; and recognizing that it would beadvantageous for all the parties involved to provide in the certificates as soon aspossible, all the information that port State control officers may need, the Committeesinvited flag Administrations, in the interim and when appropriate, to endorse, orauthorize their recognized organizations to endorse, the relevant certificates with thefollowing words:

"Completion date of the survey on which this certificate is based: dd/mm/yy".

Interpretation

For application of this Circular the following IACS Unified Interpretation applies:

The Completion date of the survey on which this certificate is based, is the date of thelast survey visit on which all statutory and class items, required to be surveyed, havebeen surveyed (regardless if they were found satisfactory or with minor deficiency).

Note:

1. This UI is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 March 2004.

SC183(Nov 2003)

LL67(Nov 2003)

MPC10(Nov 2003)

SC 183

▼▼

IACS Int. 2003183-1

Machinery Installations —Dead Ship Condition

SOLAS Regulation II-1/26.4

Means shall be provided to ensure that machinery can be brought into operation fromthe dead ship condition without external aid.

Interpretation

Dead ship condition for the purpose of Regulation II-1/26.4, is to be understood tomean a condition under which the main propulsion plant, boilers and auxiliaries are notin operation and in restoring the propulsion, no stored energy for starting and operatingthe propulsion plant, the main source of electrical power and other essential auxiliariesis assumed to be available.

Where the emergency source of power is an emergency generator which complieswith Regulation II-1/44, SC185 and SC124, this generator may be used for restoringoperation of the main propulsion plant, boilers and auxiliaries where any powersupplies necessary for engine operation are also protected to a similar level as thestarting arrangements.

Where there is no emergency generator installed or an emergency generator does notcomply with Regulation II-1/44, the arrangements for bringing main and auxiliarymachinery into operation are to be such that the initial charge of starting air or initialelectrical power and any power supplies for engine operation can be developed onboard ship without external aid. If for this purpose an emergency air compressor or anelectric generator is required, these units are to be powered by a hand-starting oilengine or a hand-operated compressor. The arrangements for bringing main andauxiliary machinery into operation are to have capacity such that the starting energyand any power supplies for engine operation are available within 30 minutes of a deadship condition.

Note:


SC184(Dec 2003)

SC 184

IACS Int. 2003

▼▼

184-1

Starting Arrangements for EmergencyGenerating Sets


Emergency generating sets shall be capable of being readily started in their coldcondition at a temperature of 0 deg C. If this is impracticable, or if lower temperaturesare likely to be encountered, provision acceptable to the Administration shall be madefor the maintenance of heating arrangements, to ensure ready starting of thegenerating sets.

Interpretation (From MSC/Circ.736)

Emergency generating sets shall be capable of being readily started in their coldcondition at a temperature of 0 deg C. If this is impracticable, or if lower temperaturesare likely to be encountered, heating shall be provided to ensure ready starting of thegenerating sets.


Each emergency generating set arranged to be automatically started shall beequipped with starting devices approved by the Administration with a stored energycapability of at least three consecutive starts. A second source of energy shall beprovided for an additional three starts within 30 minutes unless manual starting can bedemonstrated to be effective.

Interpretation (From MSC/Circ.736)

Each emergency generating set arranged to be automatically started shall beequipped with starting devices with a stored energy capability of at least threeconsecutive starts. A second source of energy shall be provided for an additionalthree starts within 30 minutes unless manual starting can be demonstrated to beeffective.

Note:


SC185(Dec 2003)

SC 185

IACS Int. 2003

▼▼

185-1

Acceptable voltage variations in voltagewhen the emergency loads are suppliedfrom a battery via an electronicconverter/inverter(Reg.II-1/42.3.2.1, 42.4, 43.3.3.1 & 43.4 )

Reg.II-1/42.3.2.1

3.2 Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery, itshall be capable of:

.1 carrying the emergency electrical load without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the battery throughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage;

Reg.II-1/42.4

4. The transitional source of emergency electrical power required by paragraph 3.1.3shall consist of an accumulator battery suitably located for use in an emergency whichshall operate without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the batterythroughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage and beof sufficient capacity and so arranged as to supply automatically in the event of failureof either the main or emergency source of electrical power at least the followingservices, if they depend upon an electrical source for their operation:

4.1 For half an hour:

.1 the lighting required by paragraphs 2.1 and 2.2.

.2 all services required by paragraphs 2.3.1, 2.3.3 and 2.3.4 unless such services have an independent supply for the period specified from the accumulator battery suitably located for use in an emergency.

4.2 Power to operate the watertight doors, as required by regulation 15.7.3.3, but notnecessarily all of them simultaneously, unless an independent temporary source ofstored energy is provided. Power to the control, indication an alarm circuits arerequired by regulation 15.7.2 for half an hour.

Reg.II-1/43.3.3.1

3.3 Where the emergency source of electrical power is an accumulator battery, itshall be capable of:

.1 carrying the emergency electrical load without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the battery throughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage;

Note: This UI SC 186 is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates from 1 January2005.

▼

IACS Int. 2004186-1

SC186(May 2004)

SC 186

Reg.II-1/43.4

4 The transitional source of emergency electrical power where required by paragraph 3.1.3 shall consist of an accumulator battery suitably located for use in an emergency which shall operate without recharging while maintaining the voltage of the battery throughout the discharge period within 12% above or below its nominal voltage and be of sufficient capacity and shall be so arranged as to supply in the event of failure of either the main or the emergency source of electrical power for half an hour at least the following services if they depend upon an electrical source for their operation:

.1 the lighting required by paragraphs 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3.1. For this transitional phase, the required emergency electrical lighting, in respect of the machinery space and accomodaton and service spaces may be provided by permanently fixed, individual, automatically charged, relay operated accumulator lamps; and

.2 all services required by paragraphs 2.4.1, 2.4.3 and 2.4.4 unless such services have an independent supply for the period specified from an accumulator battery sutiably located for use in an emergency.

Interpretation:

Where the emergency and/or transitional emergency loads are supplied from a batteryvia an electronic converter or inverter the maximum permitted d.c voltage variationsare to be taken as those on the load side of the converter or inverter.

Where the d.c. is converted into a.c. the maximum variations are not exceed thosegiven in UR E5.

SC186cont

▼▼

IACS Int. 2004

SC 186

186-2

Electric steering gear overload alarm(Reg.II-1/30.3)

SOLAS Reg.II-1/30.3

Short circuit protection and an overload alarm be provided for circuits supplyingelectric or electrohydraulic steering gear motors. Protection against excess current,including starting current, if provided, is required to be for not less than twice the fullload current of the motor or circuit so protected, and is to be arranged to permit thepassage of the appropriate starting currents.

Interpretation:

Steering gear motor circuits obtaining their power supply via an electronic converter,e.g. for speed control, and which are limited to full load current are exempt from therequirement to provide protection against excess current, including starting current, ofnot less than twice the full load current of the motor. The required overload alarm is tobe set to a value not greater than the normal load1 of the electronic converter.

1 Normal load is the load in normal mode of operation that approximates as close as possible to the most severe conditions of normal use in accordance with the manufacturer s operating instructions.


▼

▼

SC187(May 2004)

▼

IACS Int. 2004

SC 187

SC 188

Segregation of Cargo Oil Tanks (Reg.II-2/4.5.1.1)

SOLAS Reg. II-2.4.5.1.1 reads:

"Pump-rooms, containing pumps and their accessories for ballasting those spacessituated adjacent to cargo tanks and slop tanks and pumps for oil fuel transfer shall beconsidered as equivalent to a cargo pump-room within the context of this regulationprovided that such pump-rooms have the same safety standard as that required forcargo pump-rooms.

Interpretation:

Pump-rooms intended solely for ballast transfer need not comply with the requirementsof regulation II-2/4.5.10. The requirements of regulation II -2/4.5.10 are only applicableto the pump-rooms where pumps for cargo, such as cargo pumps, stripping pumps,pumps for slop tanks, pumps for COW or similar pumps are provided. (MSC/Circ.1037).

Pump-rooms intended for fuel oil transfer need not comply with the requirements ofregulation II-2/4.5.10.

________________

Note: This UI is to be uniformly implemented from 1 July 2004.

SC188(May 2004)

▼ ▼

IACS Int. 2004188-1

High pressure oil fuel delivery lines on small engines (SOLAS chapter II-2, regulations 15.2.9 and 15.2.12

(Resolution MSC.31(63))

Regulation

SOLAS Regulations II-2/15.2.9 and 15.2.12 under MSC.31(63) read:

15.2.9 All external high-pressure fuel delivery lines between the high-pressure fuelpumps and fuel injectors shall be protected with a jacketed piping system capable ofcontaining fuel from a high-pressure line failure. A jacketed pipe incorporates an outerpipe into which the high-pressure fuel pipe is placed, forming a permanent assembly.The jacketed piping system shall include a means for collection of leakages andarrangements shall be provided for an alarm to be given of a fuel line failure.

15.2.12 Ships constructed before 1 July 1998 shall comply with the requirements ofparagraphs 2.9 to 2.11 not later than 1 July 2003, except that a suitable enclosure onengines having an output of 375 kW or less having fuel injection pumps serving morethan one injector may be used as an alternative to the jacketed piping system inparagraph 2.9.

Interpretation

1. Application

1.1 This interpretation applies to ships constructed before 1 July 1998.

1.2 The requirements of SOLAS regulation II-2/15.2.9 and 15.2.12 are applicable tointernal combustion engines installed in any area on board ships irrespective of serviceand location. These requirements do not apply to gas turbines.

1.3 Engines having a single cylinder, multi-cylinder engines having separate fuelpumps and those having multiple fuel injection pump units are included.

1.4 For the purpose of these regulations lifeboat engines are excluded.

2. Suitable enclosure

2.1 For engines of less than 375kW where an enclosure is fitted, the enclosure is tohave a similar function to jacketed pipes i.e., prevent spray from a damaged injectorpipe impinging on a hot surface.

SC189(May 2004)

SC 189

IACS Int. 2004

▼

189-1

___________________________

Note: This UI is to be uniformly implemented from 1 July 2004.

2.2 The enclosure is to completely surround the injection pipes except that existing"cold" engine surfaces may be considered as part of the enclosure.

2.3 All engine parts within the enclosure are to have a surface temperature notexceeding 220°C when the engine is running at its maximum rating.

2.4 The enclosure is to have sufficient strength and cover area to resist the effects ofhigh pressure spray from a failed fuel pipe in service, prevent hot parts from beingsprayed and restrict the area that can be reached by leaked fuel. Where the enclosureis not of metallic construction, it is to be made of non-combustible, non oil-absorbingmaterial.

2.5 Screening by the use of reinforced tapes is not acceptable as a suitableenclosure.

2.6 Where leaked oil can reach hot surfaces, suitable drainage arrangements are tobe fitted to enable rapid passage of leaked oil to a safe location which may be a draintank. Leaked fuel flow onto "cold" engine surfaces can be accepted, provided that it isprevented from leaking onto hot surfaces by means of screens or other arrangements.

2.7 Where the enclosure has penetrations to accommodate high pressure fittings,the penetrations are to be a close fit to prevent leakage.

SC 189

SC189(con t)

IACS Int. 2004

▼▼

189-2

IACS UI SC 190

Page 1 April 2004

April 2004

IACS Unified Interpretations (UI) SC 190

for

Application of SOLAS Regulation II-1/3-6 (Res MSC.134(76)) and Technical Provisions on

Permanent Means of Access (Res MSC.133(76))

Note:

This UI is to be applied by IACS Members and Associates when acting as a recognized organization, authorized by flag State Administrations to act on their behalf, unless otherwise advised, from 1 January 2005.

IACS UI SC 190

Page 1 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

1 Application

1.1 Except as provided for in paragraph 1.2, this regulation applies to oil tankers of 500 gross tonnage and over and bulk carriers, as defined in regulation IX/1, of 20,000 gross tonnage and over, constructed on or after 1 January 2005.

1.2 Oil tankers of 500 gross tonnage and over constructed on or after 1 October 1994 but before 1 January 2005 shall comply with the provisions of regulation II-1/12-2 adopted by resolution MSC.27(61).

Interpretation

Oil tankers:

Notwithstanding the definition of “oil tanker” in Reg.II-1/2.12, this regulation is only applicable to oil tankers having integral tanks for carriage of oil, which is contained in the definition of oil in Annex 1 of MARPOL 73/78. Independent oil tanks can be excluded.

Reg. II-1/3-6 is not normally applied to FPSO or FSO unless the Administration decides otherwise..

Technical Background

Permanent Means of Access (PMA) specified in the Technical Provision contained in Resolution MSC.133(76) is not specific whether it assumes application to integral cargo oil tanks or also to independent cargo oil tanks. ESP requirements of oil tankers have been established assuming the target cargo oil tanks are integral tanks. The PMA regulated under SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6 is for overall and close-up inspections as defined in regulation IX/1. Therefore it is assumed that the target cargo oil tanks are those of ESP, i.e. integral cargo tanks.

Reg. II-1/3-6 is applicable to FPSO or FSO if they are subject to the scope of ESP regulated by A744(18) as amended.

Ref.

SOLAS Reg. IX/1 and A.744 (18) as amended.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 2 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

2 Means of access to cargo and other spaces

2.1 Each space within the cargo area shall be provided with a permanent means of access to enable, throughout the life of a ship, overall and close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the ship’s structures to be carried out by the Administration, the company, as defined in regulation IX/1, and the ship’s personnel and others as necessary. Such means of access shall comply with the requirements of paragraph 5 and with the Technical provisions for means of access for inspections, adopted by the Maritime Safety Committee by resolution MSC.133(76), as may be amended by the Organization, provided that such amendments are adopted, brought into force and take effect in accordance with the provisions of article VIII of the present Convention concerning the amendment procedures applicable to the Annex other than chapter I.

Interpretation

Forepeak tanks on oil tankers and bulk carriers are to be addressed in the Technical Provisions as follows:

For fore peak tank with a depth of 6 m or more at the center line of the collision bulkhead a suitable means of access is to be provided for access to critical areas such as the underdeck structure, stringers, collision bulkhead and side shell structure.

Stringers of less than 6 m in vertical distance from the deck head or a stringer immediately above are considered to provide suitable access in combination with portable means of access.

In case the vertical distance between the deck head and stringers, stringers or the lowest stringer and the tank bottom is 6 m or more alternative means of access as defined in paragraph 9 of the Technical Provisions is to be provided.

Technical Background (Observation):

1) The third paragraph of Preamble of the Technical Provision contained in Annex of Resolution MSC.133(76) defines the ship structure referred to in SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6 on access to and within spaces in the cargo area of oil tankers and bulk carriers. Further it is defined that terms used in the Technical provisions have the same meaning as those defined in the 1974 SOLAS Conventions as amended, and in resolution A.744(18) as amended.

2) Definition of cargo area in SOLAS Reg. II-2/3.32 is cross-referenced in A.744(18) for oil tankers. However “cargo length area” is used for bulk carriers in A.744(18) for the relevant definition. This difference of terminology caused confusion for defining tanks or spaces, which are to be subject to the Technical provision.

3) Fore peak tanks have unique structural configurations and their means of access is addressed separately form other ballast tanks.

Ref. SOLAS Reg. II-2/3.32 and A.744(18)

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 3 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

2.2 Where a permanent means of access may be susceptible to damage during normal cargo loading and unloading operations or where it is impracticable to fit permanent means of access, the Administration may allow, in lieu thereof, the provision of movable or portable means of access, as specified in the Technical provisions, provided that the means of attaching, rigging, suspending or supporting the portable means of access forms a permanent part of the ship’s structure. All portable equipment shall be capable of being readily erected or deployed by ship’s personnel.

Interpretation:

1) Movable means of access was envisioned in place of the elevated passageways for the permanent means of access to deck transverse. No specific design has been proposed that is considered appropriate. However a door should be kept open for an innovative approach in the future for developing alternative means of access suitable for the purposes:

Alternate means of access should include but not be limited to such devices as:

.1 hydraulic arm fitted with a stable base

.2 wire lift platform.

.3 staging

.4 Rafting

.5 Robot arm or ROV

.6 Rope access

.7 Portable ladders more than 5 m long shall only be utilized if fitted with a mechanical

device to secure the upper end of the ladder

.8 other means of access, approved by and acceptable to the administration. Means for safe operation and rigging such equipment to and from, and within these spaces, must be clearly demonstrated in the PMA Manual.

2) Subject to acceptance as equivalent by the Administration, an unmanned robot arm, ROV’s and dirigibles with necessary equipment of the permanent means of access for overall and close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the deck head structure such as deck transverses and deck longitudinals of cargo oil tanks and ballast tanks. Such robot arm and equipment are to be capable of:

• safe operation in ullage space in gas-free environment;

• introduction into the place from an access hole of the deck plating.


Elevated passageways in particular for access to deck transverses and upper part of transverse bulkheads and longitudinal bulkheads are subject to structural damages due to

IACS UI SC 190

Page 4 April 2004

sloshing of liquid in the tank, corrosion and fatigue. Such damages would render the effective use of the permanent means of access when needed for survey and inspection of under deck structure.

Innovative approaches in particular a development of robot in place of elevated passageways are encouraged and it is considered worthwhile to provide the functional requirement for the innovative approach.

Ref.

►▼◄ SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

2.3 The construction and materials of all means of access and their attachment to the ship’s structure shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. The means of access shall be subject to survey prior to, or in conjunction with, its use in carrying out surveys in accordance with regulation I/10.

Interpretation:

Inspection

The PMA arrangements, including portable equipment and attachments, are to be periodically inspected by the crew or competent inspectors as and when it is going to be used to confirm that the PMAs remain in serviceable condition.

Procedures

1. Any authorised person using the PMA shall assume the role of inspector and check for obvious damage prior to using the access arrangements. Whilst using the PMA the inspector is to verify the condition of the sections used by close up examination of those sections and note any deterioration in the provisions. Should any damage or deterioration be found, the effect of such deterioration is to be assessed as to whether the damage or deterioration affects the safety for continued use of the access. Deterioration found that is considered to affect safe use is to be determined as “substantial damage” and measures are to be put in place to ensure that the affected section(s) are not to be further used prior effective repair.

2. Statutory survey of any space that contains PMA shall include verification of the continued effectiveness of the PMA in that space. Survey requirements of the PMA

IACS UI SC 190

Page 5 April 2004

shall not be expected to exceed the scope and extent of the survey being undertaken. If the PMA is found deficient the scope of survey should be extended as found appropriate.

3. Records of all inspections are to be established with specific requirements detailed in the ships Safety Management System. The record is to be readily available to persons using the PMAs and it is recommended that a copy be attached to the PMA Manual. The original records should include as a minimum the date of the inspection, the name and title of the inspector, a confirmation signature, the sections of PMA inspected, verification of continued serviceable condition or details of any deterioration or substantial damage found. A file of permits issued should be maintained for verification.


It is recognised that PMA is subject to deterioration in a long term due to corrosive environment and external forces from ship motions and sloshing of liquid contained in the tank. PMA therefore should be inspected at every opportunity of tank/space entry. The above interpretation is to be contained in a section of the PMA Manual.

Ref.

►▼◄

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

3 Safe access to cargo holds, cargo tanks, ballast tanks and other spaces

3.1 Safe access* to cargo holds, cofferdams, ballast tanks, cargo tanks and other spaces in the cargo area shall be direct from the open deck and such as to ensure their complete inspection. Safe access to double bottom spaces may be from a pump-room, deep cofferdam, pipe tunnel, cargo hold, double hull space or similar compartment not intended for the carriage of oil or hazardous cargoes.

* Refer to the Recommendations for entering enclosed spaces aboard ships, adopted by the Organization by resolution A.864(20).

Interpretation

Access to a double side skin space of bulk carriers may be either from a topside tank or

IACS UI SC 190

Page 6 April 2004

double bottom tank or from both.


Unless used other purposes, the double side skin space is to be designed as a part of a large U-shaped ballast tank and such space is to be accessed through the adjacent part of the tank, i.e. topside tank or double bottom/bilge hopper tank. Access to the double side skin space from the adjacent part rather than direct from the open deck is justified.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 7 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

3.2 Tanks, and subdivisions of tanks, having a length of 35 m or more shall be fitted with at least two access hatchways and ladders, as far apart as practicable. Tanks less than 35 m in length shall be served by at least one access hatchway and ladder. When a tank is subdivided by one or more swash bulkheads or similar obstructions which do not allow ready means of access to the other parts of the tank, at least two hatchways and ladders shall be fitted. Interpretation

A cargo oil tank of less than 35 m length without a swash bulkhead requires only one access hatch.


Ref.

►▼◄ SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

3.3 Each cargo hold shall be provided with at least two means of access as far apart as practicable. In general, these accesses should be arranged diagonally, for example one access near the forward bulkhead on the port side, the other one near the aft bulkhead on the starboard side.

Interpretation

N/A


Ref. Paragraph 19 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 8 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

4 Ship structure access manual 4.1 A ship’s means of access to carry out overall and close-up inspections and thickness measurements shall be described in a Ship structure access manual approved by the Administration, an updated copy of which shall be kept on board. The Ship structure access manual shall include the following for each space in the cargo area: .1 plans showing the means of access to the space, with appropriate technical

specifications and dimensions; .2 plans showing the means of access within each space to enable an overall inspection

to be carried out, with appropriate technical specifications and dimensions. The plans shall indicate from where each area in the space can be inspected;

.3 plans showing the means of access within the space to enable close-up inspections to be carried out, with appropriate technical specifications and dimensions. The plans shall indicate the positions of critical structural areas, whether the means of access is permanent or portable and from where each area can be inspected;

.4 instructions for inspecting and maintaining the structural strength of all means of access and means of attachment, taking into account any corrosive atmosphere that may be within the space;

.5 instructions for safety guidance when rafting is used for close-up inspections and thickness measurements;

.6 instructions for the rigging and use of any portable means of access in a safe manner;

.7 an inventory of all portable means of access; and

.8 records of periodical inspections and maintenance of the ship’s means of access.

Interpretation

As a minimum the English version should be provided

• The ship structure access manual is to contain at least the following two parts:

Part 1: Plans, instructions and inventory required by paragraphs 4.1.1 to 4.1.7 of Reg. II-1/3-6.;

Part 2: Form of record of inspections and maintenance, and change of inventory of portable equipment due to additions or replacement after construction

• The part 1 of plans, instruction and inventory is to be approved by the Administration or the Classification Societies recognised by the Administration.

• The part 2 of record of inspections and maintenance, etc. is be approved for its form only at new building.

• The following matters are to be addressed in the ship structure access manual:

1) The access manual should clearly cover scope as specified in the regulations for use by crews, surveyors and port state control officers..

2) Approval / re-approval procedure for Manual, i.e. any changes of the PMA, portable, movable or alternative means of access within the scope of the Regulation and the Technical Provisions are subject to review and approval by the Administration or by the classification societies recognised by the Administration.

IACS UI SC 190

Page 9 April 2004

3) Verification of PMA be part of safety construction survey for continued effectiveness of the PMA in that space which is subject to the statutory survey.

4) Inspection of PMA by the crew and/or a competent inspector of the company as a part of regular inspection and maintenance.

(See Interpretation for paragraph 2.3 of SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6)

5) Actions to be taken if PMA is found unsafe to use.

6) In case of use of portable equipment plans showing the means of access within each space indicating from where and how each area in the space can be inspected;

Model Section 5 “Inspection” of the access manual is to be developed addressing authorised use, permit to use system, inspection, and maintenance and repairs.


Ref.

►▼◄

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

4.2 For the purpose of this regulation “critical structural areas” are locations which have been identified from calculations to require monitoring or from the service history of similar or sister ships to be sensitive to cracking, buckling, deformation or corrosion which would impair the structural integrity of the ship.

Interpretation

1) Critical structural areas are to be identified by advanced calculation techniques for structural strength and fatigue performance, if available and feed back from the service history and design development of similar or sister ships.

2) Reference is to be made to the following publications for critical structural areas, where applicable:

- Oil tankers: Guidance Manual for Tanker Structures by TSCF; - Bulk carriers: Bulk Carriers Guidelines for Surveys, Assessment and Repair of Hull

Structure by IACS; - Oil tankers and bulk carriers: Resolution A744 (18) as amended.


These documents contain the relevant information for the present ship types. However identification of critical areas for new double hull tankers and double side skin bulk carriers of improved structural design would have to be made by structural analysis at design stage if available.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 10 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

5 General technical specifications 5.1 For access through horizontal openings, hatches or manholes, the dimensions shall be sufficient to allow a person wearing a self-contained air-breathing apparatus and protective equipment to ascend or descend any ladder without obstruction and also provide a clear opening to facilitate the hoisting of an injured person from the bottom of the space. The minimum clear opening shall not be less than 600 mm x 600 mm. When access to a cargo hold is arranged through the cargo hatch, the top of the ladder shall be placed as close as possible to the hatch coaming. Access hatch coamings having a height greater than 900 mm shall also have steps on the outside in conjunction with the ladder.

Interpretation

The minimum clear opening of 600 mm x 600 mm may have corner radii up to 100 mm maximum. The clear opening is specified in MSC/Circ.686 to keep the opening fit for passage of personnel wearing a breathing apparatus. In such a case where as a consequence of structural analysis of a given design the stress is to be reduced around the opening, it is considered appropriate to take measures to reduce the stress such as making the opening larger with increased radii, e.g. 600 x 800 with 300 mm radii, in which a clear opening of 600 x 600 mm with corner radii up to 100mm maximum fits.


The interpretation is based upon the established Guidelines in MSC/Circ.686.

Ref.

Paragraphs 9 of Annex of MSC/Circ.686.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 11 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

5.2 For access through vertical openings, or manholes, in swash bulkheads, floors, girders and web frames providing passage through the length and breadth of the space, the minimum opening shall be not less than 600 mm x 800 mm at a height of not more than 600 mm from the bottom shell plating unless gratings or other foot holds are provided. Interpretation

1) The minimum clear opening of not less than 600 mm x 800 mm may also includes an opening with corner radii of 300 mm.

2) Subject to verification of easy evacuation of injured person on a stretcher the vertical opening 850 mm x 620 mm with wider upper half than 600 mm , while the lower half may be less than 600 mm with the overall height not less than 850 mm is considered acceptable alternative to the traditional opening of 600 mm x 800 mm with corner radii of 300 mm..

3) If a vertical opening is at a height of more than 600 mm steps and handgrips are to be provided. In such arrangement it should be demonstrated that an injured person can be easily evacuated.


The interpretation is based upon the established Guidelines in MSC/Circ.686 and an innovative design in consideration of human body to easily access through the opening.

Ref.


►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 12 April 2004

SOLAS Reg.II-1/3-6

5.3 For oil tankers of less than 5,000 tonnes deadweight, the Administration may approve, in special circumstances, smaller dimensions for the openings referred to in paragraphs 5.1 and 5.2, if the ability to traverse such openings or to remove an injured person can be proved to the satisfaction of the Administration.”

Interpretation

N/A


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 13 April 2004

Technical Provision, Resolution MSC.133(76)

Preamble

It has long been recognised that the only way of ensuring that the condition of a ship’s structure is maintained to conform with the applicable requirements is for all its components to be surveyed on a regular basis throughout their operational life so as to ensure that they are free from damage such as cracks, buckling or deformation due to corrosion, overloading or contact damage and that thickness diminution is within established limits. The provision of suitable means of access to the hull structure for the purpose of carrying out overall and close-up surveys and inspections is essential and such means should be considered and provided for at the ship design stage.

Ships should be designed and built with due consideration as to how they will be surveyed by flag State inspectors and classification society surveyors during their in-service life and how the crew will be able to monitor the condition of the ship. Without adequate access, the structural condition of the ship can deteriorate undetected and major structural failure can arise. A comprehensive approach to design and maintenance is required to cover the whole projected life of the ship.

Interpretation N/A


Ref.

►▼◄


Preamble

3rd Paragraph

In order to address this issue, the Organization has developed these Technical provisions for means of access for inspections, intended to facilitate close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the ship’s structure referred to in SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6 on Access to and within spaces in the cargo area of oil tankers and bulk carriers.

Interpretation

To refer to the observation of “cargo area” in Reg. II-1/3-6.2.1.


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 14 April 2004


Definitions

Terms used in the Technical provisions have the same meaning as those defined in the 1974 SOLAS Convention, as amended, and in resolution A.744(18), as amended.

Interpretation

The following definitions other than those contained in A744(18) have been used for the interpretations:

1. Rung means the step of vertical ladder or step on the vertical surface.

2. Tread means the step of inclined ladder, or for vertical access opening.

3. Flight of an inclined ladder means the actual stringer length of an inclined ladder. For vertical ladders, it is the distance between the platforms.

4. Stringer means

a. the frame of a ladder; or

b. the stiffened horizontal plating structure fitted on side shell, transverse bulkheads and/or longitudinal bulkheads in the space. For the purpose of ballast tanks of less than 5 m width forming double side spaces, the horizontal plating structure is credited as a stringer that is installed to secure continuous 600 mm or more in width past side longitudinals or stiffeners on side shell or longitudinal bulkhead. Openings in the stringer plating ,if any, are to be arranged with safe guard rails or grid cover for not to impair safe passage on the stringer or safe access to each transverse web.

5. vertical ladder means the ladder of which inclined angle is 70 degrees and over up to 90

degrees. Vertical ladder shall not be skewed by more than 2 degrees.

6. Overhead obstructions mean the deck or stringer structure including stiffeners above the

means of access.

7. Distance below the deck head means the distance below the plating.


The definition of stringer as the horizontal structural member is defined in the context of Section 2 (Wing water ballast tanks of less than 5 m width forming double side space and their bilge hopper sections) of Table 1 – Means of access for oil tankers. This section is also referred to by paragraph 2.8 (Double skin side tanks) of Table 2 – Means of access for bulk carriers.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 15 April 2004


1 Structural members subject to the close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the ship’s structure referred to in SOLAS regulation II-1/ 3-6, except those in double bottom spaces, shall be provided with a permanent means of access to the extent as specified in table 1 and table 2, as applicable. For oil tankers and wing ballast tanks of ore carriers, rafting may be used in addition to the specified permanent means of access, provided that the structure allows for its safe and effective use.

Interpretation

The permanent means of access to a space can be credited for the permanent means of access for inspection.

For oil tankers and wing ballast tanks of ore carriers, approved alternative methods may be used in combination with the fitted permanent means of access, provided that the structure allows for its safe and effective use.


The Technical Provisions specify means of access to a space and to hull structure for carrying out overall and close up surveys and inspections. Requirements of PMA to hull structure may not always be suitable for access to a space. However if the PMA for access to a space can also be used for the intended surveys and inspections such PMA can be credited for the PMA for use for surveys and inspections.

Ref.

►▼◄ Technical Provision, Resolution MSC.133(76)

2 Elevated passageways, where fitted, shall have a minimum width of 600 mm and be provided with toe boards not less than 150 mm high and guard rails over both sides of their entire length. Sloping structure providing part of the access shall be of a non-skid construction. Guard rails shall be 1,000 mm in height and consist of a rail and intermediate bar 500 mm in height and of substantial construction. Stanchions shall be not more than 3 m apart.

Interpretation

1) Guardrail arrangement specified by the provisions of paragraphs (2) and (3) of Reg.25 in ICLL, i.e. guardrails of 1.0 m in height having intermediate rails such that lowest course is not more than 230mm with a 50 mm toe board and other courses are not more than 380mm is to be considered as an alternative to the toe boards and the guard rails

IACS UI SC 190

Page 16 April 2004

specified in TP.2.

2) Permanent means of access of the following configuration is to be considered as an alternative to the elevated passageways: The permanent means of access is integrated in the structure by means of wide longitudinals, on stiffened structural surfaces is to have a minimum clear width of 600 mm. The clear width may be minimum 450 mm for going around vertical webs. Guardrails is to be fitted over the open side of their entire length and is to be of substantial construction, 1,000 mm in height and consist of a rail and an intermediate bar at 500 mm in height. Stanchions is to be not more than 3 m apart

3) Height of toe board is to be measured from the surface of the passage way.

4) Slopping structures are structures that are sloped by 5 or more degrees from horizontal plane when a ship is in upright position at even-keel.

5) Guard rails are to be fitted on the open side. For stand alone passageways guard rails are to be fitted on both sides of these structures.

6) Discontinuous handrails and toe boards in way thereof are allowed provided the gap for both does not exceed 50 mm. The maximum distance between the adjacent stanchions across the handrail gaps is to be 350 mm.

7) Non-skid construction is such that the surface on which personnel walks provides sufficient friction to the sole of boots even the surface is wet and covered with thin sediment.

8) “Substantial construction” is taken to refer to the as designed strength as well as the residual strength during the service life of the vessel. Durability of passageways together with guard rails should be ensured by the initial corrosion protection and inspection and maintenance during services.

9) For guard rails, use of alternative materials such as GRP should be subject to compatibility with the liquid carried in the tank. Non-fire resistant materials should not be used for means of access to a space with a view to securing an escape route at a high temperature.

10) Requirements for resting platforms placed between ladders are equivalent to those applicable to elevated passageways.


1) The toe board fitted to the wide face plate of a deck transverse for an elevated passageway would easily trap sludge and sediment, which would likely cause difficulty for a safe use of the passageway. The interpretation in items 1) and 2) above provides practical solution for a safe use of the permanent means of access.

Ref. Paragraph 10 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 17 April 2004


3 Access to elevated passageways and vertical openings from the ship’s bottom shall be provided by means of easily accessible passageways, ladders or treads. Treads shall be provided with lateral support for the foot. Where the rungs of ladders are fitted against a vertical surface, the distance from the centre of the rungs to the surface shall be at least 150 mm. Where vertical manholes are fitted higher than 600 mm above the walking level, access shall be facilitated by means of treads and hand grips with platform landings on both sides.

Interpretation

If the vertical opening is at a height of more than 600 mm steps and handgrips are to be provided. In such an arrangement it should be demonstrated that an injured person can be easily evacuated.


Ref.

►▼◄ Technical Provision, Resolution MSC.133(76)

4 Tunnels passing through cargo holds shall be equipped with ladders or steps at each end of the hold so that personnel may easily cross such tunnels.

Interpretation

the tunnel would mean a shaft tunnel of a ship having a cargo hold aft of engine room.


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 18 April 2004


5 Permanent ladders, except for vertical ladders, which are fitted on vertical structures for close-up inspection or thickness measurement, shall be inclined at an angle of less than 70º. There shall be no obstructions within 750 mm of the face of the inclined ladder, except that in way of an opening this clearance may be reduced to 600 mm. The flights of ladders shall not be more than 9 m in actual length. Resting platforms of adequate dimensions shall be provided. Ladders and handrails shall be constructed of steel or equivalent material of adequate strength and stiffness and securely attached to the tank structure by stays. The method of support and length of stay shall be such that vibration is reduced to a practical minimum. In cargo holds, ladders shall be designed and arranged so that the risk of damage from cargo handling gear is minimized.

PMA for access to ballast tanks, cargo tanks and spaces:

For oil tankers:

1) Tanks and subdivisions of tanks having a length of 35 m or more: Inclined ladder or ladders are to be used for one of the access hatchways. For another, a vertical ladder may be used for access to a space where the vertical distance is 6 m or less between the deck and the stringer, between stringers, or between the deck or a stringer and the bottom of the space immediately below the entrance. In such a case where the vertical distance is more than 6 m but not exceeding 9 m vertical ladders comprising one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically and displaced to one side of the ladder may also be used for this purpose. The uppermost, entrance section from deck, of the vertical ladder of a tank should be vertical for 2.5 m measured clear of the overhead obstructions and comprises a ladder linking platform. It should be displaced to one side of a vertical ladder. However, the vertical ladder may be down to 1.6 m to 3 m below deck structure if it lands on longitudinal or athwartship permanent means of access fitted within that range.

2) For the other access hatchway of the tank or subdivisions of tanks, an inclined ladder or combination of ladders are to be used for access to the space. The uppermost, entrance section from deck, of the ladder should be vertical for 2.5 m to clear an overhead obstructions and comprises a landing platform and continued with an inclined ladder. However, the vertical ladder may be down to 1.6 m to 3 m below deck structure if it lands on longitudinal or athwartship permanent means of access fitted within that range. The flights of the inclined ladders are not to be more than 9 meters in actual length and normally not more than 6 m in vertical height. The lowermost section of the ladders may be vertical for the vertical distance not exceeding 2.5 m.

3) Tanks less than 35 m in length and served by one access hatchway an inclined ladder or combination of ladders are to be used to the space as specified in 2) above.

4) In double hull spaces of less than 2.5 m width the access to the space may be by means of vertical ladders that comprises one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more

IACS UI SC 190

Page 19 April 2004

than 6 m apart vertically and displace to one side of the ladder. The uppermost, entrance section, of the vertical ladder of a tank from deck should be vertical for 2.5 m measured clear of the overhead obstructions and comprises a ladder linking platform. However, the vertical ladder may be down to 1.6 m to 3 m below overhead structure if it lands on longitudinal or athwartship permanent means of access fitted within that range. Adjacent sections of ladder should be laterally offset from each other by at least the width of the ladder. (Paragraph 20 of MSC/Circ.686)

5) Access from deck to a double bottom space may be of vertical ladders through a trunk. The vertical distance from deck to a resting platform, between resting platforms or a resting platform and the tank bottom is not be more than 6 m unless otherwise approved by the Administration.

For bulk carriers:

1) A vertical ladder may be used as a means of access to topside tanks, where the vertical distance is 6 m or less between the deck and the longitudinal means of access in the tank, the stringer or the bottom of the space immediately below the entrance. The uppermost, entrance section from deck, of the vertical ladder of the tank should be vertical for 2.5 m measured clear of the overhead obstructions and comprises a ladder linking platform unless landing on the longitudinal means of access, the stringer or the bottom,

2) Unless allowed in 1) above, an inclined ladder or combination of ladders are to be used for access to a tank or a space where the vertical distance is greater than 6 m between the deck and a stringer immediately below the entrance, between stringers, or between the deck or a stringer and the bottom of the space immediately below the entrance.

3) In case of paragraph 2) above the uppermost, entrance section from deck, of the ladder should be vertical for 2.5 m clear of the overhead obstructions and connected to a landing platform and continued with an inclined ladder. The flights of the inclined ladders are not to be more than 9 meters in actual length. The height of the inclined ladder is normally not to be more than 6m The lowermost section of the inclined ladder may be vertical for a vertical distance not exceeding 2.5 m.

4) In double side skin spaces of less than 2.5 m width between top side tanks and bilge hopper tanks the access to the space may be by means of vertical ladders that comprises one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically and displace to one side of the ladder. Adjacent sections of ladder should be laterally offset from each other by at least the width of the ladder. (Paragraph 20 of MSC/Circ.686)

PMA for inspection of the vertical structure of oil tankers and of double side skin spaces of bulk carriers:

1) Vertical ladders provided for means of access to the space may be used for access for inspection of the vertical structure

2) Vertical ladders that are fitted on vertical structures for inspection should comprise one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically and displace

IACS UI SC 190

Page 20 April 2004

to one side of the ladder. Adjacent sections of ladder should be laterally offset from each other by at least the width of the ladder. (Paragraph 20 of MSC/Circ.686)

Obstruction distances

The minimum distance between the inclined ladder face and obstructions, i.e. 750 mm and, in way of openings, 600 mm specified in TP.5 is to be measured perpendicular to the face of the ladder.

Use of spiral ladders

A spiral ladder is considered acceptable as an alternative for inclined ladders. In this regard it is noted that the uppermost 2.5m may continue to be comprised of the spiral ladder and need not change over to vertical ladders. In such a case where it is not practicable to continue the spiral ladder within the uppermost 2.5m underneath the upper entrance such as cross deck or bottom or upper stool, a vertical ladder is to be used for that part. The design is to be according to recongnised International or National standards that are acceptable to the Administration.


• It is a common practice to use a vertical ladder from deck to the first landing to clear overhead obstructions before continuing to an inclined ladder or a vertical ladder displaced to one side of the first vertical ladder.

• As provided in paragraph 20 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686, vertical ladders are to comprise one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically. Therefore for the access to a space with the vertical distance not more than 6m between stringers or the lowest stringer and the bottom a vertical ladder can also be used safely.

• For narrow double hull spaces, i.e. less than 2.5 m width inclined ladders or vertical ladders may be installed with linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart.

Ref.

For vertical ladders: Paragraph 20 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686

For spiral stairways: AMSA Marine Orders Part 32, Appendix 17:

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 21 April 2004


6 The width of ladders between stringers shall not be less than 400 mm. The treads shall be equally spaced at a distance apart, measured vertically, of between 250 mm and 300 mm. When steel is used, the treads shall be formed of two square bars of not less that 22 mm by 22 mm in section, fitted to form a horizontal step with the edges pointing upward. The treads shall be carried through the side stringers and attached thereto by double continuous welding. All sloping ladders shall be provided with handrails of substantial construction on both sides fitted at a convenient distance above the treads.

Interpretation

1) Vertical height of handrails is not to be less than [890] mm from the center of the step and two course handrails are to be provided.

2) The requirement of two square bares for treads specified in TP 6 is based upon the specification of construction of ladders in paragraph 3(e) of Annex 1 to Resolution A.272(VIII), which addresses inclined ladders. TP.3 allows for single rungs fitted to vertical surfaces, which is considered for a safe grip. For vertical ladders, when steel is used, the treads should be formed of single square bars of not less than 22 mm by 22 mm for the sake of safe grip.

3) The width of inclined ladders for access to a cargo hold is to be at least 450 mm to comply Australian AMSA Marine Orders Part 32, Appendix 17.

4) The width of inclined ladders other than an access to a cargo hold is to be not less than 400 mm.

5) The minimum width of vertical ladders is to be 350 mm and the pitch of the treads is to be equal and is to be between 250 mm and 300 mm.

6) A minimum climbing clearance in width is to be 600 mm other than the ladders placed between the hold frames.

7) The vertical ladders should be secured at intervals not exceeding 2.5 m apart to prevent vibration.


• TP.6 is a continuation of TP.5, which addresses inclined ladders. Interpretations for vertical ladders are needed based upon the current standards of IMO, AMSA or the industry.

• Interpretations 2) and 5) address vertical ladders based upon the current standards.

• Double square bars for treads become too large for a grip for vertical ladders and

IACS UI SC 190

Page 22 April 2004

single treads facilitate a safe grip.

• Interpretation 7) is introduced consistently with the requirement and the interpretation of TP 3.

Ref.

• Annex 1 to Resolution A.272(VIII)

• Australian AMSA Marine Orders Part 32, Appendix 17

• ILO Code of Practice “Safety and Health in Dockwork” – Section 3.6 Access to Ship’s Holds

►▼◄


7 No free-standing portable ladder shall be more than 5 m long.

Interpretation

N/A


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 23 April 2004


8 Portable ladders more than 5 m long may only be utilized if fitted with a remotely controlled mechanical device to secure the upper end of the ladder.

Interpretation

A mechanical device such as hooks for securing at the upper end of a ladder is considered as an alternative to a remotely controlled mechanical device stipulated in TP 8 if a movement fore/aft and sideways can be prevented at the upper end of the ladder.


Innovative design is to be accepted if it fits for the functional requirement with due consideration for safe use.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 24 April 2004


9 Movable means of access includes such devices as: .1 hydraulic arm fitted with a stable base and with local control at the safety cage. The

operational conditions should be in accordance with applicable safety requirements of the manufacturer; and


Interpretation

Alternative means of access includes but not limited to such devices as:

.1 hydraulic arm fitted with a stable base;


.3 staging

.4 Rafting

.5 Robot arm or ROV

.6 Rope access

.7 Portable ladders more than 5 m long may only be utilized if fitted with a mechanical device to secure the upper end of the ladder

.8 other means of access, approved by and acceptable to the Administration.



Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 25 April 2004


10 For bulk carriers, access ladders to a cargo hold shall be: .1 where the vertical distance between the upper surface of adjacent decks or between

deck and the bottom of the cargo space is not more than 6 m, either a vertical ladder or an inclined ladder; and

.2 where the vertical distance between the upper surface of adjacent decks or between deck and the bottom of the cargo space is more than 6 m, an inclined ladder or ladders, except the uppermost 2.5 m of a cargo space measured clear of overhead obstructions and the lowest 6 m may have vertical ladders, provided that the vertical extent of the inclined ladder or ladders connecting the vertical ladders is not less than 2.5 m.

Interpretation 1) Either a vertical or an inclined ladder or a combination of them may be used for access

to a cargo hold where the vertical distance is 6 m or less from the deck to the bottom of the cargo hold.

2) An inclined ladder or a combination of ladders are to be used for access to a cargo hold where the vertical distance is more than 6 m. The uppermost, entrance section, of the ladder directly exposed to a cargo hold should be vertical for 2.5 m measured clear of overhead obstructions, connected to a landing platform and continued with an inclined ladder system. The flights of the inclined ladders are not to be more than 9 meters in actual length. The lowermost section of the combination of ladders may be vertical for the vertical distance not exceeding 6 m, provided that the vertical extent of the inclined ladder or ladders connecting the vertical ladders is not less than 2.5 m.

3) Spiral stairways are considered acceptable as an alternative for providing access to the cargo holds. In this regard it is noted that the uppermost 2.5m and lowermost 6m may continue to be comprised of the spiral stairways and need not change over to vertical ladders. In such a case where it is not practicable to continue the spiral stairways within the uppermost 2.5m underneath the upper entrance such as cross deck or bottom or upper stool, a vertical ladder may be used for that part. The design is to be according to recongnised International or National standards that are acceptable to the Administration.

4) One of the two means of access required by SOLAS Reg. 3-6-3.3 for each cargo hold is to comply with paragraph 10.2 of the technical Provisions.

IACS UI SC 190

Page 26 April 2004

Technical Background for items 4) and 5)

Present bulk carriers have two independent means of access to a cargo hold, the design of which is in compliance with the Australian requirements. Practical problems have been envisioned for inclined ladders in existing bulk carriers. Inclined ladders including spiral ladders are more prone to cargo damages than staggered vertical ladders unless properly protected by bulkheads. It is desirable therefore that the PMA for a cargo hold are provided in two different types, one inclined ladder system and the other more robust ladder system that has been proven in existing bulk carriers with a view to minimizing possibility of damages to and consequential loss of means of access to a cargo hold at the same time due to a cargo damage during voyages and/or during cargo handling in ports. Such damages to both of the means of access to a cargo hold result in difficulty in accessing for repairs of the PMA.

Ref.


►▼◄ Table 1 – Means of access for oil tankers, Resolution MSC.133(76)

1 Water ballast tanks, except those specified in the right column, and cargo oil tanks

Access to overhead structure

1.1 For tanks of which the height is 6 m and over, permanent means of access shall be provided in accordance with .1 to .3:

Interpretation

1) Section 1 of Table 1 is also to be applied to void spaces in cargo area, except those spaces covered by Section 2.

2) Where a permanent means of access is provided adjacent to hull structure forming a wall on one side, guard rails are to be fitted on the open side of the permanent means of access (ref. to the degree of slope).

3) The vertical distance below the overhead structure is to be measured from the underside of the main deck plating to the top of the platform of the means of access at

IACS UI SC 190

Page 27 April 2004

a given location.

4) The height of the tank is to be measured at each tank. For a tank the height of which varies at different bays item 1.1 is to be applied to such bays of a tank that have height 6 m and over.


Item 1) The guard rails are to be arranged such that the person on the permanent means of access is well protected on the free edge.

Item 3) If the height of the tank is increasing along the length of a ship the permanent means of access is to be provided locally where the height is above 6 m.

Ref.

Paragraph 10 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686.

►▼◄

Table 1 – Means of access for oil tankers, Resolution MSC.133(76)

1.1.1 continuous athwartship permanent access arranged at the transverse bulkheads and at every deck transverse, at a minimum of 1.8 m to a maximum of 2.5 m below the overhead structure. If the access is fitted on the side of the unobstructed side of the web plating, then lightening holes of at least 300 mm diameter shall be fitted in the web plating, providing access adjacent to both sides of each tripping bracket;

Interpretation

1) Permanent means of access for inspection specified in 1.1.1 is to be provided for transverse bulkheads of tanks on stiffened surface.

2) When deck stiffeners are fitted outside of the tank and bulkhead connection to deck is plate to plate with no stiffeners or brackets inside the tank, then a continuous athwartship access may not be required.

3) Also, continuous athwartship permanent access may not be fitted at deck transverses for an overhead structure where deck stiffeners and transverses fitted on the out side surface of deck plating of the tank.

4) In such a case where the depth of deck transverses is less than 1800mm for design

IACS UI SC 190

Page 28 April 2004

scantling and the athwartship permanent access is to be fitted to the deck transverses the required distance of 1.8 to 2.5m below the overhead structure is provided above the permanent means of access by an extension.

5) Alternatively the depth of deck transverses is to be extended so that the required distance below overhead structure is provided above the extended face plate of the deck transverses.

(Operational safety measures should be detailed in an access manual.)


• Interpretation item 2): The PMA is intended for access to internal structures. In such a case where internal structures are entirely outside of the tank PMA becomes superfluous as long as deck plating and upper part of bulkhead plating are accessible outside of the tank.

• The longitudinal permanent means of access in the upper part of the longitudinal bulkheads allows overall inspection of deck transverses and close up surveys of their potential critical areas in the vicinity of their ends.

Ref.

►▼◄


1.1.2 at least one longitudinal permanent means of access at a minimum of 1.8 m to a maximum of 2.5 m below the overhead structure. Where the longitudinal bulkhead contains attached framing, the access shall be provided at that side; and

Interpretation

1) Longitudinal permanent means of access is to be provided on each side of the tank if an alternative arrangement is applied in place of the continuous athwartship permanent means of access at every deck transverse.

2) For tanks with no internal stiffeners arranged in top of the longitudinal bulkheads on either side or in deck, no longitudinal permanent access are to be provided unless required by item 1.1.3 of Table 1. This will typically apply to product tankers with webframes on deck and corrugated longitudinal bulkhead.

3) In case there are vertical webs and stiffeners on longitudinal bulkheads both sides

IACS UI SC 190

Page 29 April 2004

within the tank a longitudinal permanent means of access is to be provided to each side of the tank.


Critical areas for ESP are normally found in load bearing internals. In a tank with flush internal surfaces without load bearing internals condition of plates of the flush surfaces can be assessed from the easily accessible locations outside the tank. It is therefore considered that the permanent means of access would be of little use for the intended inspections.

However those longitudinal permanent means of access suggested above as an alternative arrangement provides sufficient overall inspection of under deck structure, deck transverses and vertical webs in way of the permanent means of access and is considered efficient for the intended purposes.

Ref.


1.1.3 access between the arrangements specified in .1 and .2 and from the main deck to either .1 or .2.

Interpretation

Means of access to tanks may be used for access to the permanent means of access for inspection.


As a matter of principle, in such a case where the means of access can be utilised for the purpose of accessing structural members for inspection there is no need of duplicated installation of the PMA.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 30 April 2004


Access to vertical structures

1.3 For tanks of which the height is 6 m and over, containing internal structures, permanent means of access shall be provided to each transverse web.

Interpretation

1) ‘Transverse web” includes vertical structures of non-watertight transverse bulkheads (swash bulkheads).

2) .A combination of vertical ladders on transverse webs and alternate means as may be provided for small vessels.

4) Center and side struts (cross ties) are included as part of the ring web frame and PMA is to be provided for struts if they are at 6 m or more above the tank bottom to the extent necessary for visual inspection at a reasonable vicinity to toes of end brackets.

5) For tanks of which the height is 6 m and over, containing internal structures such as longitudinals and transverse webs, permanent means of access are to be provided to the transverse webs by means of longitudinal permanent means of access which are integrated in the structural member, which are to be in alignment with horizontal girders of transverse bulkheads.


• Though the types of permanent means of access to each transverse web are not specified in paragraph 1.3 of Table 1, inclined ladders or vertical ladders would meet the requirement. In large tankers inspection of all transverse webs by climbing up and down the ladders would not be an efficient way of overall and close-up. Alternative arrangement by use of longitudinal permanent means of access is preferred. They are to be provided in alignment with horizontal girders of transverse bulkheads for structural continuation and appropriate distance between them.

• Where the longitudinal permanent means of access is impracticable for smaller vessels a combination of vertical ladders on transverse webs and alternate means as may be provided.

• The longitudinal permanent means of access using wider longitudinals at an appropriate distance apart through transverse webs provide sufficient access for overall inspection and sampling and, if necessary, alternative means of access or portable means of access can be used to access the remaining part of the transverse webs. Such arrangement is considered an acceptable alternative.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 31 April 2004


1.4 For tanks of which the height is less than 6 m, raft or portable means may be utilized in lieu of the permanent means of access.

Interpretation

Alternative means of access may also be used in place of raft.


Ref.

►▼◄

Table 1 - Means of access for oil tankers, Resolution MSC.133(76)

FOREPEAK TANKS

Interpretation Fore peak tanks with a depth of 6 m or more at the center line of the collision bulkhead shall be provided with a suitable means of access for access to critical areas such as the deck structure, overhead structure of stringers and side shell structure.

Stringers of less than 6 m in vertical distance from the overhead structure are considered to provide suitable access in combination with portable means of access.

In case the vertical distance between deck structure and the uppermost stringer or stringers are 6 m or more alternative means of access is to be provided.


The unique structural configurations and feed back information form service record as well as the present requirements for coating and surveys has been taken into account for identifying the types of damages and locations for enabling risk based inspections.

Ref

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 32 April 2004


2 Wing water ballast tanks less than 5 m width forming double side spaces and their bilge hopper sections

Access to the overhead structure

2.1 Where the vertical distance between horizontal upper stringer and deck head exceeds 6 m, one continuous permanent means of access shall be provided for the full length of the tank with a means to allow passing through transverse swash bulkheads installed a minimum of 1.8 m to a maximum of 2.5 m from the overhead structure with a vertical access ladder at each end and mid-span of tank.

Interpretation

1) Section 2 of Table 1 is also to be applied to wing tanks designed as void spaces.

2) For a tank the vertical distance between horizontal upper stringer and deck head of which varies at different sections item 2.1 is to be applied to such sections that falls under the criteria.

3) The continuous permanent means of access may be a wide longitudinal, which provides access to critical details on the opposite side by means of platforms as necessary on webframes In case the vertical opening of the web is located in way of the open part between the wide longitudinal and the longitudinal on the opposite side, platforms shall be provided on both sides of the web to allow safe passage through the web.


Item 1) Reg. II-1/3-6.2.1 requires each space within the cargo area shall be provided with a permanent means of access. Though void spaces are not addressed in the technical provisions contained in Resolution MSC.133(76) it is arguable whether PMA is not required in void spaces. PMA or portable means of access are necessary arrangement to facilitate inspection of the structural condition of the space and the boundary structure. Therefore the requirements of Section 2 of Table 1 is to be applied to double hull spaces even designed as void spaces.

Item 2) The interpretation of varied tank height in item 1 of Table 1 is applied to the vertical distance between horizontal upper stringer and deck head for consistency.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 33 April 2004


2.2 For bilge hopper sections of which the vertical distance from baseline to the upper knuckle point is 6 m and over, one longitudinal permanent means of access shall be provided for the full length of the tank. It shall be accessible by vertical permanent means of access at both ends of the tank.

Interpretation

1) The longitudinal continuous permanent means of access may be installed at a minimum 1.6 m to a maximum 3 m from top of bilge hopper section. When extension platform is arranged on the web, allowing hands on access to critical areas in upper knuckle point of bilge section, then the requirement to vertical ladder for access to these, as given in 2.5.1, will not apply.

2) Alternatively the longitudinal continuous permanent means of access may be installed at a minimum of 1.2 m to a maximum of 1.8 m below the top of the clear opening of the web ring in way of the knuckle point allowing a use of portable means of access to reach identified structural critical areas.

3) The longitudinal continuous permanent means of access may otherwise be installed at a location within 6 m from the knuckle point if used in combination with alternative methods to gain an access to the knuckle point.

4) Permanent means of access between the longitudinal continuous permanent means of access and the bottom of the space is to be provided.

5) The height of a bilge hopper tank located outside of the parallel part of vessel is to be taken as the maximum of the clear vertical distance measured from the bottom plating to the hopper plating of the tank.

6) The foremost and aftmost bilge hopper ballast tanks with raised bottom, of which the height is 6 m and over, a combination of transverse and vertical PMA for access to the upper knuckle point for each transverse web is to be accepted in place of the longitudinal permanent means of access.


Interpretation 4): The bilge hopper tanks at fore and aft of cargo area narrow due to raised bottom plating and the actual vertical distance from the bottom of the tank to hopper plating of the tank is more appropriate to judge if a portable means of access could be utilized for the purpose.

Interpretation 5): in the foremost or aftmost bilge hopper tanks where the vertical distance is 6 m or over but installation of longitudinal permanent means of access is not practicable permanent means of access of combination of transverse and vertical ladders provides an alternative means of access to the upper knuckle point.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 34 April 2004


2.3 Where the vertical distance referred to in 2.2 is less than 6 m, portable means of access may be utilised in lieu of the permanent means of access. To facilitate the operation of the portable means of access, in-line openings in horizontal stringers should be provided. The openings should be of an adequate diameter and should have suitable protective railings.

Interpretation N/A Technical Background Ref.

►▼◄


2.4 Whenever practicable, the distance between the overhead structure and the uppermost longitudinal stringer and between the longitudinal stringers should not exceed 6 m.

Interpretation

1) Longitudinal permanent means of access installed in accordance with paragraph 2.1 in the upper most space and at a vertical distance not exceeding 6 m within the remaining part of the double side spaces provide access to the overhead structure as well as to the vertical structure. Plated stringers are to be provided in alignment with horizontal girders of transverse bulkheads for structural continuity.The maximum distance between the deck head and the uppermost plated stringer and between the longitudinal plated stringers in any case is not to exceed 9 m.

Stringer in the context of Section 2 of Table 1 is taken to be a horizontal structure that is extended from side shell plating to a longitudinal bulkhead and provides passage of clear width of 600 mm or more. It may be a plating construction with stiffeners or a build up construction with wide longitudinals, which serves as longitudinal permanent means of access.


1) The functional purposes of the permanent means of access are to enable to monitor the condition of the ship and to facilitate close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the ship’s structure, The plating stringers or the build-up stringers installed not exceeding 6m apart vertically provide access to underdeck structures and overhead and vertical structures above the permanent means of access, thus satisfy the technical provision of items 2.1, 2.4 and 2.5 of Table 1.

Ref.

IACS UI SC 190

Page 35 April 2004


Access to the vertical structure

2.5 Vertical permanent means of access shall be provided to each transverse web in the following cases where the vertical distance is 6 m and over: .1 from baseline to the upper knuckle point of the bilge hopper section; .2 from the upper knuckle point of the bilge hopper section to main deck where no

horizontal stringers are provided; and .3 between horizontal stringers. Interpretation 1) PMA for inspection of the vertical structure: (See the interpretation of stringers

item 2.4 of Table 1) 2) Means for facilitating a use of a portable means of access for inspection of the upper

part of transverse web is to be provided, where the vertical distance defined in paragraph 2.5 is less than 6 m and vertical PMA is not provided.

3) Vertical ladders that are fitted on vertical structures for inspection should comprise one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically and displace to one side of the ladder. Adjacent sections of ladder should be laterally offset from each other by at least the width of the ladder. (Paragraph 20 of MSC/Circ.686) (Extract from the interpretation of TP.5)

4) Continuous longitudinal permanent means of access as required for deck area in 2.1 is acceptable as alternative to vertical means of access on every vertical web when distance between the longitudinal continuous permanent means is not exceeding 6 m..

5) The continuous longitudinal permanent means of access are to provide access to critical details on the opposite side by means of platforms fitted on web frames as necessary In case the vertical opening of the web is located in way of the open part between the longitudinal permanent means of access and a longitudinal on the other side of the space, platforms are to be provided on both sides of the web to allow safe passage through the web.

6) The height of a bilge hopper tank located outside of the parallel part of vessel is to be taken as the maximum of the clear vertical height measured from the bottom plating to the hopper plating of the tank.

Technical Background 1) As provided in the interpretation for paragraph 2.4 of Table 1, the longitudinal

permanent means of access described therein facilitate access from the stringers to critical areas of vertical structure, i.e. transverse web and joining parts of longitudinals. Portable means of access is to be used for the higher area between the adjacent longitudinal permanent means of access which are spaced not exceeding 6m apart.

2) The interpretation of paragraph 2.5.above is in the same vein of the alternative means of access for paragraph 1.3 of Table 1, i.e. the horizontal permanent means of access in place of inclined or vertical ladders to transverse webs.

Ref.

IACS UI SC 190

Page 36 April 2004


2.6 Access holes within 600 mm of the stringer shall be provided in each transverse web/swash bulkhead above each stringer and tank base.

Interpretation

If the vertical opening is at a height of more than 600 mm steps and handgrips are to be provided. In all cases it should demonstrated that an injured person can be easily evacuated.


SOLAS Reg. II-1/3-6.5.2 allows vertical openings higher than 600 mm from the bottom shell plating if gratings or other foot holds are provided. The above interpretation aimed at a consistency with the Regulation.

Ref.

►▼◄


2.7 In the case where the vertical distance referred to in 2.5 is less than 6 m, portable means may be utilised in lieu of the permanent means of access.

Interpretation

The interpretation of paragraph 2.2 of Table 1 refers.


Ref.

IACS UI SC 190

Page 37 April 2004

►▼◄ Table 2 – Means of access for bulk carriers, Resolution MSC.133(76)

Arrangement of means of access for single side skin bulk carriers as written in the Technical Provisions.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 38 April 2004

Table 2 – Means of access for bulk carriers, Resolution MSC.133(76)

1 Cargo holds


1.1 At least 3 permanent means of access shall be fitted to provide access to the overhead structure at both sides of the cross deck and in the vicinity of the centreline. Each means of access shall be accessible from the cargo hold access or directly from the main deck and installed at a minimum of 1.8 m to a maximum of 2.5 m below the deck.

Interpretation

1) Interconnected means of access under the cross deck for access to three locations at both sides and in the vicinity of the centerline is acceptable as the three means of access.

2) Permanent means of access fitted at three separate locations accessible independently, one at each side and one in the vicinity of the centerline is acceptable.

3) Athwartship permanent means of access fitted on transverse bulkheads from side to side at a minimum 1.6 m to a maximum 3 m below the deck head is considered as an alternative to the requirement.

4) Access to the means of access to overhead structure of cross deck may be via the upper stool.

5) Attention is to be paid to the structural strength where any access opening is provided in the main deck or cross deck.

6) The requirements for bulk carrier cross deck structure is also considered applicable for ore carriers.


Pragmatic arrangements of the PMA are provided.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 39 April 2004


1.2 Alternatively, movable means of access may be utilized for access to the overhead structure of cross deck if its vertical distance is 17 m or less above the tank top.

Interpretation

1) The movable means of access to the underdeck structure of cross deck need not necessarily be carried on board the vessel. It is sufficient if it is made available when needed.

2) The requirements for bulk carrier cross deck structure is also considered applicable for ore carriers.


Ref.

►▼◄



1.3 Permanent means of vertical access shall be provided in all cargo holds and built into the structure to allow for an inspection of a minimum of 25 % of the total number of hold frames port and starboard equally distributed throughout the hold including at each end in way of transverse bulkheads. But in no circumstance shall this arrangement be less than 3 permanent means of vertical access fitted to each side (fore and aft ends of hold and mid-span). Means to readily secure safety cages to the permanent means of access shall be provided. Permanent means of vertical access fitted between two adjacent hold frames is counted for an access for the inspection of both hold frames. A means of portable access may be used to gain access over the sloping plating of lower hopper ballast tanks.

Interpretation

1) For practical reasons a single vertical ladder (not staggered ones) is accepted for the inspection of the hold side frames in a single side skin construction.

2) The minimum width of vertical ladders for access to hold frames is to be 350 mm measured between stringers and the maximum pitch of the treads is to be 350 mm..

3) For double side skin bulk carrier no vertical ladders for inspection of the cargo hold surfaces are to be provided. Inspection of this structure is to be provided from within the

IACS UI SC 190

Page 40 April 2004

double hull space.

4) Safety cage in the context of item 1.3 of Table 1 is such that is to be arranged to protect surveyor/crews from falling form the ladder and provides rest during inspection. For example a safety harness worn by the personnel during the inspection is an acceptable equivalence. If safety harness is to be used, means should be provided for connecting the safety harness in suitable places in a practical way.


Item 4) Permanent installation of a safety cage is not practicable due to high risks of cargo damages. Portable one for use by individuals is to be envisioned. Alternatively safety harness may be used.

The maximum pitch of the treads of 350 mm is applied with a view to reducing trapping cargoes.

Ref.


1.4 In addition, portable or movable means of access shall be utilized for access to the remaining hold frames up to their upper brackets and transverse bulkheads.

Interpretation

Portable, movable or alternative means of access also is to be applied to corrugated bulkheads.


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 41 April 2004


2 Ballast tanks

Interpretation

Refer to the Observation for paragraph 2.1 of Reg. II-1/3-6.


Ref.


Top side tanks

2.1 For each topside tank of which the height is 6 m and over, one longitudinal continuous permanent means of access shall be provided along the side shell webs and installed at a minimum of 1.8 m to a maximum of 2.5 m below deck with a vertical access ladder in the vicinity of each access to that tank.

Interpretation

One continuous longitudinal permanent means of access may be provided along the side shell webs and installed at a minimum of 1.6 m to a maximum of 3 m below deck with a vertical access ladder in the vicinity of each access to that tank.


Structural configuration may require flexibility of the location of longitudinal continuous permanent means of access.

Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 42 April 2004


2.2 If no access holes are provided through the transverse ring webs within 600 mm of the tank base and the web frame rings have a web height greater than 1 m in way of side shell and sloping plating, then step rungs/grab rails shall be provided to allow safe access over each transverse web frame ring.

Interpretation N/A


Ref.


2.3 Three permanent means of access, fitted at the end bay and middle bay of each tank, shall be provided spanning from tank base up to the intersection of the sloping plate with the hatch side girder. The existing longitudinal structure may be used as part of this means of access.

Interpretation

If the longitudinal structures on the sloping plate are fitted outside of the tank a means of access is to be provided.


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 43 April 2004


2.4 For topside tanks of which the height is less than 6 m, a portable means may be utilized in lieu of the permanent means of access.

Interpretation

N/A


Ref.

►▼◄


Bilge hopper tanks

2.5 For each bilge hopper tank of which the height is 6 m and over, one longitudinal continuous permanent means of access shall be provided along the side shell webs and installed at a minimum of 1.2 m to a maximum of 1.8 m below the top of the clear opening of the web ring with a vertical access ladder in the vicinity of each access to the tank.

Interpretation


2) The longitudinal continuous permanent means of access may be alternatively located through the upper web plating above the clear opening of the web ring, when this arrangement facilitates more suitable inspection of identified structurally critical areas. A wide longitudinal frame of at least 600 mm clear width may used for the purpose of the longitudinal continuous permanent means of access.

3) The height of a bilge hopper tank located outside of the parallel part of vessel is to be taken as the maximum of the clear vertical height measured from the bottom plating to the hopper plating of the tank.

IACS UI SC 190

Page 44 April 2004

4) It should be demonstrated that portable means for inspection can deployed and made readily available in the areas where needed .

5) For double side skin bulk carriers the longitudinal continuous permanent means of access may be installed at a location within 6 m from the knuckle point if used in combination with alternative methods to gain an access to the knuckle point.


The functional requirement to get access to the identified critical area can be satisfied by the alternative arrangement given in item 5).

Ref.



Interpretation

N/A


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 45 April 2004


2.7 For bilge hopper tanks of which the height is less than 6 m, a portable means may be utilized in lieu of the permanent means of access.

Interpretation

1) The interpretation of paragraph 2.7 of Table 1 refers.

2) It should be demonstrated that a portable means can deployed and made readily available for inspection in the areas where needed.


Ref.

►▼◄


Double side skin tanks

2.8 Permanent means of access shall be provided in accordance with the applicable sections of table 1.

Interpretation

N/A


Ref.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 190

Page 46 April 2004

Table 2 - Means of access for bulk carriers, Resolution MSC.133(76)

FOREPEAK TANKS

Interpretation

Fore peak tanks with a depth of 6 m or more at the center line of the collision bulkhead shall be provided with a suitable means of access for access to critical areas such as the deck structure, overhead structure of stringers and side shell structure.

Stringers of less than 6 m in vertical distance from the overhead structure are considered to provide suitable access in combination with portable means of access.

In case the vertical distance between deck structure and the uppermost stringer or stringers are 6 m or more alternative means of access is to be provided.


The unique structural configurations and feed back information form service record as well as the present requirements for coating and surveys has been taken into account for identifying the types of damages and locations for enabling risk based inspections.

Ref


Footnote

For ore carriers, permanent means of access in wing ballast tanks shall be provided in accordance with the applicable section of table 1.

Interpretation

The requirements to Ore Carrier wing tanks arranged as void spaces should be as for wing ballast tanks.


The wing tanks are prone to damages even when arranged as void space, rafting is not an option and permanent means of access are needed to monitor the structural condition.

Ref.

►End◄

IACS UI SC 191

Page 1 November 2004

IACS Unified Interpretations (UI) SC 191

for the application of amended SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6 (resolution MSC.151(78)) and revised Technical provisions for means of access for

inspections (resolution MSC.158(78))

Note:

This UI is to be applied by IACS Members and Associates when acting as recognized organizations, authorized by flag State Administrations to act on their behalf, unless otherwise advised, from 1 January 2005.

IACS UI SC 191


SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6

1 Application

1.1 Except as provided for in paragraph 1.2, this regulation applies to oil tankers of 500 gross tonnage and over and bulk carriers, as defined in regulation IX/1, of 20,000 gross tonnage and over, constructed on or after 1 January 2006.

1.2 Oil tankers of 500 gross tonnage and over constructed on or after 1 October 1994 but before 1 January 2005 shall comply with the provisions of regulation II-1/12-2 adopted by resolution MSC.27(61).

Interpretation

Oil tankers:

This regulation is only applicable to oil tankers having integral tanks for carriage of oil in bulk, which is contained in the definition of oil in Annex 1 of MARPOL 73/78. Independent oil tanks can be excluded.

Reference should also be made to paragraph

Regulation II-1/3-6 is not normally applied to FPSO or FSO unless the Administration decides otherwise.


Means of Access (MA) specified in the Technical provisions contained in resolution MSC.158(78) are not specific with respect to the application to integral cargo oil tanks or also to independent cargo oil tanks. ESP requirements of oil tankers have been established assuming the target cargo oil tanks are integral tanks. The MA regulated under SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6 is for overall and close-up inspections as defined in regulation IX/1. Therefore it is assumed that the target cargo oil tanks are those of ESP, i.e. integral cargo tanks.

Regulation II-1/3-6 is applicable to FPSO or FSO if they are subject to the scope of ESP as contained in resolution A.744(18) as amended.

Ref.

SOLAS regulation IX/1 and resolution A.744 (18) as amended.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 191



2.2 Where a permanent means of access may be susceptible to damage during normal cargo loading and unloading operations or where it is impracticable to fit permanent means of access, the Administration may allow, in lieu thereof, the provision of movable or portable means of access, as specified in the Technical provisions, provided that the means of attaching, rigging, suspending or supporting the portable means of access forms a permanent part of the ship’s structure. All portable equipment shall be capable of being readily erected or deployed by ship’s personnel.

Interpretation:

Some possible alternative means of access are listed under paragraph 3.9 of TP. Always subject to acceptance as equivalent by the Administration, alternative means such as an unmanned robot arm, ROV’s and dirigibles with necessary equipment of the permanent means of access for overall and close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the deck head structure such as deck transverses and deck longitudinals of cargo oil tanks and ballast tanks, are to be capable of:

• safe operation in ullage space in gas-free environment;

• introduction into the place directly from a deck access.


Innovative approaches in particular a development of robot in place of elevated passageways are encouraged and it is considered worthwhile to provide the functional requirement for the innovative approach.

►▼◄


2.3 The construction and materials of all means of access and their attachment to the ship’s structure shall be to the satisfaction of the Administration. The means of access shall be subject to survey prior to, or in conjunction with, its use in carrying out surveys in accordance with regulation I/10.

Interpretation:

Inspection

The MA arrangements, including portable equipment and attachments, are to be periodically inspected by the crew or competent inspectors as and when it is going to be used to confirm that the MAs remain in serviceable condition.

IACS UI SC 191


Procedures

1. Any Company authorised person using the MA shall assume the role of inspector and check for obvious damage prior to using the access arrangements. Whilst using the MA the inspector is to verify the condition of the sections used by close up examination of those sections and note any deterioration in the provisions. Should any damage or deterioration be found, the effect of such deterioration is to be assessed as to whether the damage or deterioration affects the safety for continued use of the access. Deterioration found that is considered to affect safe use is to be determined as “substantial damage” and measures are to be put in place to ensure that the affected section(s) are not to be further used prior effective repair.

2. Statutory survey of any space that contains MA shall include verification of the continued effectiveness of the MA in that space. Survey of the MA shall not be expected to exceed the scope and extent of the survey being undertaken. If the MA is found deficient the scope of survey should be extended if this is considered appropriate.

3. Records of all inspections are to be established based on the requirements detailed in the ships Safety Management System. The records are to be readily available to persons using the MAs and a copy attached to the MA Manual. The latest record for the portion of the MA inspected should include as a minimum the date of the inspection, the name and title of the inspector, a confirmation signature, the sections of MA inspected, verification of continued serviceable condition or details of any deterioration or substantial damage found. A file of permits issued should be maintained for verification.


It is recognised that MA may be subject to deterioration in the long term due to corrosive environment and external forces from ship motions and sloshing of liquid contained in the tank. MA therefore should be inspected at every opportunity of tank/space entry. The above interpretation is to be contained in a section of the MA Manual.

►▼◄


3 Safe access to cargo holds, cargo tanks, ballast tanks and other spaces

3.1 Safe access* to cargo holds, cofferdams, ballast tanks, cargo tanks and other spaces in the cargo area shall be direct from the open deck and such as to ensure their complete inspection. Safe access to double bottom spaces or to forward ballast tanks may be from a pump-room, deep cofferdam, pipe tunnel, cargo hold, double hull space or similar compartment not intended for the carriage of oil or hazardous cargoes.

* Refer to the Recommendations for entering enclosed spaces aboard ships, adopted by

IACS UI SC 191


the Organization by resolution A.864(20).

Interpretation

Access to a double side skin space of bulk carriers may be either from a topside tank or double bottom tank or from both.


Unless used for other purposes, the double side skin space is to be designed as a part of a large U-shaped ballast tank and such space is to be accessed through the adjacent part of the tank, i.e. topside tank or double bottom/bilge hopper tank. Access to the double side skin space from the adjacent part rather than direct from the open deck is justified. Any such arrangement should provide a directly routed, logical and safe access that facilitates easy evacuation of the space.

►▼◄ SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6

3.2 Tanks, and subdivisions of tanks, having a length of 35 m or more shall be fitted with at least two access hatchways and ladders, as far apart as practicable. Tanks less than 35 m in length shall be served by at least one access hatchway and ladder. When a tank is subdivided by one or more swash bulkheads or similar obstructions which do not allow ready means of access to the other parts of the tank, at least two hatchways and ladders shall be fitted. Interpretation

A cargo oil tank of less than 35 m length without a swash bulkhead requires only one access hatch.

►▼◄


4 Ship structure access manual 4.1 A ship’s means of access to carry out overall and close-up inspections and thickness measurements shall be described in a Ship structure access manual approved by the Administration, an updated copy of which shall be kept on board. The Ship structure access manual shall include the following for each space: .1 plans showing the means of access to the space, with appropriate technical

specifications and dimensions; .2 plans showing the means of access within each space to enable an overall inspection

to be carried out, with appropriate technical specifications and dimensions. The plans shall indicate from where each area in the space can be inspected;

IACS UI SC 191


.3 plans showing the means of access within the space to enable close-up inspections to be carried out, with appropriate technical specifications and dimensions. The plans shall indicate the positions of critical structural areas, whether the means of access is permanent or portable and from where each area can be inspected;

.4 instructions for inspecting and maintaining the structural strength of all means of access and means of attachment, taking into account any corrosive atmosphere that may be within the space;

.5 instructions for safety guidance when rafting is used for close-up inspections and thickness measurements;

.6 instructions for the rigging and use of any portable means of access in a safe manner;

.7 an inventory of all portable means of access; and

.8 records of periodical inspections and maintenance of the ship’s means of access.

Interpretation

Access manual should address spaces listed in paragraph 3 of the regulation II-1/3-6.

As a minimum the English version should be provided

The ship structure access manual is to contain at least the following two parts:

Part 1: Plans, instructions and inventory required by paragraphs 4.1.1 to 4.1.7 of regulation II-1/3-6. This part is to be approved by the Administration or the organization recognised by the Administration

Part 2: Form of record of inspections and maintenance, and change of inventory of portable equipment due to additions or replacement after construction. This part is be approved for its form only at new building.

The following matters are to be addressed in the ship structure access manual:

1) The access manual should clearly cover scope as specified in the regulations for use by crews, surveyors and port state control officers.

2) Approval / re-approval procedure for the manual, i.e. any changes of the permanent, portable, movable or alternative means of access within the scope of the regulation and the Technical provisions are subject to review and approval by the Administration or by the organization recognised by the Administration.

3) Verification of MA is to be part of safety construction survey for continued effectiveness of the MA in that space which is subject to the statutory survey.

4) Inspection of MA by the crew and/or a competent inspector of the company as a part of regular inspection and maintenance.

(See Interpretation for paragraph 2.3 of SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6)

5) Actions to be taken if MA is found unsafe to use.

6) In case of use of portable equipment plans showing the means of access within each space indicating from where and how each area in the space can be inspected;

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 191



4.2 For the purpose of this regulation “critical structural areas” are locations which have been identified from calculations to require monitoring or from the service history of similar or sister ships to be sensitive to cracking, buckling, deformation or corrosion which would impair the structural integrity of the ship.

Interpretation

1) Critical structural areas are to be identified by advanced calculation techniques for structural strength and fatigue performance, if available, and feed back from the service history and design development of similar or sister ships.

2) Reference is to be made to the following publications for critical structural areas, where applicable:

- Oil tankers: Guidance Manual for Tanker Structures by TSCF; - Bulk carriers: Bulk Carriers Guidelines for Surveys, Assessment and Repair of Hull

Structure by IACS; - Oil tankers and bulk carriers: resolution A.744 (18), as amended.


These documents contain the relevant information for the present ship types. However identification of critical areas for new double hull tankers and double side skin bulk carriers of improved structural design is to be made by structural analysis at the design stage, this information is to be taken in to account to ensure appropriate access to all identified critical areas.


5 General technical specifications 5.1 For access through horizontal openings, hatches or manholes, the dimensions shall be sufficient to allow a person wearing a self-contained air-breathing apparatus and protective equipment to ascend or descend any ladder without obstruction and also provide a clear opening to facilitate the hoisting of an injured person from the bottom of the space. The minimum clear opening shall not be less than 600 mm x 600 mm. When access to a cargo hold is arranged through the cargo hatch, the top of the ladder shall be placed as close as possible to the hatch coaming. Access hatch coamings having a height greater than 900 mm shall also have steps on the outside in conjunction with the ladder.

Interpretation

The minimum clear opening of 600 mm x 600 mm may have corner radii up to 100 mm maximum. The clear opening is specified in MSC/Circ.686 to keep the opening fit for passage of personnel wearing a breathing apparatus. In such a case where as a consequence of structural analysis of a given design the stress is to be reduced around the opening, it is considered appropriate to take measures to reduce the stress such as making the opening larger with increased radii, e.g. 600 x 800 with 300 mm radii, in which a clear opening of 600 x 600 mm with corner radii up to 100mm maximum fits.

IACS UI SC 191



The interpretation is based upon the established Guidelines in MSC/Circ.686.

Ref.



5.2 For access through vertical openings, or manholes, in swash bulkheads, floors, girders and web frames providing passage through the length and breadth of the space, the minimum opening shall be not less than 600 mm x 800 mm at a height of not more than 600 mm from the bottom shell plating unless gratings or other foot holds are provided. Interpretation

1) The minimum clear opening of not less than 600 mm x 800 mm may also include an opening with corner radii of 300 mm. An opening of 600mm in height x 800mm in width may be accepted as access openings in vertical structures where it is not desirable to make large opening in the structural strength aspects, i.e. girders and floors in double bottom tanks.

2) Subject to verification of easy evacuation of injured person on a stretcher the vertical opening 850 mm x 620 mm with wider upper half than 600 mm, while the lower half may be less than 600 mm with the overall height not less than 850 mm is considered acceptable alternative to the traditional opening of 600 mm x 800 mm with corner radii of 300 mm.

3) If a vertical opening is at a height of more than 600 mm steps and handgrips are to be provided. In such arrangements it should be demonstrated that an injured person can be easily evacuated.

IACS UI SC 191



The interpretation is based upon the established Guidelines in MSC/Circ.686 and an innovative design in consideration of human body to easily access through the opening.

Ref.


►▼◄

Technical Provision, resolution MSC.158(78)

1. Preamble

1.3 In order to address this issue, the Organization has developed these Technical provisions for means of access for inspections (hereinafter called the “Technical provisions”), intended to facilitate close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the ship’s structure referred to in SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6 on Access to and within spaces in, and forward of, the cargo area of oil tankers and bulk carriers. The Technical provisions do not apply to the cargo tanks of combined chemical/oil tankers complying with the provisions of the IBC Code.

Interpretation

A "combined chemical/oil tankers complying with the provisions of the IBC Code" is a tanker that holds both a valid IOPP certificate as tanker and a valid certificate of fitness for the carriage of dangerous chemicals in bulk. i.e. a tanker that is certified to carry both oil cargoes under MARPOL Annex I and Chemical cargoes in chapter 17 of the IBC code either as full or part cargoes.

The Technical provisions are to be applied to ballast tanks of combined chemical/oil tankers complying with the provisions of the IBC Code.

►▼◄


1. Preamble

1.4 Permanent means of access which are designed to be integral parts of the structure itself are preferred and Administrations may allow reasonable deviations to facilitate such designs.

Interpretation

In the context of the above requirement the deviation shall be applied only to distances between integrated PMA that are the subject of paragraph 2.1.2 of Table 1.

Deviations shall not be applied to the distances governing the installation of underdeck

IACS UI SC 191

Page 10

November 2004

longitudinal walkways and dimensions that determine whether permanent access are required or not, such as height of the spaces and height to elements of the structure (e.g. cross-ties).

►▼◄


3.1 Structural members subject to the close-up inspections and thickness measurements of the ship’s structure referred to in SOLAS regulation II-1/ 3-6, except those in double bottom spaces, shall be provided with a permanent means of access to the extent as specified in table 1 and table 2, as applicable. For oil tankers and wing ballast tanks of ore carriers, approved alternative methods may be used in combination with the fitted permanent means of access, provided that the structure allows for its safe and effective use.

Interpretation

The permanent means of access to a space can be credited for the permanent means of access for inspection.


The Technical provisions specify means of access to a space and to hull structure for carrying out overall and close up surveys and inspections. Requirements of MA to hull structure may not always be suitable for access to a space. However if the MA for access to a space can also be used for the intended surveys and inspections such MA can be credited for the MA for use for surveys and inspections.

►▼◄ Technical Provision, resolution MSC.158(78)

3.3 Elevated passageways forming sections of a permanent means of access, where fitted, shall have a minimum clear width of 600 mm, except for going around vertical webs where the minimum clear width may be reduced to 450 mm, and have guard rails over the open side of their entire length. Sloping structure providing part of the access shall be of a non-skid construction. Guard rails shall be 1,000 mm in height and consist of a rail and intermediate bar 500 mm in height and of substantial construction. Stanchions shall be not more than 3 m apart.

Interpretation

1. Slopping structures are structures that are sloped by 5 or more degrees from

IACS UI SC 191

Page 11

November 2004

horizontal plane when a ship is in upright position at even-keel.

2. Guard rails are to be fitted on the open side. For stand alone passageways guard rails are to be fitted on both sides of these structures.

3. Discontinuous handrails are allowed provided the gap does not exceed 50 mm. The maximum distance between the adjacent stanchions across the handrail gaps is to be 350 mm.

4. Non-skid construction is such that the surface on which personnel walks provides sufficient friction to the sole of boots even the surface is wet and covered with thin sediment.

5. “Substantial construction” is taken to refer to the as designed strength as well as the residual strength during the service life of the vessel. Durability of passageways together with guard rails should be ensured by the initial corrosion protection and inspection and maintenance during services.

6. For guard rails, use of alternative materials such as GRP should be subject to compatibility with the liquid carried in the tank. Non-fire resistant materials should not be used for means of access to a space with a view to securing an escape route at a high temperature.

7. Requirements for resting platforms placed between ladders are equivalent to those applicable to elevated passageways.

Ref.

Paragraph 10 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686

►▼◄


3.4 Access to permanent means of access and vertical openings from the ship’s bottom shall be provided by means of easily accessible passageways, ladders or treads. Treads shall be provided with lateral support for the foot. Where the rungs of ladders are fitted against a vertical surface, the distance from the centre of the rungs to the surface shall be at least 150 mm. Where vertical manholes are fitted higher than 600 mm above the walking level, access shall be facilitated by means of treads and hand grips with platform landings on both sides.

Interpretation

Where the vertical manhole is at a height of more than 600 mm above the walking level, it shall be demonstrated that an injured person can be easily evacuated.

IACS UI SC 191

Page 12

November 2004

►▼◄


3.5 Permanent inclined ladders shall be inclined at an angle of less than 70º. There shall be no obstructions within 750 mm of the face of the inclined ladder, except that in way of an opening this clearance may be reduced to 600 mm. Resting platforms of adequate dimensions shall be provided normally at a maximum of 6 m vertical height. Ladders and handrails shall be constructed of steel or equivalent material of adequate strength and stiffness and securely attached to the structure by stays. The method of support and length of stay shall be such that vibration is reduced to a practical minimum. In cargo holds, ladders shall be designed and arranged so that the risk of damage from cargo handling gear is minimized.

MA for access to ballast tanks, cargo tanks and spaces other than FPT:

For oil tankers:

1. Tanks and subdivisions of tanks having a length of 35 m or more with two access hatchways:

First access hatchway: Inclined ladder or ladders are to be used.

Second access hatchway:

i. A vertical ladder may be used. In such a case where the vertical distance is more than 6 m, vertical ladders should comprise one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically and displaced to one side of the ladder.

The uppermost section of the vertical ladder, measured clear of the overhead obstructions in way of the tank entrance, should not be less than 2.5 m but not exceed 3.0 m and should comprise a ladder linking platform which should be displaced to one side of a vertical ladder. However, the vertical distance of the upper most section of the vertical ladder may be reduced to 1.6 m, measured clear of the overhead obstructions in way of the tank entrance, if the ladder lands on a longitudinal or athwartship permanent means of access fitted within that range; or

ii. Where an inclined ladder or combination of ladders is used for access to the space, the uppermost section of the ladder, measured clear of the overhead obstructions in way of the tank entrance, should be vertical for not less than 2.5 m but not exceed 3.0m and should comprise a landing platform continuing with an inclined ladder. However, the vertical distance of the upper most section of the vertical ladder may be reduced to 1.6 m, measured clear of the overhead obstructions in way of the tank entrance, if the ladder lands on a longitudinal or athwartship permanent means of access fitted within that range. The flights of the inclined ladders are normally to be not more than 6 m in vertical height. The lowermost section of the ladders may be vertical for the vertical distance not exceeding 2.5 m.

2. Tanks less than 35 m in length and served by one access hatchway an inclined ladder

IACS UI SC 191

Page 13

November 2004

or combination of ladders are to be used to the space as specified in 1.ii above.

3. In double hull spaces of less than 2.5 m width the access to the space may be by means of vertical ladders that comprises one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically and displaced to one side of the ladder. The uppermost section of the vertical ladder, measured clear of the overhead obstructions in way of the tank entrance, should not be less than 2.5 m but not exceed 3.0 m and should comprise a ladder linking platform which should be displaced to one side of a vertical ladder. However, the vertical distance of the upper most section of the vertical ladder may be reduced to 1.6 m, measured clear of the overhead obstructions in way of the tank entrance, if the ladder lands on a longitudinal or athwartship permanent means of access fitted within that range. Adjacent sections of the ladder should be laterally offset from each other by at least the width of the ladder. (Paragraph 20 of MSC/Circ.686)

4. Access from deck to a double bottom space may be by means of vertical ladders through a trunk. The vertical distance from deck to a resting platform, between resting platforms or a resting platform and the tank bottom is not be more than 6 m unless otherwise approved by the Administration.

MA for inspection of the vertical structure of oil tankers:

Vertical ladders provided for means of access to the space may be used for access for inspection of the vertical structure.

Unless stated otherwise in Table 1 of TP, vertical ladders that are fitted on vertical structures for inspection should comprise one or more ladder linking platforms spaced not more than 6 m apart vertically and displace to one side of the ladder. Adjacent sections of ladder should be laterally offset from each other by at least the width of the ladder. (Paragraph 20 of MSC/Circ.686)

Obstruction distances

The minimum distance between the inclined ladder face and obstructions, i.e. 750 mm and, in way of openings, 600 mm specified in TP 3.5 is to be measured perpendicular to the face of the ladder.


It is a common practice to use a vertical ladder from deck to the first landing to clear overhead obstructions before continuing to an inclined ladder or a vertical ladder displaced to one side of the first vertical ladder.

Ref.

For vertical ladders: Paragraph 20 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 191

Page 14

November 2004


3.6 The width of inclined ladders between stringers shall not be less than 400 mm. The treads shall be equally spaced at a distance apart, measured vertically, of between 200 mm and 300 mm. When steel is used, the treads shall be formed of two square bars of not less than 22 mm by 22 mm in section, fitted to form a horizontal step with the edges pointing upward. The treads shall be carried through the side stringers and attached thereto by double continuous welding. All inclined ladders shall be provided with handrails of substantial construction on both sides fitted at a convenient distance above the treads.

Interpretation

1) Vertical height of handrails is not to be less than 890 mm from the center of the step and two course handrails are to be provided.

2) The requirement of two square bars for treads specified in TP 3.6 is based upon the specification of construction of ladders in paragraph 3(e) of Annex 1 to resolution A.272(VIII), which addresses inclined ladders. TP.3.4 allows for single rungs fitted to vertical surfaces, which is considered for a safe grip. For vertical ladders, when steel is used, the rungs should be formed of single square bars of not less than 22 mm by 22 mm for the sake of safe grip.

3) The width of inclined ladders for access to a cargo hold is to be at least 450 mm to comply Australian AMSA Marine Orders Part 32, Appendix 17.

4) The width of inclined ladders other than an access to a cargo hold is to be not less than 400 mm.

5) The minimum width of vertical ladders is to be 350 mm and the vertical distance between the rungs is to be equal and is to be between 250 mm and 350 mm.

6) A minimum climbing clearance in width is to be 600 mm other than the ladders placed between the hold frames.

7) The vertical ladders should be secured at intervals not exceeding 2.5 m apart to prevent vibration.


• TP3.6 is a continuation of TP 3.5, which addresses inclined ladders. Interpretations for vertical ladders are needed based upon the current standards of IMO, AMSA or the industry.

• Interpretations 2) and 5) address vertical ladders based upon the current standards.

• Double square bars for treads become too large for a grip for vertical ladders and single rungs facilitate a safe grip.

• Interpretation 7) is introduced consistently with the requirement and the interpretation

IACS UI SC 191

Page 15

November 2004

of TP 3.4.

Ref.

• Annex 1 to resolution A.272(VIII)


• ILO Code of Practice “Safety and Health in Dockwork” – Section 3.6 Access to Ship’s Holds

►▼◄


3.9.6 Portable ladders more than 5 m long may only be utilized if fitted with a mechanical device to secure the upper end of the ladder. Interpretation

A mechanical device such as hooks for securing at the upper end of a ladder is considered as an appropriate securing device if a movement fore/aft and sideways can be prevented at the upper end of the ladder.



►▼◄


3.10 For access through horizontal openings, hatches or manholes, the minimum clear opening shall not be less than 600 mm x 600 mm. When access to a cargo hold is arranged through the cargo hatch, the top of the ladder shall be placed as close as possible to the hatch coaming. Access hatch coamings having a height greater than 900 mm shall also have steps on the outside in conjunction with the ladder.

3.11 For access through vertical openings, or manholes, in swash bulkheads, floors, girders and web frames providing passage through the length and breadth of the space, the minimum opening shall be not less than 600 mm x 800 mm at a height of not more than 600 mm from the passage unless gratings or other foot holds are provided

Interpretation

See interpretation for paragraphs 5.1 and 5.2 of the regulation

IACS UI SC 191

Page 16

November 2004


3.13. For bulk carriers, access ladders to a cargo hold shall be: .1 where the vertical distance between the upper surface of adjacent decks or between

deck and the bottom of the cargo space is not more than 6 m, either a vertical ladder or an inclined ladder; and

Interpretation Either a vertical or an inclined ladder or a combination of them may be used for access to a cargo hold where the vertical distance is 6 m or less from the deck to the bottom of the cargo hold.

►▼◄

Table 1 – Means of access for oil tankers, resolution MSC.158(78)

1 Water ballast tanks, except those specified in the right column, and cargo oil tanks


1.1 For tanks of which the height is 6 m and over containing internal structures, permanent means of access shall be provided in accordance with .1 to .6:

Interpretation

1) Sub-paragraphs .1, .2 and .3 define access to underdeck structure, access to the uppermost sections of transverse webs and connection between these structures.

2) Sub-paragraphs .4, .5 and .6 define access to vertical structures only and are linked to the presence of transverse webs on longitudinal bulkheads.

3) If there are no underdeck structures (deck longitudinals and deck transverses) but there are vertical structures in the cargo tank supporting tranverse and longitudinal bulkheads, access in accordance with sub-paragraphs from .1 through to .6 is to be provided for inspection of the upper parts of vertical structure on transverse and longitudinal bulkheads.

4) If there is no structure in the cargo tank, section 1.1 of Table 1 is not applicable.

5) Section 1 of Table 1 is also to be applied to void spaces in cargo area, comparable in volume to spaces covered by the regulation II-1/3-6, except those spaces covered by Section 2.

6) The vertical distance below the overhead structure is to be measured from the underside of the main deck plating to the top of the platform of the means of access at a given location.

IACS UI SC 191

Page 17

November 2004

7) The height of the tank is to be measured at each tank. For a tank the height of which varies at different bays item 1.1 is to be applied to such bays of a tank that have height 6 m and over.


Interpretation 7) If the height of the tank is increasing along the length of a ship the permanent means of access is to be provided locally where the height is above 6 m.

Ref.

Paragraph 10 of Annex to MSC/Circ.686.

►▼◄


1.1.2 at least one continuous longitudinal permanent means of access at each side of the tank. One of these accesses shall be at a minimum of 1.6 m to a maximum of 6 m below the deck head and the other shall be at a minimum of 1.6 m to a maximum of 3 m below the deck head;

Interpretation

There is need to provide continuous longitudinal permanent means of access when the deck longitudinals and deck transverses are fitted on deck but supporting brackets are fitted under the deck.

►▼◄


1.1.3 access between the arrangements specified in .1 and .2 and from the main deck to either .1 or .2.

Interpretation

Means of access to tanks may be used for access to the permanent means of access for inspection.


IACS UI SC 191

Page 18

November 2004

As a matter of principle, in such a case where the means of access can be utilised for the purpose of accessing structural members for inspection there is no need of duplicated installation of the MA.

►▼◄


1.1.4 continuous longitudinal permanent means of access which are integrated in the structural member on the stiffened surface of a longitudinal bulkhead, in alignment, where possible, with horizontal girders of transverse bulkheads are to be provided for access to the transverse webs unless permanent fittings are installed at the uppermost platform for use of alternative means as defined in paragraph 3.9 of the Technical provisions for inspection at intermediate heights;

Interpretation

The permanent fittings required to serve alternative means of access such as wire lift platform, that are to be used by crew and surveyors for inspection shall provide at least an equal level of safety as the permanent means of access stated by the same paragraph. These means of access shall be carried on board the ship and be readily available for use without filling of water in the tank.

Therefore, rafting is not acceptable under this provision.

Alternative means of access are to be part of Access Manual which is to be approved on behalf of the flag State

►▼◄


2 Water ballast wing tanks of less than 5 m width forming double side spaces and their bilge hopper sections

Access to the underdeck structure

2.1 For double side spaces above the upper knuckle point of the bilge hopper sections, permanent means of access are to be provided in accordance with .1 and .2:

Interpretation

Section 2 of Table 1 is also to be applied to wing tanks designed as void spaces.

Paragraph 2.1.1 represents requirements for access to underdeck structures, while paragraph 2.1.2 is a requirement for access for survey and inspection of vertical structures on longitudinal bulkheads (transverse webs).


Regulation II-1/3-6.2.1 requires each space to be provided with means of access. Though

IACS UI SC 191

Page 19

November 2004

void spaces are not addressed in the technical provisions contained in resolution MSC.158(78) it is arguable whether MA is not required in void spaces. MA or portable means of access are necessary arrangement to facilitate inspection of the structural condition of the space and the boundary structure. Therefore the requirements of Section 2 of Table 1 is to be applied to double hull spaces even designed as void spaces.

►▼◄

IACS UI SC 191

Page 20

November 2004


2. Wing water ballast tanks less than 5 m width forming double side spaces and their bilge hopper sections

Access to the underdeck structure

2.1.1 Where the vertical distance between horizontal uppermost stringer and deck head is 6 m or more, one continuous permanent means of access shall be provided for the full length of the tank with a means to allow passing through transverse webs installed a minimum of 1.6 m to a maximum of 3 m below the deck head with a vertical access ladder at each end of tank;

Interpretation

1. For a tank the vertical distance between horizontal upper stringer and deck head of which varies at different sections item 2.1.1 is to be applied to such sections that falls under the criteria.

2. The continuous permanent means of access may be a wide longitudinal, which provides access to critical details on the opposite side by means of platforms as necessary on web frames. In case the vertical opening of the web frame is located in way of the open part between the wide longitudinal and the longitudinal on the opposite side, platforms shall be provided on both sides of the web frames to allow safe passage through the web frame.

3. Where two access hatches are required by SOLAS regulation II-1/3-6.3.2, access ladders at each end of the tank are to lead to the deck.


Interpretation 1) The interpretation of varied tank height in item 1 of Table 1 is applied to the vertical distance between horizontal upper stringer and deck head for consistency.

►▼◄


2.1.2 continuous longitudinal permanent means of access, which are integrated in the structure, at a vertical distance not exceeding 6 m apart; and

Interpretation

The continuous permanent means of access may be a wide longitudinal, which provides access to critical details on the opposite side by means of platforms as necessary on webframes. In case the vertical opening of the web is located in way of the open part between the wide longitudinal and the longitudinal on the opposite side, platforms shall be provided on both sides of the web to allow safe passage through the web.

A “reasonable deviation”, as noted in TP/1.4, of not more than 10% may be applied where

IACS UI SC 191

Page 21

November 2004

the permanent means of access is integral with the structure itself.

►▼◄


2.2 For bilge hopper sections of which the vertical distance from the tank bottom to the upper knuckle point is 6 m and over, one longitudinal permanent means of access shall be provided for the full length of the tank. It shall be accessible by vertical permanent means of access at both ends of the tank.

Interpretation


2) The height of a bilge hopper tank located outside of the parallel part of vessel is to be taken as the maximum of the clear vertical distance measured from the bottom plating to the hopper plating of the tank.

3) The foremost and aftmost bilge hopper ballast tanks with raised bottom, of which the height is 6 m and over, a combination of transverse and vertical MA for access to the upper knuckle point for each transverse web is to be accepted in place of the longitudinal permanent means of access.


Interpretation 2): The bilge hopper tanks at fore and aft of cargo area narrow due to raised bottom plating and the actual vertical distance from the bottom of the tank to hopper plating of the tank is more appropriate to judge if a portable means of access could be utilized for the purpose.

Interpretation 3): in the foremost or aftmost bilge hopper tanks where the vertical distance is 6 m or over but installation of longitudinal permanent means of access is not practicable permanent means of access of combination of transverse and vertical ladders provides an alternative means of access to the upper knuckle point.

►▼◄

Table 2 – Means of access for bulk carriers, resolution MSC.158(78)

1 Cargo holds

Access to underdeck structure

1.1 Permanent means of access shall be fitted to provide access to the overhead structure at both sides of the cross deck and in the vicinity of the centreline. Each means of access shall be accessible from the cargo hold access or directly from the main deck and installed at a minimum of 1.6 m to a maximum of 3 m below the deck.

IACS UI SC 191

Page 22

November 2004

Interpretation

1. Means of access shall be provided to the crossdeck structures of the foremost and aftermost part of the each cargo hold.

2. Interconnected means of access under the cross deck for access to three locations at both sides and in the vicinity of the centerline is acceptable as the three means of access.

3. Permanent means of access fitted at three separate locations accessible independently, one at each side and one in the vicinity of the centerline is acceptable.

4. Special attention is to be paid to the structural strength where any access opening is provided in the main deck or cross deck.

5. The requirements for bulk carrier cross deck structure is also considered applicable to ore carriers.


Pragmatic arrangements of the MA are provided.

►▼◄ Table 2 – Means of access for bulk carriers, resolution MSC.158(78)

1.3 Access to the permanent means of access to overhead structure of the cross deck may also be via the upper stool.

Interpretation

Particular attention is to be paid to preserve the structural strength in way of access opening provided in the main deck or cross deck.

►▼◄


1.4 Ships having transverse bulkheads with full upper stools with access from the main deck which allows monitoring of all framing and plates from inside, do not require permanent means of access of the cross deck.

Interpretation

“Full upper stools” are understood to be stools with a full extension between top side tanks

IACS UI SC 191

Page 23

November 2004

and between hatch end beams.

►▼◄


1.5 Alternatively, movable means of access may be utilized for access to the overhead structure of cross deck if its vertical distance is 17 m or less above the tank top.

Interpretation

1) The movable means of access to the underdeck structure of cross deck need not necessarily be carried on board the vessel. It is sufficient if it is made available when needed.

2) The requirements for bulk carrier cross deck structure is also considered applicable to ore carriers.

►▼◄



1.6 Permanent means of vertical access shall be provided in all cargo holds and built into the structure to allow for an inspection of a minimum of 25 % of the total number of hold frames port and starboard equally distributed throughout the hold including at each end in way of transverse bulkheads. But in no circumstance shall this arrangement be less than 3 permanent means of vertical access fitted to each side (fore and aft ends of hold and mid-span). Permanent means of vertical access fitted between two adjacent hold frames is counted for an access for the inspection of both hold frames. A means of portable access may be used to gain access over the sloping plating of lower hopper ballast tanks.

Interpretation

The maximum vertical distance of the rungs of vertical ladders for access to hold frames is to be 350 mm.

If safety harness is to be used, means should be provided for connecting the safety harness in suitable places in a practical way.


The maximum vertical distance of the rungs of 350 mm is applied with a view to reducing trapping cargoes.

IACS UI SC 191

Page 24

November 2004

►▼◄


1.7 In addition, portable or movable means of access shall be utilized for access to the remaining hold frames up to their upper brackets and transverse bulkheads.

Interpretation

Portable, movable or alternative means of access also is to be applied to corrugated bulkheads.

►▼◄


2.3 Three permanent means of access, fitted at the end bay and middle bay of each tank, shall be provided spanning from tank base up to the intersection of the sloping plate with the hatch side girder. The existing longitudinal structure may be used as part of this means of access.

Interpretation

If the longitudinal structures on the sloping plate are fitted outside of the tank a means of access is to be provided.


Bilge hopper tanks

2.5 For each bilge hopper tank of which the height is 6 m and over, one longitudinal continuous permanent means of access shall be provided along the side shell webs and installed at a minimum of 1.2 m below the top of the clear opening of the web ring with a vertical access ladder in the vicinity of each access to the tank.

Interpretation

1. The height of a bilge hopper tank located outside of the parallel part of vessel is to be taken as the maximum of the clear vertical height measured from the bottom plating to the hopper plating of the tank.

2. It should be demonstrated that portable means for inspection can deployed and

IACS UI SC 191

Page 25

November 2004

made readily available in the areas where needed.

►▼◄


Bilge hopper tanks

2.5.2 Alternatively, the longitudinal continuous permanent means of access can be located through the upper web plating above the clear opening of the web ring, at a minimum of 1.6 m below the deck head, when this arrangement facilitates more suitable inspection of identified structurally critical areas. An enlarged longitudinal frame can be used for the purpose of the walkway.

Interpretation

A wide longitudinal frame of at least 600 mm clear width may be used for the purpose of the longitudinal continuous permanent means of access.



Interpretation

The height of web frame rings should be measured in way of side shell and tank base.


In the bilge hopper tank the sloping plating is above the opening, while the movement of the surveyor is along the bottom of the tank. Therefore the measurement of 1 m should be taken from the bottom of the tank.

END

SC192

Arrangement of galley ductsSOLAS Reg.II-2/9.7.2.1:

The ventilation systems for machinery spaces of category A, vehicle spaces, ro-ro spaces, galleys, special category spaces and cargo spaces shall, in general, beseparated from each other and from the ventilation systems serving other spaces,except that the galley ventilation systems on cargo ships of less than 4,000 grosstonnage and in passenger ships carrying not more than 36 passengers need not becompletely separated, but may be served by separate ducts from a ventilation unitserving other spaces. In any case, an automatic fire damper shall be fitted in thegalley ventilation duct near the ventilation unit.

Interpretation

The expression “in any case” means, in this context, “for any duct section” and thissentence actually applies to arrangements where a ventilation unit serves somespaces and a galley by a separate duct, as permitted for cargo ships of less than 4,000gross tonnage and for passenger ships carrying not more than 36 passengers.

Note:This UI is to be uniformly implemented by IACS Members and Associates to ships keellaid from 1 July 2005.

IACS Int. 2004

SC192(Dec 2004)

END